Thane Integral Ring Metro DPR With Sanction Order and GR
Thane Integral Ring Metro DPR With Sanction Order and GR
SEPTEMBER 2023
Detailed Project Report for Thane Metro Rail
Final DPR Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SALIENT FEATURES
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
6. STATION PLANNING
6.1. STATION PLANNING ‐ BASED ON SITE CONDITIONS .......................................................... 6‐1
6.2. STATION AREA PLANNING FOR NON‐MOTORIZED VEHICLE AND ..........................................
PEDESTRIANS FACILITIES .................................................................................................. 6‐53
6.3. ACCESSIBILITY FOR DIFFERENTLY ABLED.......................................................................... 6‐56
6.4. PARKING ON STATIONS ................................................................................................... 6‐57
7. INTERMODAL INTEGRATION
7. INTERMODAL INTEGRATION.............................................................................................. 7‐1
7.1 INTERMODAL INTEGRATION WITH EXISTING MODES ....................................................... 7‐1
7.2 FEEDER SERVICES PLANNING AT STATIONS ....................................................................... 7‐2
7.3 PHYSICAL INFRASTRUCTURE REQUIREMENT FOR INTERMODAL INTEGRATION................ 7‐6
7.4 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR INSTITUTIONAL, PHYSICAL, FARE, OPERATIONAL AND ..............
TECHNOLOGY INTEGRATION ........................................................................................... 7‐7
14. DEPOTS
14.1 DEPOT LOCATION AND APPROACH TO MAINTENANCE................................................... 14‐1
14.2 DESIGN OF DEPOT FACILITIES AND DEPOT LAYOUT PLANS.............................................. 14‐4
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1.1: REGIONAL LINKAGE OF THANE ................................................................................... 1‐4
FIGURE 1.2 : STUDY AREA MAP THANE........................................................................................... 1‐6
FIGURE 1.3: DRAFT DEVELOPMENT PLAN FOR THANE‐2007 .......................................................... 1‐8
FIGURE 1.4: EXISTING LAND USE PLAN OF THANE CITY (CMP2018) ............................................. 1‐10
FIGURE 1.5: THANE AS A TRANSIT HUB OF MMR ......................................................................... 1‐13
FIGURE 1.6: MAJOR AREAS AND LANDUSE ACTIVITIES ................................................................. 1‐15
FIGURE 5.1: PROPOSED THANE METRO RING CORRIDOR – NEW THANE TO NEW THANE VIA
DONGRIPADA & THANE JUNCTION............................................................................................... 5‐18
FIGURE 5.2: LOCATION OF HCMTR AND DP ROADS...................................................................... 5‐20
FIGURE 5.3: CONDITION AT LOKMANYA NAGAR BUS DEPOT AREA ............................................. 5‐21
FIGURE 5.4: KASARVADAVALI DEPOT LOCATION .......................................................................... 5‐23
FIGURE 5.5: DEPOT CONNECTIVITY NEAR KASARVADAVALI ......................................................... 5‐24
FIGURE 5.6: SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF THANE METRO ................................................................ 5‐30
FIGURE 5.7: ALIGNMENT OPTIONS PARAMETERS ........................................................................ 5‐31
FIGURE 5.8: TYPICAL CROSS SECTION OF BALLASTLESS TRACK ON VIADUCT ............................... 5‐37
URE 5.9: 1 IN 9 TYPE TURN‐OUT ................................................................................................... 5‐37
FIGURE 5.10: SCISSOR CROSS‐OVER (1 IN 9 TYPE) ........................................................................ 5‐38
FIGURE 5.11: TYPES OF SUPERSTRUCTURE ................................................................................... 5‐43
FIGURE 5.12: LAUNCHING OF BOX GIRDER SEGMENTS ................................................................ 5‐44
FIGURE 5.13: PRECAST U‐CHANNEL SUPERSTRUCTURE................................................................ 5‐45
FIGURE 5.14: LAUNCHING OF U‐CHANNEL GIRDER ...................................................................... 5‐46
FIGURE 5.15: LAUNCHING OF I‐GIRDER ........................................................................................ 5‐47
FIGURE 5.16: CLC SPAN 75M + 105M + 75M AND STEEL SPAN 60M ............................................ 5‐47
FIGURE 5.17: TYPICAL BOX GIRDER VIADUCT SECTION ................................................................ 5‐48
FIGURE 5.18: TYPICAL ELEVATED STATION ................................................................................... 5‐52
FIGURE 5.19: EARTH PRESSURE BALANCE TBM ............................................................................ 5‐53
FIGURE 5.20: TYPICAL TWIN TUNNEL ARRANGEMENT ................................................................. 5‐54
FIGURE 5.21: LAUNCHING CHAMBER ........................................................................................... 5‐57
FIGURE 5.22: TYPICAL ASSEMBLY OF TUNNEL BORING MACHINE ................................................ 5‐57
FIGURE 5.23: MAIN SHIELD ERECTION .......................................................................................... 5‐58
FIGURE 5.24: ERECTOR, SCREW CONVEYOR & BACKUP SYSTEM .................................................. 5‐58
FIGURE 5.25: EXCAVATION ........................................................................................................... 5‐59
FIGURE 5.26: RING SEGMENT ....................................................................................................... 5‐59
FIGURE 5.27: TBM THROUGH THE DIAPHRAGM WALL................................................................. 5‐63
FIGURE 5.28: TBM PUSHED TO THE OTHER END OF THE STATION ............................................... 5‐63
FIGURE 5.29: CONSTRUCTION OF TUNNEL BY NATM ................................................................... 5‐64
FIGURE 5.30: TYPICAL CROSS SECTION OF TWIN TUNNELS OF U/G STATION BY NATM ............... 5‐64
FIGURE 8.1: PHPDT DEMAND AND CAPACITY PROVIDED (YEAR 2025) ........................................... 8‐4
FIGURE 8.2:PHPDT DEMAND AND CAPACITY PROVIDED (YEAR 2035)............................................ 8‐5
FIGURE 8.3: PHPDT DEMAND AND CAPACITY PROVIDED (YEAR 2045) ........................................... 8‐5
FIGURE 8.4:PHPDT DEMAND AND CAPACITY PROVIDED (YEAR 2050)............................................ 8‐6
FIGURE 9.1: TRAIN CAB RADIO AND COMM. FACILITY FOR MAINTENANCE ................................. 9‐10
FIGURE 9.2: MASTER CLOCK ......................................................................................................... 9‐11
FIGURE 9.3: PASSENGER INFORMATION DISPLAY SYSTEM ........................................................... 9‐11
FIGURE 9.4: PIDS AT PLATFORM AND CONCOURSE ...................................................................... 9‐12
FIGURE 9.5: PLATFORM SCREEN DOOR ........................................................................................ 9‐15
FIGURE 9.6: MANUAL SCREEN DOOR ........................................................................................... 9‐16
FIGURE 9.7: EMERGENCY ESCAPE DOORS & FIXED SCREENS/PANELS .......................................... 9‐16
FIGURE 9.8: HALF HEIGHT PSD...................................................................................................... 9‐17
FIGURE 9.9: FULL HEIGHT PSD ...................................................................................................... 9‐17
FIGURE 10.1:FARE COLLECTION TECHNOLOGY DEVELOPMENT ................................................... 10‐1
FIGURE 10.2: AFC OPERATION PROCESS....................................................................................... 10‐2
FIGURE 10.3: AFC SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE ................................................................................... 10‐2
FIGURE10.4: BANKING INTERFACE ............................................................................................... 10‐3
FIGURE 10.5: NEAR FIELD COMMUNICATION ............................................................................... 10‐4
FIGURE 10.6:EMV BASED PAYMENT SYSTEM ............................................................................... 10‐5
FIGURE 10.7:COMMON MOBILITY CARD OVERVIEW.................................................................... 10‐6
FIGURE 11.1: SIMPLIFIED VELOCITY – TIME OPERATION CURVE .................................................. 11‐6
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1.1: PERCENTAGE OF POPULATION DECADAL VARIATION ................................................... 1‐5
TABLE 1.2: EMPLOYMENT GROWTH AND FORECAST FOR TMC AREA ............................................ 1‐6
TABLE 1.3: LANDUSE BREAKUP OF THANE CITY .............................................................................. 1‐7
TABLE 1.4: LAND USE OF THANE CITY ‐CMP2018 ........................................................................... 1‐9
TABLE 1.5: PERMISSIBLE FSI IN THANE.......................................................................................... 1‐11
TABLE 2.1: GROWTH OF REGISTERED VEHICLES IN THANE (IN LAKH)............................................. 2‐1
TABLE 2.2: DISTRIBUTION OF ROAD NETWORK AS PER RIGHT OF WAY ......................................... 2‐2
TABLE 2.3: AVAILABILITY OF FOOTPATH ......................................................................................... 2‐3
TABLE 2.4: DAILY & PEAK HOUR PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC AT SURVEY LOCATIONS ............................. 2‐4
TABLE 2.5: ROAD ACCIDENT STATISTICS IN MUMBAI ..................................................................... 2‐9
TABLE 2 6: DETAILS OF TMT TRANSPORT SYSTEM ........................................................................ 2‐10
TABLE 2.7 TRAFFIC PROJECTION FOR HORIZON YEAR................................................................... 2‐13
TABLE 2.8 TRAIN OPERATION....................................................................................................... 2‐13
TABLE 2.9: POLLUTION LEVEL CLASSIFICATION............................................................................. 2‐19
TABLE 2.10: AMBIENT AIR QUALITY TREND OF THANE ................................................................. 2‐19
TABLE 3.1: TRAFFIC ZONES IN STUDY AREA ................................................................................... 3‐1
TABLE 3.2: DISTRIBUTION OF ROAD NETWORK AS PER ABUTTING LANDUSE ................................ 3‐3
TABLE 3.3: DAILY TRAFFIC VOLUME AT SCREEN LINE/MID‐BLOCK LOCATIONS .............................. 3‐4
TABLE 3.4: INTENSITY AND DIRECTIONAL DISTRIBUTION OF TRAFFIC AT SCREEN LINE/MID‐BLOCK
LOCATIONS ..................................................................................................................................... 3‐5
TABLE 3.5: DAILY TRAFFIC VOLUME AT INTERSECTION SURVEY LOCATIONS .................................. 3‐6
TABLE 3.6: INTENSITY AND PEAK HOUR TRAFFIC AT INTERSECTIONS ............................................. 3‐8
TABLE 3.7: DAILY TRAFFIC VOLUME (24 HOURS) AT OUTER CORDON LOCATIONS....................... 3‐10
TABLE 3.8: INTENSITY AND DIRECTIONAL DISTRIBUTION OF TRAFFIC AT OUTER CORDON
LOCATIONS ................................................................................................................................... 3‐11
TABLE 3.9: DISTRIBUTION OF OUTER CORDONPASSENGERS BY TRIP PURPOSE .......................... 3‐12
TABLE 3.10: DISTRIBUTION OF OUTER CORDON PASSENGERS BY TRAVEL FREQUENCY ............... 3‐12
TABLE 3.11: DISTRIBUTION OF OUTER CORDON PASSENGERS BY TRAVEL TIME .......................... 3‐13
TABLE 3.12: DISTRIBUTION OF OUTER CORDON PASSENGERS BY TRIP LENGTH .......................... 3‐13
TABLE 3.13: WILLINGNESS OF TO SHIFT TO MRTS FOR REACHING TERMINAL ............................. 3‐13
TABLE 3.14: WILLINGNESS TO CHOOSE METRO FOR REACHING RAIL TERMINAL WITH RESPECT TO
TIME SAVINGS .............................................................................................................................. 3‐14
TABLE 3.15: WILLINGNESS TO PAY EXTRA FARE FOR REACHING RAIL TERMINAL ......................... 3‐14
TABLE 3.16: WILLINGNESS OF PT/IPT PASSENGERS TO SHIFT TO MRTS ....................................... 3‐15
TABLE 3.17: WILLINGNESS TO CHOOSE METRO WITH RESPECT TO TIME SAVINGS...................... 3‐15
TABLE 3.18: WILLINGNESS TO PAY EXTRA FARE FOR MRTS SYSTEM ............................................ 3‐15
TABLE 3.19: DISTRIBUTION OF ROAD LENGTH BY PEAK HOUR JOURNEY SPEED ......................... 3‐16
TABLE 3.20: DISTRIBUTION OF ROAD LENGTH BY PEAK HOUR RUNNING SPEED ......................... 3‐16
TABLE 3.21: DISTRIBUTION OF CAUSES AND DELAYS IN PEAK & OFF PEAK HOURS...................... 3‐17
TABLE 3.22: PEAK HOUR PARKING ACCUMULATION .................................................................... 3‐18
TABLE 3.23: PARKING DEMAND.................................................................................................... 3‐19
TABLE 20 2: ESTIMATED DEMAND & MODAL SHARE IN “WITH” AND “WITHOUT SCENARIO”... 20‐2
TABLE 20 3: FACTORS USED FOR CONVERTING PROJECT COSTS TO ECONOMIC COSTS ............. 20‐3
TABLE 20 4: FINANCIAL COSTS OF METRO ‐ CAPITAL O&M (RS. IN CRORE) .................................. 20‐3
TABLE 20 5: ECONOMIC COSTS OF METRO‐ CAPITAL AND O&M (RS IN CRORE) .......................... 20‐3
TABLE 20 6: REDUCED PASSENGER TRIPS DUE TO THANE MRTS .................................................. 20‐3
TABLE 20 7: MODE WISE VOC FOR THANE .................................................................................... 20‐5
TABLE20 8: MODE WISE VOT FOR THANE MRTS........................................................................... 20‐5
TABLE 20 9: MODE WISE OPERATIONAL PARAMETERS –METRO.................................................. 20‐6
TABLE 20 10: MODE WISE EMISSION FACTORS (GRAM/KM) ........................................................ 20‐6
TABLE 20 11: FACTORS FOR CONVERTING PROJECT BENEFITS IN ECONOMIC COSTS................... 20‐8
TABLE 20 12: ECONOMIC RETURN PARAMETERS OF THANE METRO ........................................... 20‐9
TABLE 20 13: ECONOMIC RETURN PARAMETERS OF THANEMETRO ............................................ 20‐9
TABLE 20 14: SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS ........................................................................................... 20‐10
TABLE 20 15: COST AND BENEFIT STREAM FOR METRO SYSTEM (IN CRORE)............................. 20‐11
TABLE 21.1: PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE ................................................................... 21‐1
SALIENT FEATURES
1. GAUGE(STANDARD) : 1435mm
3. TRAFFIC FORECAST
Year Maximum PHPDT Daily Ridership (in Lakh)
2029 23,320 6.47
2035 29,489 7.61
2045 31,393 8.72
4. NUMBER OF STATIONS
5. STATION PLANNING
Two typical designs have been suggested for various station types and these will form
basis for planning of all the stations.
6. INTERMODAL INTEGRATION
Feeder Bus Services, Public Bicycle Sharing, Parking and Pedestrian facilities (footpath,
Zebra crossing, table top etc) have been proposed.
8. SPEED
a) Design Speed : 80 kmph
b) Scheduled Speed : 34 kmph
c) Sub Stations
RSS of Metro Authority Approx. Dist.
Grid sub-station
Proposed GSS to RSS
400kV MSETCL Substation, Kalwa Shivaji Chowk RSS (220/33 kV) 5 km
MSED 220kV sub-station, Thane Gandhi Nagar RSS (220/33 kV) 6 km
13. DEPOTS
Maintenance facilities at Kasarvadavali Depot: 18 Ha.
Social Impact Assessment has been carried out on the basis of sample socio-economic
survey. The cost for implementation of Resettlement and Rehabilitation Plan is included
in the Land cost.
Various security measures like CCTV cameras, baggage scanners, metal detectors, bomb
detection equipment, wireless sets, snuffer dogs and related facilities will be part of
station security system.
Amount
Particulars % Share
(Rs in Cr)
Equity by GoI 1151.13 15.30%
Equity by Govt. of Maharashtra 1151.13 15.30%
SD for CT by Govt. of Maharashtra 354.11 4.70%
SD for CT by GoI 354.11 4.70%
Soft Loan from bilateral/multilateral funding agencies 4515.72 60.00%
Total Cost excluding Land, R&R and PPP 7526.20 100.00%
Contribution by Local Bodies as Grant 200.00
SD for land and R&R by Govt. of Maharashtra 3414.20
State Taxes towards Completion Cost 615.64 -
IDC by GoM 312.71
Total Cost including Land, R&R, State Taxes and IDC 12068.76 -
PPP Component 131.34
Total Completion Cost 12200.10
SD: Subordinate Debt, CT: Central Taxes, IDC: Interest During Construction
* On behalf of Govt of Maharashtra - TMC may bear the cost
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
0.1 PROFILE OF THE CITY
Thane is located on the Northern extremity of Greater Mumbai adjoining Ulhas River
and Creek. Boundaries of Greater Mumbai and Thane are contiguous and extend till
Bhiwandi and Kalyan - Dombivli. The city is located on latitude 720 50' North with
longitude 190 10' East.
Thane became District Headquarter and came up as an Industrial Town during 1960-
70. The major industrial estates like Wagle, Kalwa, Kolshet and Balkum complex were
developed and experienced significant growth during this decade. The City comprises
of a number of lakes such as Siddheshwar Lake, Brahmala Lake, Jail Lake, Kachrali lake,
Masunda Lake etc. The geographical jurisdiction of the Thane city spreads over an area
of 147 sq. km and the same is taken as the study area (Figure 0.1).
Thane has experienced a rapid growth in urbanisation during last few decades. As per
census 2011, the population of TMC was 18.4 Lakh. The projected population for the
year 2017, 2027, 2035 and 2045 is 20.7 Lakh, 27.3 Lakh, 35.0 Lakh and 39.4 Lakh
respectively.
In order to alleviate the transport related problems in the City and to meet the
increasing travel demand of the area, State Government has decided to introduce an
efficient, safe and high-capacity public transport system in Thane. Government of
Maharashtra through MAHA metro has decided to prepare Comprehensive Mobility
Plan (CMP), Alternative Analysis Report (AAR) and Detailed Project Report (DPR). CMP
has prepared by another consultant (M/S Tandon Urban Solutions Pvt. Ltd. (TUSPL)).
RITES has been engaged by Maha-Metro on behalf of Thane Municipal Corporation
for " preparation of Alternative Analysis Report and Detailed Project Report for Thane
".
0.2.1. The registered vehicles in Thane have increased significantly over the years. The
numbers of vehicle registration per year have increased from 13.9 lakh (2011) to
19.4 lakh in 2017 year.
0.2.2. About 67% of the road network has less than 20m ROW, 21% has ROW between 20-
30m and merely 12% of the road has ROW more than 30m. 92% of the road network
has footpath available along the road. Average Journey Speed during peak period for
city as a whole is observed to be 20 kmph.
0.2.3. There are 5 major bus terminals in the City, namely, SATIS Thane West, Lokmanya
Nagar, Thane Station East, Wagle Aagar and Chendani.
0.2.4. Study area is served majorly by 4 railway stations, namely, Thane, Kalwa, Mumbra and
Diva.
0.3.1. A total of 95 traffic zones in Study Area have been considered. The projected
population, employment in the years 2027, 2035 and 2045 is presented in the Table
0.1.
Population (Lakh)
S.No. Area
2017 2027 2035 2045
1 Thane Municipal Corporation 20.68 27.34 34.99 39.45
Source: MAHA- Metro (CMP, 2018)
0.3.2. A four-stage travel demand model has been developed for transport demand
forecasting as part of CMP and the same has been adopted in the DPR. The maximum
peak hour peak direction trips (PHPDT) and the daily ridership are shown in the Table
0.2. Total Daily ridership on the metro corridor for the years 2027, 2035 and 2045 is
expected to be 5.76 Lakh, 7.61 Lakh and 8.72 Lakh passengers respectively.
The urban transport requirements of Thane have been evaluated based on projected
traffic demand. Considering the city specific characteristics, traffic demand,
availability of right of way and possible integration with Mumbai metro corridor, a
Metro rail system with combination of 3 and 6 car train composition - which can cater
to a maximum of about 32,000 PHPDT, is proposed.
a. Since heavy loads are to be transferred to sub soil strata at viaduct part of
alignment therefore, Pile Foundations is recommended for the viaduct part.
c. Since the proposed site is situated in seismic Zone III of the seismic zonation map
of India, suitable seismic coefficient commensurate to seismic Zone III (IS: 1893)
to be adopted in the design of the structures.
Total 22 stations have been proposed, out of which 20 are elevated and 2 are
underground stations.
v. Land Requirement
c. The total evacuation time for the movement of all passengers in an emergency
from platform level to the landing at the point of safety does not exceed 4.0
minutes for enclosed station and 5.5 minutes for open station (As per NBC 2016
Guidelines)
d. The station planning is in compliance to the “Guidelines and space Standards for
Barrier Free Built Environment for Disabled and Elderly persons” published by the
Ministry of Urban Affairs and Employment India in 1998.
Two typical designs have been suggested (Table 0.13) and these will form basis for
planning of all the stations (Table 0.14).
Inter-
Chainages Station Cumulative Elevated/
Sn Station Name
(M) Distance Distance (M) Underground
(M)
Corridor: New Thane To New Thane(Ring Corridor) Via Dongripada & Thane Junction
1 New Thane 0 - 0 Underground
2 Raila Devi 1664 1664 1664 Elevated
3 Wagle Circle 2903 1239 2903 Elevated
Lokmanya Nagar Bus
4 4291 1388 4291 Elevated
Depot
5 Shivai Nagar 5520 1229 5520 Elevated
6 Neelkanth Terminal 6774 1254 6774 Elevated
7 Gandhi Nagar 7634 860 7634 Elevated
Dr. Kashinath
8 9032 1398 9032 Elevated
Ghanekar Natyagraha
9 Manpada 9792 760 9792 Elevated
10 Dongripada 11622 1830 11622 Elevated
11 Vijay Nagari 12372 750 12372 Elevated
12 Waghbil 13611 1239 13611 Elevated
13 Waterfront 14685 1074 14685 Elevated
14 Patlipada 16734 2049 16734 Elevated
15 Azad Nagar Bus Stop 17581 847 17581 Elevated
16 Manorma Nagar 18616 1035 18616 Elevated
Kolshet Industrial
17 19954 1338 19954 Elevated
Area
18 Balkum Naka 21118 1164 21118 Elevated
19 Balkumpada 22098 980 22098 Elevated
20 Rabodi 22986 888 22986 Elevated
21 Shivaji Chowk 23873 887 23873 Elevated
22 Thane Junction 25841 1968 25841 Underground
Pedestrian facilities like continuous footpath of 1.8m to 3.0m (as per land
availability), demarcation of pick and drop for PT/IPT, Zebra crossing at
The Metro Rail system should be user-friendly ensuring accessibility to persons with
disabilities, people travelling with small children or are carrying luggage, as well as
people with temporary mobility problems and the elderly persons. The standardsare
extracted from ‘Guidelines for Pedestrian Facilities' and ‘NFPA Guidelines’, ‘Space
Standards for Barrier Free Built Environment for differently-abled and Elderly Persons'
and other standards.
Dedicated parking provision for commuters is one of the key factors determining
success of the metro system. Parking provisions along with priority to pedestrians
through Foot Over Bridges and Bus feeder services will encourage more commuters
to use the metro system who could safely park their vehicles at the nearest station,
walk to the station or rely on feeder connectivity. A total of 13,550 Sqm of areaalong
the Ring Corridor is proposed exclusively for parking near six stations.
The intermodal integration proposals have been formulated for facilitating traffic
dispersal and circulation facilities based on the following considerations:
The feeder buses have been proposed of high quality, ultra-modern and customer
oriented that can deliver fast, comfortable and cost-effective urban mobility. Easy- to-
board (low floor), attractive and environmentally friendly buses with airconditioning
having capacity of 35 (Mini-buses) are proposed for feeder system.
The facilities of feeder buses have been estimated for peak hours of various horizon
years 2029, 2035 and 2045. The total number of buses required are 72, 83 and 86 in
the year 2029, 2035 and 2045 respectively. Public bicycle sharing is provided for the
passengers for about 2 km of the metro stations influence area. The total number of
public bicycle required in the year 2045 is 562.
The underlying operation philosophy is to provide mass rapid transit services with
optimal utilisation of fixed Infrastructure and rolling stock planning.
• Basic unit selected is two motor car and one trailer car.
The train operation plan for the proposed corridor is based on the following:
• Running of services for 16 hours of a day (6:00 hrs to 22:00 hrs) with a station
dwell time of 20-30 second.
• Adequate services to ensure comfortable journey for commuters even during off
peak periods.
The train composition, capacity and headway required for the operation in proposed
corridor is given below:
Driving Motor Coach (DMC): 247 (43 seated + 204 standing) @ 6 passengers/m2
: 315 (43 seated + 272 standing) @ 8 passengers/m2
Trailer Coach (TC) : 270 (50 seated + 220 standing) @ 6 passengers/m2
: 343 (50 seated + 293 standing) @ 8 passengers/m2
3 Car Train : 764 (136 seated + 628 standing) @ 6 passengers/m2
: 973 (136 seated + 837 standing) @ 8 passengers/m2
6 Car Train : 1574 (286 seated + 1288 standing) @ 6 passengers/m2
: 2002 (286 seated + 1716 standing) @ 8 passengers/m2
Every coach shall be fully interchangeable with any other coach of same type. The
train operation plan envisaged for Thane Metro is given in Table 0.15.
The above train operation and headway for different horizon years is proposed to
meet the Peak hour peak direction traffic demand (PHPDT) with standees @ 6
passengers/ m2 in most of the sections, Other sections are meeting with standees @
8 passengers/ m2. For a small section (few stations) train will run with passenger
discomfort. This arrangement will optimize the rolling stock requirement as well as
operating expenses.
Rolling Stock requirement for different horizon years has been calculated based on
the train operation plan (Table 0.16).
Description Standards
CBTC System IEEE 1474
Grade of GoA 2
Automation
Interlocking Computer Based Interlocking (CBI) adopted for station having
switches and crossing shall be Hot Standby system with object
controller conforming to SIL4 level of CENELEC standards EN
50126, EN 50128 and EN 50129.
Operation of Points With Direct current 110V D.C. point machines or 380 volts 3
phase, 50 Hz. AC point machines.
Signals at Stations Line Side signals to protect the points (switches). LED type signals
with point & for increased reliability and less maintenance efforts.
crossings
Train Protection Automatic train protection system conforming to SIL4 level of
Systems (ATP) CENELEC standards EN 50126, EN 50128 and EN 50129.
ATS Automatic Train Supervision System, movement of all trains to be
logged on to a central computer and displayed on workstations in
operation control centre (OCC) and at SCR. Remote control of
stations from the OCC as well as local control from theinterlocked
stations. The OCC shall be the primary control having a backup
control centre (BCC) to take over the operation if the OCC is to be
evacuated due to unforeseen situation. ATS/ATO will conform to
SIL2 level of CENELEC standards EN 50126, EN 50128 and EN
50129.
Description Standards
Immunity to External All data transmission on Optical Fiber Cables/Radio. All signaling
Interference. cables will be separated from power cables. CENELEC standards
EN50121-2&4 and EN50082-2 and EN 50081-2 as applicable for
EMI/EMC.
Fail Safe Principles SIL4 safety levels as per CENELEC standard for signal application.
Fall back system Digital Axle Counter
Other Items Suitable International Standards like CENELEC etc. shall be
followed as per good industry practices.
Maintenance Philosophy of continuous monitoring of system status and
philosophy preventive &corrective maintenance of signaling equipment shall
be followed. Card / module / sub-system level replacement shall
be done in the field and repairs under taken in the central
laboratory/manufacturer’s premises.
The proposed telecom system and transmission media will have following sub-
systems:
Platform Screen Doors (PSD) are proposed at stations to screen the passengers on the
platform from the track. These glass doors shall be powered for automatic operation
and located along the platform at the platform edge throughout thepassenger area.
The door locations will be corresponding to the train car passenger door locations.
Opening/closing of the PSD will be after receipt of the doors open/ doors close
command signals from the Signalling Link.
There are mainly two options for providing Platform Screen Doors viz Full height PSD
or Half height PSD. To ensure the safety of the passengers, Half Height Platform Screen
Doors is proposed to be provided at all the elevated stations and Full Height Platform
Screen Doors at all the U/G stations to reduce the energy consumption.
a) The salient features of Rolling Stock proposed for the Thane Metro are presented in
Table 0.18.
b) Coach Dimensions: The following coach dimensions are proposed to be chosen for
Thane Metro (Table 0.19).
• Train operation with 6 car rakes with carrying capacity of 1574 passengers
(standing @ 6 passengers/ m²).
• Regeneration @ 30%
• Transmission losses @ 5%
Keeping in view of the above norms, power demand estimation for the proposed
Thane Metro corridor is given in Table 0.20.
Load Year
2029 2035 2045 2051
Traction 14.95 18.32 22.50 24.66
Auxiliary 11.08 11.08 12.10 13.13
Total 26.03 29.40 34.60 37.78
Each elevated station is provided with an Auxiliary Substation with two 33kV/415V, 3-
phase, 500 kVA dry type cast resin transformers and the associated HT & LT
switchgear. In addition, provision shall be made for one DG set at each station for
emergency loads. Two transformers (33kV/415V, 3-phase) of 2500 kVA at each
underground ASS for the underground stations are proposed to be installed (one
transformer as standby). Apart from stations, separate ASS is required at depot with
2x2000 kVA auxiliary transformers to cater to depot cum workshop load.
The air conditioning and ventilation requirement in the elevated stations of the
Thane Metro is mainly for the ancillary spaces such as staff room, equipment rooms
etc.
Tunnel Ventilation System (TVS) is provided in a Subway system to carry out the
following functions:
The Maintenance facilities for New Thane to New Thane (Ring Corridor) of Thane
Metro Rail System are proposed to be provided near Kasarvadavali for about 41 rakes
of 6 cars for maintenance and repairs of the rolling stock. The depot will have
infrastructure to maintain the rakes with necessary facilities viz stabling lines,
scheduled inspection lines, workshop for overhaul, unscheduled maintenance
including major repairs, wheel profiling, heavy interior/under frame/roof cleaning etc.
as well as maintenance facilities for Civil – track, buildings, water supply; Electrical –
Traction, E&M; Signaling& Telecommunication; Automatic Fare Collection etc.
The proposed arrangement for stabling and maintenance facilities for are givenbelow
in Table 0.22.
Water consumption for construction activities is of the order of 252 KLD. At labour
camps, estimated water requirement is 623 KLD, waste water and solid waste
generated will be about 498 KLD and 1335 Kg per day respectively. Muck generation
due to project construction is 9.25 lakh cum of which 4.65 lakh cum may have to be
disposed of. During construction emission due to truck movement on account of
transportation of civil construction material and disposal/backfill of earth is estimated
to be as follows: CO, HC, NOx, PM, CO2 and VOC will be about 45 ton, 1.4 ton, 94 ton,2
ton, 5847 ton and 15 ton respectively. Such transportation is estimated to result in
fugitive dust emission of about 11.1 ton.
During operation, water requirement at stations will be 518 KLD, waste water
generated will be 275 KLD (266 station + 9 KLD depot) and 55 KLD effluent from Depot,
solid waste generated at the stations will be 17 cum per day. Water requiredin the
depot for train maintenance purpose is estimated at 68.47 KLD and requirement for
staff working in depot is calculated as 11.8 KLD. Water requirement during operation
will be met through public water supply.
There are approximately 662 trees which are likely to be felled or transplanted. 251
no. trees will be felled during construction. Some part of the alignment is along the
existing Development Plan Road (i.e. the Road is outside the compound wall of SGNP)
near the Dongripada Station, near the Lokmanya Nagar Bus depot, near Pokharan
Road no. 1 station to Nilkanth Terminal. The proposed alignment passes along the
existing and proposed Development Plan Road adjacent to CRZ 1A/CRZ II Zone.
Some of the key features of the environment management plan are as follows:
• Noise barrier is proposed for elevated section which falls adjoining to SGNP.
• 3721 tree will be planted to compensate the felling of the 251 trees.
• To recharge the ground water, RWH is proposed in Depot and Elevated section
of the project.
Training and environment division. Cost of solar installations on stations and in depot,
rain water harvesting on stations and in depot, water treatment plant in depot and
green belt at depot are not included in this estimate.
The proposed MRTS project shall require acquisition of 28.6479 ha in which 21.8491
ha is private land and remaining 6.7988 ha is Government land. Total 80 properties
will be affected out of which 36 are residential, 40 are commercial and 4 are other
structures. There are 132 affected families consisting 620 persons. The socio-
economic survey results indicate that sex ratio is 753 female per 1000 males. The
average age of surveyed population is 30 years. Majority of the surveyed families are
Hindu followed by Muslim in the project area. Majority of families speak Marathi as
mother tongue. Small, medium and large size families are found in the proposed
corridor. About 92% of surveyed people are literate and majority of them have studied
up to primary, upper primary and high school. Majority of surveyed family members
are married. Average family income is Rs. 21184/- per month.
Security system for metro system plays an important role in helping the system to
become the preferred mode choice for commuters. The three phases of security
system followed include Prevention, Preparedness and Recovery. Various provisions
like CCTV cameras, baggage scanners, metal detectors, bomb detection equipment,
wireless sets, snuffer dogs and related facilities will be part of station security system.
The total O&M cost including additional and replacement cost in the year 2029,
2035 and 2045 are estimated at Rs. 337.66 Crore, 522.72 Crore and Rs. 1081.64
RITES Ltd. Page xxi
Detailed Project Report for Thane Metro Rail
Final DPR Executive Summary
Crore respectively.
In the absence of notified TOD Policy for Thane Metro, TOD policy for Nagpur Metro
has been considered for the study. The estimated revenue from TOD has been
determined through value capture finance. In similar lines with Nagpur Metro, three
tools of VCF i.e. 1% additional surcharge on property transactions, 100% increase in
development charge & premium from additional FSI in TOD corridor have been
proposed for revenue estimation as a part of TOD study. As revenue from VCF tools
is expected to be shared for other infrastructure projects,it is expected that 50% of
the revenue earned from sale of additional FSI will come to Thane metro.
Apart from TOD, the other sources like advertisement in trains and stations, leasing
of commercial space in stations, semi-naming rights of stations have been identified
as non fare box revenue sources and the revenue from respective sources have been
estimated. The broad estimation of revenue from TOD and other non fare box
sources is presented in Table 0.24.
TABLE 0.24: REVENUE ASSESSMENT FROM TOD & OTHER NON-FARE BOX SOURCES
Revenue (Rs. In Crores)
TOD (VCF) OTHER SOURCES
1%
Leasing of Semi-
Year Premium on Additional
Development Commercial naming
Additional Surcharge Advt. Total
Charge Space in Rights of
FSI on Property
Stations Stations
Transactions
2029 89.3 151 187 74.1 24.7 34.0 560
2035 73.9 170 210 188.3 70.6 72 784
2045 90.1 207 256 427.5 160.3 117 1257
The Construction cost of the metro corridor at July, 2023 prices is estimated at Rs.
6032.57 Crore. The total cost of project including land & R&R cost is estimated at Rs.
8915.35 Crore. The capital cost components at July, 2023 are given in Table 0.25.
With escalation factor of 5% p.a. the completion cost under different scenarios are
as per Table 0.26.
Table 0.26 DETAILS OF COMPLETION COSTS (Rs in Crore)
The Revenue for Thane metro mainly consists of fare box collection and revenue
from other non-fare box sources such as property development, advertisement,
parking, taxes etc. Estimation of revenue from fare box and non-fare box source
has been made.
The total annual revenue through the fare box and other sources for the proposed
corridor is given in Table 0.27.
The FIRR for the project with capital costs including all taxes and revenue from
fare box and non-fare box sources works out to be 15.06%.
Amount
Particulars % Share
(Rs in Cr)
Equity by GoI 1151.13 15.30%
Equity by Govt. of Maharashtra 1151.13 15.30%
SD for CT by Govt. of Maharashtra 354.11 4.70%
SD for CT by GoI 354.11 4.70%
Soft Loan from bilateral/multilateral funding agencies 4515.72 60.00%
Total Cost excluding Land, R&R and PPP 7526.20 100.00%
Contribution by Local Bodies as Grant 200.00
SD for land and R&R by Govt. of Maharashtra 3414.20
State Taxes towards Completion Cost 615.64 -
IDC by GoM 312.71
Total Cost including Land, R&R, State Taxes and IDC 12068.76 -
PPP Component 131.34
Total Completion Cost 12200.10
SD: Subordinate Debt, CT: Central Taxes, IDC: Interest During Construction
* On behalf of Govt of Maharashtra - TMC may bear the cost
RITES Ltd. Page xxiv
Detailed Project Report for Thane Metro Rail
Final DPR Executive Summary
As per Metro Rail Policy 2017, it is essential to explore private participation either for
complete provisioning of metro rail or for some unbundled components of operations
and maintenance costs of metro rail. Accordingly, under SPV model for implementation
of Thane Metro project following activities have been identified for private
participation:
ii. Maintenance contracts with System suppliers for Rolling Stock and Signaling
systems in place of in-house maintenance.
The economic appraisal has been carried out within the broad framework of Social
Cost – Benefit Analysis Technique. It is based on the incremental costs and benefits
and involves comparison of project costs and benefits in economic terms under the
“with” and “without” project scenario. In the analysis, the cost and benefit streams
arising under the above project scenarios have been estimated in terms of market
prices and economic values have been computed by converting the former using
appropriate shadow prices.
This has been done to iron out distortions due to externalities and anomalies arising
in real world pricing systems. The annual streams of project costs and benefit have
been compared over the analysis period of 30 years to estimate the net cost / benefit
and to calculate the economic viability of the project in terms of EIRR & ENPV.
The EIRR works out to 23.80%, ENPV@14% works out to Rs. 11749 Crores and
ENPV@8.00% works out to Rs. 38052 Crore. Sensitivity analysis of the EIRR with 5%
to 15% cost overrun and reduction in traffic materialization (separately) has been
carried out. The EIRRs under these scenarios are given in Table 0.29.
Range in percentage
S. No. Factor
5% 10% 15%
1 Cost overruns due to delay or other factors 22.52 21.16 20.46
2 Increase in Maintenance Cost 22.97 22.52 22.16
3 Reduction in Ridership 21.87 21.11 20.34
4 Reduction in benefits 21.76 20.87 19.94
Combination of reduction in benefits and
5 21.01 19.45 17.94
increase in cost
i. Legal Framework
The legislation for construction of Nagpur and Pune Metro may also provide legal
cover for construction of Thane Metro. Implementation of proposed Thane Metro
can be done under “The Metro Railways (Amendment) Act 2009”.
1. Pro file of th e ci ty
1.1 GENERAL/HISTORICAL BACKG ROUND
Apart from Udaipur, another city of the southern suburb of India is known as
the ‘City of Lakes’ which is Thane, a city in Maharashtra. Thane is the third
most industrialized district in Maharashtra. A part of Mumbai Metropolitan
Region, Thane has become almost a part of Mumbai due to its proximity.
Thane Municipal Corporation came into existence on 1st October, 1982. The
area of the Thane Municipal Corporation has been divided into 95 electoral
wards. There are a total of nine Administrative wards, which called Prabhag
Samitees. All the works of the TMC are planned taking into consideration these
Prabhag’s namely Mumbra, Kalwa, Uthalsar, Kopri, Naupada, Majiwada,
Vartaknagar, Waghle, and Railadevi. The city’s proximity to the commercial
capital of India and its location at the geographical centre of Mumbai
Metropolitan Region has given tremendous impetus to the growth of housing
and industries in and around the city. During the last two decades, a number of
industries have come up in Thane-Belapur Industrial area, Wagle Industrial
Estate, Kalwa Industrial Estate and Kolshet-Balkum complex along Thane-
Ghodbunder Road.
As per census 2011, the population of TMC was 18.4 lakh. Thane has
experienced a rapid growth in population during last few decades. Annual
population growth during 1991-2001 was 4.65%.
demand for mobility to meet business and personal needs. There is an increase
in demand for physical infrastructure in general and transportation in
particular. Rapid urbanization and intense commercial developments in the
recent past have resulted in steep rise in travel demand putting Thane’s
transport infrastructure to stress.
In order to alleviate the transport related problems in the City and to meet the
increasing travel demand of the area, State Government has decided to
introduce an efficient, safe and high capacity public transport system in Thane.
Government of Maharashtra through MAHA metro has decided to prepare
Comprehensive Mobility Plan (CMP), Alternative Analysis Report (AAR) and
Detailed Project Report (DPR). CMP has prepared by another consultant (M/S
Tandon Urban Solutions Pvt. Ltd. (TUSPL)). RITES has been engaged by Maha-
Metro on behalf of Thane Municipal Corporation for preparation of
Alternative Analysis Report and Detailed Project Report for Thane.
AAR has also been prepared in 2018 in order to identified the best suitable
mass transport system along major travel corridor as identified in the CMP and
recommend metro rail system for the City of Thane to meet the estimate travel
demand for the horizon years.
1.2 LOCAT ION, CLIMAT E, PHYSICAL SETT INGS & REG IONAL LINKAGES
The city is characterized by high hills on one side and submersible marshland
along the Thane Creek, and Ulhas River bank on the other side. The plain
terrain forms a wide belt along the foothills & away from creek water, Ulhas
riverbanks. Such a situation has also affected the growth and placement of
various activities. The highway runs centrally through the plains and windings
along the foot of the hills.
The Thane Climate is typically coastal, sultry and not very hot. It is observed
that the mean maximum temperature varies from 35oC to 40oC during the
whole year. Due to humidity during this period, the weather condition is
intolerable being sultrier. The weather is tolerable during the months of
December to February with temperature ranging from 25oC to 35Oc being
minimum out of the year. The area receives average rainfall of 2500 mm to
RITES Ltd. Page 1-3
Detailed Project Report for Thane Metro Rail
Final DPR Chapter 1: Profile of the City
3000 mm viz. in rainy season while the dry period is observed in the summer
and winter seasons.
The range of variation in humidity is from 40% to 100%. The highest humidity is
observed in the month of August. The overall humidity throughout the year in
the city is on the higher side. The average humidity throughout the year is 44%
and the maximum humidity experienced during the year in the monsoon
months is about 98%.
The wind direction is predominantly from west and northwest of the town for
maximum period of the year. The mean wind velocity is about 11 km/hr. The
maximum velocity varies from 15 to 19 km/hr during June to August.
The district lies in area which is formed of alluvium of the early quaternary
period. In the district, no hard or consolidated rock exposures are
encountered. The main constituents (sand, silt and clay) of alluvium occur in
variable proportions in different sections. The mineral products of the district
of saline earth from which salt are derived and limestone conglomerates.
The city of Thane has been the key center of industrial activities which are
considered as the engines of the economic growth. The demographic profile
shows continuous growth in the population of the city which mainly attributes
to the industrial, commercial, administrative and strategic development of the
city. The overall economy is versatile and the city does not have a predominant
economic base.
As per Census 2011, population of Thane city is about 18.41 lakh. The
population of Thane has been increasing consistently since 1961, with an
average decadal growth rate of 69%. Population of the city has increased by
45.85% in last 10 years. Annual population growth during 2001-2011 was
4.2%.
The intra city population of Thane are most densely populated areas followed
by areas of Mumbra and Kalwa, Wagle Estate and Vartaknagar has the largest
population whereas, the least population areas is sheelphata and Diva.
1.3.2 Employment
The Work force participation rate as per Thane Municipal Corporation for the
year 2001 was 33.3% and for the year 2011 was 34.2%. Based on the
population, employment for TMC area is presented in Table 1.2.
The geographic area within the jurisdiction of Thane Municipal Corporation (TMC) is
taken as the study area. The TMC study area comprise of about 147.0 Sq. km. The
study area map has been shown in Figure 1.3.
Population density of the city is 12527 persons per km2. The city is growing at
a good rate in terms of population and it is expected that the city will continue
to do so in the upcoming years. Thane being an industrial hub has significant
migrant workers’ population increase over the years. There are a large number
of people migrating here due to job opportunity and the city is turning into a
satellite city.
• The total area of corporation is 128.21 Sq Km. The broad categorization shows
that 59.30 sqkm is developable, 36.82 sqkm is non-developable while 32.11
sqkm is under green zone.
• The area under road shown in the development plan is 7.42 sqkm. The area
under residential zone is 26.65 sq km, while that under industrial zone is 12.54
sqkm.
The Existing Land use map which was prepared on the basis of the Existing
Land use Survey (ELU Survey) in CMP 2018. The ELU Survey was one of the key
initial stages towards ELU Plan preparation. It has two main objectives, one, to
determine current land uses, and, two, to assess the extent of implementation
of the current DP.
The conversion of industrial areas into residential areas in recent years has
boosted the real estate industry in Thane. Some of the biggest players in the
real estate industry have set up their projects in Thane viz. Rustomjee, Lodha,
Kalpataru, Runwal, Hiranandani and Akruti developers. The booming IT and
BPO sector has also boosted the real estate industry.
The major land use category in Thane Municipal Corporation (TMC) is under
forest and green zone (mangroves also fall under the green zone), together
they occupy 46 % of the total within administrative boundaries, 3,211.77 Ha
falls in green zone and 3560.0 Ha in forest zone.
The manufacturing belt has been the economic driver of the city since 1961.
However, due to a change in classification of industrial areas in TMC, Thane has
seen a steady decline of manufacturing units and the trend is moving towards
establishment of service industries and IT parks instead. TMC industrial area
consists of Wagle Estate, Balkum and Kolshet. These industrial areas house
mostly chemical, engineering, textile and electrical Industries and occupied
area 8% of the total corporation boundary Area.
Thane city has 9 planning sectors and a total of 813 reserved sites covering an
area of 1469.22 Ha. Thane Municipal Corporation has received reservation for
30.62 Hectares for entertainment facilities.
ii. Development along the Wagle Estate Industrial (MIDC) Area: In the late 20th
Century, thane developed as an industrial town, with industries set up at the
MIDC Industrial estate. A lot of worker housing and development took place
around the Wagle estate area with development taking place along and
between the Eastern Express Highway and the National park on the other side,
till the Old Agra Road or Bhiwandi Road.
iii. Development along Ghodbunder Road and Eastern Express Highway: In the
first decade of 21st Century, with the opening up of Real estate sector and
widening of Ghodbunder Road, large scale township and high rise residential
development started to take place on both sides of the Ghodbunder road in a
ribbon like pattern. The growth velocity of development occurring near to the
Ghodbunder Road and Eastern Express Highway has been very high with a
large cosmopolitan mix of people, who have migrated from other regions of
MMR, state and India. Today Ghodbunder Road has become a go to
destination in Thane due to wider roads and new age amenities and
developments.
The location of thane within MMR and the geomorphic formations across the MMR
makes Thane a transit hub due to the following reasons
• It falls in the midst of the Route from Bangalore/Goa to Ahmedabad and Nasik.
All vehicles which have to travel from Gujarat direction to Goa/Karnataka have
to pass necessarily through Thane.
• Bhiwandi, much precisely the Kalher – Kasheli Belt which forms the largest
warehousing and storage centre for all kind of goods in Mumbai Metropolitan
Region is accessible through Thane, thus all goods vehicles transporting goods
from and to these warehousing centres have to travel through Thane.
• For all vehicles travelling from Mumbai to Nasik and further to Madhya
Pradesh have to pass through Thane.
Thus Thane is affected by problems of transportation not only due to its internal travel
needs, but also due to the larger regional needs and also due to large through traffic.
a. Further growth and densification along the Ghodbunder Road up till Gaimukh,
as many multi-storeyed complexes and townships are getting developed along
with the infrastructure development. Level of amenities is of higher grade with
a cosmopolitan environment making it a high growth area for the medium to
long term.
c. Development and conversion of Wagle estate and Trans Thane Creek area
including Airoli Knowledge Park into an IT/ITES park and a major employment
centre of MMR as per the promotional scheme of Government of
Maharashtra.
d. Cluster Redevelopment Scheme with higher floor space index which will result
in re-densification of older city areas including core city, but at the same time
leading to development of road infrastructure and other components.
DPR for Thane Metro has been prepared as per Metro Policy, 2017 of MoHUA,
Government of India. The scope covers the following:
Task 1: A brief overview of the city in terms of its growth, economy, spatial
structure and trends, perspectives on the future growth. Overview of study
areas and existing plans with land use distribution, review of zoning
Regulations, employment distribution by Traffic Zones, land use plan
proposals shall be done.
Task 2: Brief review of previous transport studies like City Master Plan,
Comprehensive Mobility Plan and proposed Metro Rail Plan and other urban
Task 4: Based on primary survey data and various traffic and transportation
studies undertaken for the city, the present travel patterns and forecast for
future travel demand should be done.
The data and analysis for this section has been taken from the CMP of
Thane prepared in 2018 by MAHA Metro through another consultant.
Task 10: Detailed estimation regarding land requirement for the corridor,
depots, stations, parking, multi modal stations etc. with land ownership
Task 11: Station planning with preparation of general layouts based on type
of station and site specific conditions focusing on:
Task 13: System operation approach, station yard planning, trains operation
plan including system frequency, timetabling, rolling stock requirement,
stabling details.
Task 16: Detailing the specifications for Automatic fare collection system,
Ticketing and pass system, Fare System integrated with other transport
Systems including integration of fares of all available modes with the metro
system planned as per the guidelines issued by MoHUA.
Task 18: Choice of electric traction system. Projected power demand, Source
of power supply, Traction and Auxiliary Supply and supervisory control and
data acquisition system. Number of tractions and their locations are also to
be detailed out.
Task 19: Need for Ventilation and Air Conditioning, design parameters and
design concepts for VAC System with details on tunnel ventilation, station
ventilation and air conditioning of ancillary spaces including specifications for
control and monitoring facilities.
1.5.13 Depots
facilities and workshop along with detailed designs and layout plans.
Task 21: Existing scenario, with analysis on water quality, noise level, land
environment, biological environment etc.
Task 23: Detailed Social Impact Assessment (SIA) including R&R assessment,
Resettlement Impacts, Resettlement Assistance Plan (RAP) and Monitoring
and Evaluation Framework
Task 26: The potential for transit oriented development along the metro
corridor based on the guidelines issued by MoHUA to be developed including
densification of corridor by increasing FSI and land value capture as per the
guidelines issued by MoHUA. Guiding List of lands/areas amenable for change
in near future e.g. vacant land, low rise development relocation, used type
etc.
Task 27: Estimations and inputs for the corridor, estimation for O & M,
overheads, phasing of construction and lease of built up area (BUA),
operational viability of the project.
Task 28: Means of finance, revenue from different sources, fare box revenue,
non-fare box revenue, like advertisement, taxes and property development
etc, possible ways of funding the project using different approaches.
Alternative means of funding the project using different approaches Like PPP,
BOT, DBFOT, DFBOT Etc. The proposed funding /implementation model will
be identified in line with the Metro Policy 2017.
Task 29: Financial Return: FIRR with 30 year time horizon, Sensitivity analysis
should be done based on scenario building with variation in ridership
estimates scenarios, costs estimates and Time overrun. Alternative scenarios
based on the different options for funding / implementation of the project
should be evaluated. A project should be able to meet its financial
requirement for cost recovery and under a set of plausible assumptions be
able to self-finance its activities. State Governments will have to ensure the
financial sustainability of the project through financial assistance.
Task 30: The economic analysis shall include economic cost and benefit
analysis of the project and estimation of the EIRR for a period of 30 years.
Task 32: Legal and Institutional Framework for implementation of the project
based on the identified implementation plan shall be included in the DPR.
Stakeholders’ consultation shall be held at each major stage of the project
Chapter 2: The chapter gives existing transport system covering existing road
network, traffic characteristics status of IPT and PT systems.
Chapter 4: System and Technology Selection covering traction system etc. are
part of the Chapter.
Chapter 5: This chapter gives the details about civil engineering components
covering alignment planning, geometric design parameters, geotechnical
investigations, utilities and land requirements.
Chapter 6: Station Planning Chapter gives the typical stations, facilities for
differently-abled, parking planned for metro corridor
Chapter 8: Train operation plan gives operation plan for trains and frequency
of operation for the proposed corridor
Chapter 10: The Chapter on Fare Collection System covers the proposed
ticketing system for passenger fare collection
Chapter 11: The chapter gives the requirement of rolling stock for operation
Chapter 12: This Chapter gives power supply requirements, sources of power
supply, substations and related infrastructure facilities
Chapter 13: Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems Chapter covers the need
for ventilation and standards adopted
Chapter 14: Maintenance depot facilities, rolling stock maintenance and depot
layouts are covered in this Chapter
Chapter 15: This Chapter details the Environmental & Social Impact
Assessment characteristics covering environmental and social components
Chapter 16: Disaster Management and Security Measures Chapter covers types
of disaster, preparedness and security measures
Chapter 17: Detailed Cost Estimates chapter includes details on capital and
O&M cost
Chapter 18: This chapter covers the revenue potential along the corridor from
Transit Oriented Development
Chapter 19: Financial Analysis and Non-Fare Box Revenue chapter covers
revenue estimates and estimation financial internal rate of return
Chapter 20: Economic Analysis chapter gives economic benefits and estimation
of Economic Internal Rate of Return
Urbanization and rapid growth of vehicles population has laid severe stress on
the urban transport system in Thane. Increase in vehicular traffic and limited
augmentation road infrastructure facilities have been observed in the City.
Private modes have gained more usage due to limited public transport facilities
with poor level of service. This necessitates the assessment of existing
transportation infrastructure in the City.
The registered vehicles in Thane have increased significantly over the years.
The numbers of vehicle registration per year have climbed from 13.9 lakh to
19.4 lakh in the about six years. This high density and rapid growth of vehicles
have affected the existing transport situation to a significant extent. The share
of two wheelers is highest at about 56%. It is significant to note that 24.4% of
the vehicles in Thane are cars and jeeps. The sharp increase of two-wheelers
and cars could be attributed to the improved economic status of people and
lack of city wide good public transport system. The increase of private modes
demands more road space and has resulted in dense concentration of traffic
on roads. The growth of registered vehicles for last six years is presented in
Table 2.1.
The road network inventory was carried out along all arterial and major roads in
the study area. The data collected as part of this survey include the right of way,
carriageway details, footpath, median, street lighting and abutting land use. The
survey has been conducted for a total length of about 366 km.
The distribution of the road network as per right of way (ROW) is presented in
Table 2.2. It can be observed from the table that about 67% of road network has
less than 20m ROW, 21% has ROW between 20-30m and merely 12% of the road
has ROW more than 30m
It was observed from the field surveys that about 92% of the road network has
footpath available along the road. The details footpath availability is presented in
Table 2.3
There are five major bus terminals in the City, namely, SATIS Thane West,
Lokmanya Nagar, Thane Station East, Wagle Aagar and Chendani. The total
Boarding and Alighting figures are observed to be 1,12,633 (SATIS Thane West
Bus Terminal), 20,027(Wagle Aagar Bus Terminal ) 7883 at Chendani Bus
Terminal, 15010(Thane Station East) and 14,326 Lokmanya Nagar Bus
Terminal.
The study area is served majorly by four Railway Stations, namely, Thane
Station, Kalwa Station, Mumbra Station and Diva Station which provide
connectivity to major cities. . The total Boarding and Alighting figures are
observed to be 612637 (Thane), 245967( Diva), 2,02811 (Mumbra) and 183031
(Kalwa).
The pedestrian volume counts were carried at major junctions throughout the
study area. The survey was carried out continuously for a period of 12 hours (8
a.m. to 8 p.m.) for along and across pedestrian movements. The daily and peak
hour pedestrian flows at various survey locations are presented in Table 2.4.
TABLE 2.4: DAILY & PEAK HOUR PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC AT SURVEY LOCATIONS
Daily Peak Hour Pedestrian Vol.
S. Name of Pedestrian Vol. (Morning
Approach (Evening Peak)
No. Location (12 hours) Peak)
Across Along Across Along Across Along
GB Road – Thane 765 - 107 - 138 -
1 Hypercity Borivali 578 - 69 - 69 -
junction Kasarvadavali Road 356 - 36 - 36 -
Thane 862 - 103 - 103 -
GB Road - Parkwood Society 256 - 26 - 31 -
2
Dmart Borivali 675 - 74 - 101 -
Vijay Garden Rd 402 - 48 - 56 -
Thane 265 - 32 - 32 -
GB Road –
3 Borivali 198 - 30 - 20 -
Patlipada
Hiranandani Estate 452 - 63 - 50 -
Thane 302 - 36 - 33 -
Tikujiniwadi Road 498 - 50 - 80 -
GB Road –
4 Borivali 398 - 44 - 60 -
Manpada
Manorama Nagar 278 - 31 - 28 -
Manorama Nagar 307 - 49 - 34 -
GB Road- Thane 275 - 41 - 28 -
5 Tulsidham Tulsidham 405 - 41 - 41 -
Junction Borivali 198 - 22 - 22 -
Thane 168 - 20 - 20 -
GB Road –
6 Borivali 207 - 35 - 25 -
Kapurbawdi
Old Agra Road 845 - 101 - 101 -
GB Road – Thane 246 - 39 - 30 -
7 Pokhran Road Pokhran Road No. 2 745 - 75 - 112 -
No 2 Majiwada 304 - 33 - 43 -
Mulund 2,613 - 392 - 314 -
EE Highway – LBS Marg 1,295 - 155 - 130 -
8 Teen Hath Majiwada 1,846 - 185 - 203 -
Naka LBS Marg 957 - 96 - 105 -
Gokhale Road 956 - 96 - 153 -
Teen Hath Naka 1,576 - 173 - 236 -
EE Highway-
Kamgar Hospital Road 869 - 104 - 87 -
9 Wagle Estate
Cadbury Jn. 1,486 - 178 - 163 -
Road Junction
Almeda Road 1,205 - 157 - 121 -
Nitin Company 1,256 - 188 - 138 -
EE Highway -
Pokhran Road No. 1 645 - 103 - 97 -
10 Cadbury
Majiwada 1,006 - 151 - 121 -
Junction
Khopat Road 948 - 104 - 171 -
Nitin Company 456 - 55 - 46 -
GB Road – Majiwada 386 - 58 - 42 -
11
Majiwada Bhiwandi 245 - 34 - 27 -
Thane Station Rd 789 - 95 - 95 -
EE Highway – Balkum 349 - 35 - 42 -
12 Saket Road Saket Road 256 - 28 - 31 -
Junction Estern Express Highway - - - - - -
The CMP has also recommended some proposed measures to develop facilities for
pedestrians and bicyclists on the streets as mentioned below:
• Rental cycle scheme has been introduced with cycle stands at seven
locations.
• Dedicated cycle tracks have been proposed on all major arterial where
sufficient width is available.
• On all new links proposed, dedicated cycle track has been proposed.
• Thane Municipal Corporation prepared Parking Policy and Plans to cater for on-
street parking of about 6,800 for 2-wheeler, 2,600 for 3-wheeler, 4,100 for 4-
wheeler and 630 for heavy vehicles including buses. This is free of cost.
• Of-street paid parking’s has been developed at Ashar Complex, Kacharali Talao
and Gaodeo Market for 300 for 2-wheeler, 150 for 3-wheeler and 80 for 4-
wheeler.
• Core city experiences very high parking demand with no land available for
creation of off-street parking infrastructure.
• Existing bus terminals have been utilized to create parking in core city area.
• Specific areas for ambulance parking have been identified.
As per CMP, to encourage the use of off street parking facility, the on street
parking charges should be kept higher than off street parking fees. The pricing
should be based on three aspects viz type of parking, location and demand
management.
The delays are caused mostly by traffic signal which account for about 39% in
the peak hour, while traffic signal with congestion account for about 25%.
Whereas in the off peak period, traffic signal accounts for 49%.
The increase in number of private vehicles and inter mixing of slow and fast
moving vehicles on road has led to increase in number of accidents on roads in
Thane, which is a cause of concern. Considering the urban expanse, population
growth and increased trends of vehicles on city roads; the safety of commuters
is equally vital.
There are many reasons for the growth in the number of accidents in Thane
such as increase in population and rise in vehicle ownership. They are also
caused due to the casual approach of road users in observing driving rules,
adhering to safety precautions and regulations. Over-speeding and negligent
driving have proved to be a frequent cause of serious and fatal accidents.
Similarly, poor road geometry has also increased the incidence of accidents on
urban roads. One of major causes of pedestrian safety is endangered by
extended trading activities of shops and commercial activity on footpaths and
sidewalks. This compels the pedestrians to clog the road space, hence give a
chance to accidents.
Table 2.5 shows the number of accidents in recent years along-with the
number of fatalities and series/ minor injuries occurred.
Intermediate Public Transport (IPT) modes i.e. Taxi and Auto in Thane city plays
an important role in meeting unstructured travel demands of users. It
performs as feeder service to the main mass transport system (Both rail and
road based) and provides accessible movement in predefined areas. The
services provided by the IPT are intermittent in nature and this has complete
flexibility in destination which is determined by the passengers.Private taxis,
On demand taxi and cabs are also available by Coolcabs, Meru Cabs, Ola Cabs,
Uber Cabs, Mega Cabs, Easy Cabs, etc. They provide services from Railway
Station, Major business & commercial centres of Thane and also to nearby
cities like Mumbai, Navi Mumbai, Raigad, Pune, Khopoli, etc.
Public transport offers economies of scale with minimised road congestion and
low per capita road usage. Cheaper and affordable public transport systems
world over have proved to promote mobility – move people more efficiently
and safely with increased opportunities for education, employment, social
development etc.
The Thane Municipal Transport Service, operating under the name "Thane
Municipal Transport (T.M.T.)" is the transport wing of Thane Municipal
Corporation, which operates a large number of bus lines in the Thane
metropolitan area. These buses are called Thane Municipal Transport or T.M.T
bus. TMT bus serves the entire Thane City. It also has operation outside city
limits into neighbouring Mumbai, Bhiwandi, Navi Mumbai, Kalyan Dombivali,
Mira-Bhayandar and Vasai Virar, where it provides regional connectivity to
Thane (Table 2.6).
Other Bus Transport Systems connects the major locations of Thane to other MMR
regions of more frequency. Navi Mumbai Municipal Transport (NMMT), Mira
Bhayandar Municipal Transport (MBMT), Vasai Virar Municipal Transport
(VVMT)&Brihan Mumbai Electric Supply and Transport (BEST) and State Transport
Corporation (ST) ply through or from/to Thane.
The major studies carried out in the past by various organizations for transport
system improvements in TMC area are as follows:
Detailed Project Report for Mumbai Metro Line 5 corridors was prepared in
year 2016.
• Thane Bhiwandi Kalyan corridor has been assessed as 18000 PHPDT for
2021 and this is likely to increase to 26000 PHPDT by the year 2031
• Proposed peak hour headway for 2021 is 5 minutes and Train capacity is
1756 passengers.
• Proposed Thane – Bhiwandi – Kalyan corridor is 24.9 km long and have 17
stations. All stations are elevated stations and are located at an average
distance of 1.5 km apart. Average station length would be 180 m.
1.7.4 New Suburban railway station on central line between Thane and Mulund
railway stations, 2015
There is four sub-urban railway stations in TMC limits viz. Thane, Kalwa,
Mumbra and Diva. Since Thane railway station is used for sub-urban as well as
inter-city train travel. Thane emerged as the most crowded station followed by
heavy weight junctions like CST and Dadar in MMR. TMC intends for
implementation of additional sub-urban station (proposed as part CTS MMR
Study) between Mulund and Thane as the distance between the stations is
about 2.5 km. The new sub-urban station is Kopri planned at Dharamveer
Nagar near the Mental hospital about 1.5 km from Thane station in between
Thane and Mulund stations.
About 2.6 lakh passengers per day were anticipated and considering that
Passenger density will increase at the rate of 4% per annum and escalating this
percentage upto 2041. It is expected that this traffic will approach the station
by means of public transport system, private transport or as pedestrians in the
ratio of 50, 30 and 20 respectively. The Road network connectivity will have to
be planned to cater for these modes of traffic.
level interventions by developing short term, mid-term and long term plans as
well as identifying several suitable projects to provide a sustainable transport
solution to not only support but also augment Thane's rapid development and
transformation.
The proposed at-grade BRTS was one among the many schemes for developing
the city which later on converted to LRTS. In view of the increasing transit
demand, the first project viz. at grade BRTS, was later converted to a Light Rail
Transit by Thane Municipal Corporation.
Brief summary of the study findings and recommendations for 2016, 2021 and
2031 are presented as follows:
• The length of metro network for the horizon year 2016 and 2021 is 208 km
and 318 km respectively, which further expands to 435 km by 2031. Most
of the metro network proposed by 2016 is located in MCGM and Navi
Mumbai.
• Total length of new suburban rail network is approximately 248 km. The
majority of the new suburban rail network corridors are required by 2016,
with minimal addition thereafter. Only twin track corridors have been
proposed, with one track per direction.
• The highway network, which includes higher order transport network (fully
access controlled) and arterial corridors for the horizon year 2016, 2021
and 2031 is 982 km, 1,229 km and 1,740 respectively. It is recommended
that, all major sea-links and bridges will have the lane configuration
reflecting 2031 requirements.
• Exclusive Bus Lanes (EBL), Passenger Water Transport (PWT) on the west
coast, east coast have been proposed for the horizon years where the
travel demands were insufficient.
CDP was prepared in 2006 in line with goals and objectives of JnNURM,
focusing on major aspects like provide equitable and sustainable infrastructure
to the city. The study area extends over 128.23 Sqkm of Thane Municipal
Corporation (KMC) comprising of 11 sectors and 95 wards with a population of
12.61 Lakh in 2001.
GOM and Thane Municipal Corporation (TMC) had carried out preliminary
studies through RITES (1989) and CIDCO (1994) and reservation for the
proposed ring railway was made in the development plan of Thane city.
The base year daily travel demand (excluding intra - zonal trips) assessed was
17.6 lakhs trips. Four stage transport planning model was used for forecasting
the ridership on MRT system. The travel demand estimated for the years 2006
and 2031 are 23.1 and 33.8 lakhs trips respectively including walk trips.
Corridor Length(Km)
Ring (Green) 16.05
North South Axial (Red) 11.20
West East Axial (Blue) 18.50
The said issues and concerns are widespread in the Thane City which reduces
the efficiency of road carriageway leading to congestion and causes
vulnerability to road users. Other reasons for congestion include
encroachment of road space by street vendors, unauthorized movement of
auto-rickshaws and tempos which have not been regularized. With increase in
population and dependence on personalized modes of transport, increase in
road accidents the transport system requires expansion and augmentation for
safe, efficient, convenient travel and further to reduce the pollution level in the
City.
FIGURE 2.1: EXISTING ISSUES AND CONCERNS
The pollution levels in the City are determined by the existing Ambient Air
Quality Index (AQI). The AQI considers three main pollutants (PM10, NO2 and
SO2). There are four AQI categories, namely Low (L), Moderate (M), High (H)
and Critical (C). The pollution level classification is presented in Table 2.9. the
pollution level in Thane for last five years is presented in Table 2.10
3. T R A V E L C H A R A C T E R I S T I C S
AND D E M A N D E S T I M A T E S
Maharashtra Metro Rail Corporation has appointed another consultant for
preparation of traffic and travel database, travel demand modelling and CMP. The
data and analysis from CMP 2018 has been used for the preparation of this
Chapter.
The geographic area within the jurisdiction of Thane Municipal Corporation (TMC)
is taken as the study area. The TMC study area comprise of about 147.0 Sq. km. For
the purpose of analysis and development of travel demand forecasting model, the
study area is subdivided into smaller areas known as Traffic Analysis Zones (TAZs) .
A traffic zone system is developed for the Study Area based on the existing ward
boundaries and natural physical barriers. It is sufficiently detailed to capture inter
zonal trips. The study area for Thane has been divided into 95 Zones. The traffic
zones of the study area is presented in Table 3.1.
The distribution of the road network with respect to abutting land use is presented
in Table 3.2. It is seen that the road network is abutted by residential land use upto
an extent of about 28%, commercial about 8% and Institutional landuse about 1.7%.
A number of traffic & travel surveys were conducted to appreciate and quantify the
characteristics of commuter travel within the Study Area. This data analysis has
helped us in developing the Travel Demand Model.
Classified traffic volume surveys were carried on average weekday to quantify the
volume of traffic moving along various road sections in the study area. The counts
were carried out for 16-hour at mid block/screen line and Intersection locations and
for 24 hour at outer cordon locations. The survey locations were selected in a
manner that would cover the entire study area and assist in understanding the
traffic pattern within the study area as well as with adjacent urban settlements.
These surveys help in assessing the existing traffic problems in the study area as
well as to validate the transport demand models.
The quantum and temporal variation of daily vehicles and trips moving in the study
area has been carried out in the following sections.
The traffic counts both in terms of numbers of vehicles and Passenger Car Units
(PCUs) have been computed at various screen line/mid-block locations as presented
in Table 3.3. It is observed that the traffic at different locations varies from 32,520
Vehicles (27,931 PCU’s) at Gokhale Road near Navpada to 1,09,102 Vehicles
(2,25,220 PCU’s) along Bhiwandi Bypass Near Thane Creek Bridge throughout a
normal working day.
The peak hour traffic at the Screen Line/Mid-Block locations is presented in Table
3.4. The morning peak hour volume varies from 3,631 PCUs (4,878 vehicles) on
Gokhale Road near Navpada to 27,026 PCUs (17,456 vehicles) along Bhiwandi Bypass
Near Thane Creek Bridge & evening peak hour volume varies from 2,793 PCUs (3,902
vehicels) on Gokhale Road near Navpada to 27,026 PCU’s (18,547 vehicles) along
Bhiwandi Bypass Near Thane Creek Bridge.
It can be observed that peak hour peak directional traffic at Screen Line/Mid-block
locations generally varies from 50.8% at Kalwa Bridge to 56.5% at Thane Godbhundr
Raod near Patlipada. The details are presented in Table 3.4.
TABLE 3.4: INTENSITY AND DIRECTIONAL DISTRIBUTION OF TRAFFIC AT SCREEN LINE/MID-BLOCK LOCATIONS
Total Traffic Morning Peak Evening Peak Directional Distribution
% of % of % of % of Peak Off Peak
S. No. Location of Mid-Block/Screen Line
Veh. PCU's Veh. Total PCU's Total Veh. Total PCU's Total Direction Direction
Traffic Traffic Traffic Traffic % %
Bhiwandi Bypass Near Thane Creek
1 1,09,102 2,25,220 17,456 16% 27,026 12% 18,547 17% 27,026 12% 56.2 43.8
Bridge
Hutatama Maruti kumar Marg, Near
2 65,807 60,331 8,555 13% 6,636 11% 7,239 11% 6,636 11% 52.1 47.9
Khopat
3 Gokhale Road near Navpada 32,520 27,931 4,878 15% 3,631 13% 3,902 12% 2,793 10% 51.5 48.5
4 Kalwa Bridge 99,612 1,14,825 11,953 12% 11,483 10% 9,961 10% 13,779 12% 50.8 49.2
5 LBS Marg Near Teen Hath Naka 39,316 37,208 5,504 14% 4,093 11% 4,325 11% 3,349 9% 53.5 47.5
6 Mahapalika Marg Near Nitin Company 64,967 54,951 10,395 16% 7,144 13% 7,796 12% 7,144 13% 52.4 47.6
7 Thane Godbhundr Raod near Patlipada 84,884 1,40,356 9,337 11% 16,843 12% 7,640 9% 14,036 10% 56.5 43.5
8 Mumbra Panvel Road 66,214 90,448 9,270 14% 9,045 10% 7,284 11% 10,854 12% 53.2 44.8
Source: Primary Survey (CMP-2018)
The intensity of traffic at intersection locations is given in Table 3.5. It can be seen
that EE Highway – Teen Hath Naka handles the maximum daily traffic of
5,68,122PCUs (4,74,813 vehicles) followed by GB Road – Pokhran Road No 2 with
3,18,625 PCUs (2,68,974 vehicles) while the least daily traffic is observed on Old NH-
4 Retibhander with 64,108 PCUs (48,053 vehicles). The survey involved 15 minutes’
interval direction wise classified traffic volume counts for each movement at the
intersection-continuously for 16 hours (0600 hours to 2200 hours) on a typical
working day.
The peak hour traffic characteristics and composition of total traffic at each
intersection is presented in Table 3.6. The maximum morning and evening peak
hour traffic varies at EE Highway – Teen Hath Naka with 59,653 PCUs to 4,552 PCUs
at Old NH-4 Retibhander. The maximum share of buses is observed to be 6.6 % at GB
Road – Hyper city junction while the share of slow modes varies from 0% (GB Road –
Dmart) to 3.4% (Pokhran Rd no – 1, Kores Junction). Goods vehicles comprise about
2.3% at Wagle Estate Road No.22 to 42% at GB Road – Kapurbawdi.
The classified traffic volume counts and origin destination surveys were carried out
at 7 outer cordon locations to know the intensity and trip making characteristics of
the traffic entering and leaving the study area.
The traffic counts both in terms of numbers of vehicles and Passenger Car Units
(PCUs) have been computed for the total daily (24 hour) traffic at 7 Outer Cordon
locations (Table 3.7). It is observed that the traffic at different locations varies from
72,820 PCUs at Old Agra road, near Kasheli Bridge to 2,09,507 PCUs at Bhiwandi
Bypass Near Toll Naka on a normal working day.
TABLE 3.7: DAILY TRAFFIC VOLUME (24 HOURS) AT OUTER CORDON LOCATIONS
Grand Grand
S.
Location of Outer Cordon Total Total
No.
(No.s) (PCU's)
1 Thane Godbhunder Road near Octroi Naka 66,794 1,32,778
2 Old Agra road, near Kasheli Bridge 49,350 72,820
3 Bhiwandi Bypass Near Toll Naka 1,01,490 2,09,507
4 Mumbra Panvel road near bharat Gears 38,788 75,294
5 Thane Bealpur Road Near near TMC Octroi Naka 48,825 94,733
6 Eastern Expresshighway , Near Anand Nagar Checknaka 1,19,629 1,60,870
7 LBS Marg Mulund Checknaka 68,964 95,451
Source: Primary Survey (CMP-2018)
It can be observed that peak hour peak directional traffic at Outer Cordon generally
varies from about 50.8% at Bhiwandi Bypass Near Toll Naka to 56.5% at Eastern
Expresshighway, Near Anand Nagar Checknaka. The details are presented in Table 3.8.
TABLE 3.8: INTENSITY AND DIRECTIONAL DISTRIBUTION OF TRAFFIC AT OUTER CORDON LOCATIONS
Name of Outer Cordon
Total Traffic Morning Peak Evening Peak Directional Distribution
Location
SN % of % of % of % of Peak
Off Peak
(Veh.) (PCU's) (Veh.) Total (PCU's) Total (Veh.) Total (PCU's) Total Direction
Direction %
Traffic Traffic Traffic Traffic %
Thane Godbhunder Road
1 66,794 1,32,778 7347 11% 13278 10% 9351 14% 15933 12% 52.6 47.4
near Octroi Naka
Old Agra road, near
2 49,350 72,820 4935 10% 6554 9% 5922 12% 8010 11% 51.5 48.5
Kasheli Bridge
Bhiwandi Bypass Near
3 1,01,490 2,09,507 9134 9% 23046 11% 11164 11% 20951 10% 50.8 49.2
Toll Naka
Mumbra Panvel road
4 38,788 75,294 4655 12% 9788 13% 4655 12% 9035 12% 53.5 47.5
near bharat Gears
Thane Bealpur Road Near
5 48,825 94,733 6347 13% 9473 10% 4394 9% 8526 9% 52.4 47.6
near TMC Octroi Naka
Eastern Expresshighway ,
6 Near Anand Nagar 1,19,629 1,60,870 13159 11% 19304 12% 19141 16% 20913 13% 56.5 43.5
Checknaka
LBS Marg Mulund
7 68,964 95,451 6896 10% 7636 8% 7586 11% 9545 10% 53.2 44.8
Checknaka
Source: Primary Survey (CMP-2018)
3.1.5 Road Side Origin and Destination Interviews at Outer Cordon Locations
It is observed from Table 3.9 that the share of work and business purpose trips is
about 62.6%. The other purpose trips contribute to about 29.10% at outer cordon
location.
It is observed from Table 3.10 that about 63% of passengers travel on daily basis, 7%
Weekly, 11% Monthly and 19% Occasionally.
It is observed from Table 3.11 that travel time of about 35% of total passengers is
upto 30 minutes. About 64% of total passengers’ travel time ranges between 31-90
minutes and about 2% of total passengers’ travel time are found to be more than 90
minutes at outer cordon locations.
This section focused on the opinion of users with respect to various characteristics of
a new mass transit system in Nagpur. The respondents at various bus terminals, rail
terminals and airport were queried with regard to preference for the quantum of
extra fare they are willing to pay.
The acceptable time saving in reaching rail terminal to shift to MRTS is presented in
Table 3.14. It indicates that 20% respondents would choose MRTS if the time saved is
upto 10 minutes. About 80% of passengers would choose MRTS if the time saved
ranges between 10-20 minutes.
TABLE 3.14: WILLINGNESS TO CHOOSE METRO FOR REACHING RAIL TERMINAL WITH
RESPECT TO TIME SAVINGS
Time Saved (minutes) <5 5-10 10-15 15-20 >20 Total
Rail Passengers
2% 18% 38% 42% 0 100
Composition (%)
Source: Primary Survey (CMP-2018)
The willingness to pay extra fare to reach rail terminal by MRTS System is presented
in Table 3.15. The result indicates that about 25% respondents want the existing fare
for new public transport as same as existing fare, 41% are willing to pay upto Rs.5 as
extra fare. About 34% are willing to pay in the range of Rs.6– Rs.20 as extra fare for
good MRTS system in comparison to existing fare.
TABLE 3.15: WILLINGNESS TO PAY EXTRA FARE FOR REACHING RAIL TERMINAL
Same as Extra as compared to Existing Mode Fare (Rs.)
Parameters Existing
Upto 2 3-5 6-10 11-12 13-15 >15 Total
Mode Fare
Rail Passengers
25% 8% 33% 19% 15% NA NA 100%
Composition (%)
Source: Primary Survey (CMP-2018)
The acceptable time saving to shift MRTS is presented in Table 3.17. It indicates that
about 20% respondents would choose metro if the time saved is less than or equals
to 10 minutes. 80% would choose metro if the time saved in ranging between 11-20
minutes. 0% would choose metro if the time saved is more than 20 minutes.
The willingness to pay extra fare for MRTS System is presented in Table 3.18. The
result indicates that 25% respondents want the existing fare for new public transport
as same as existing fare, about 41% are willing to pay upto Rs.5 as extra fare and
about 34% are willing to pay Rs.10 to Rs.12 as extra fare. Only about 0% of
respondents are showing their willingness to pay Rs.15 or more as extra fare for
MRTS system in comparison to existing fare.
The speed and delay survey was conducted along the network using the running car
method during peak and off-peak periods. The results of the survey with respect to
the journey and running speed and delays are presented in the following paragraphs.
i. Journey Speed
The journey speed characteristics during peak period are presented in Table 3.19. It
is observed that about 52% of the total road network has journey speed upto 20
kmph during peak hours. About 24% of surveyed network has journey speed
between 21-30 kmph and only 24% of road network has journey speed more than 30
kmph. Average Journey Speed during peak is observed to be 20 kmph.
iii. Delays
The distribution of causes of delays & their duration during peak hours and off-peak
hours is presented in Table 3.21. The analysis of causes of delays reveal that the
delays are caused mostly by traffic signal which account for about 39% in the peak
hour, while traffic signal with congestion account for about 25%. Whereas in the off
peak period, traffic signal accounts for 49%.
TABLE 3.21: DISTRIBUTION OF CAUSES AND DELAYS IN PEAK & OFF PEAK HOURS
S. Peak Hour Off Peak Hour
Causes and Delays
No. No. of Points % No. of Points %
1 Traffic Signals 32 38.56 18 48.65
2 Traffic Congestion 29 34.94 11 29.73
3 Traffic Signal + Congestion Signal 21 25.30 8 21.62
4 Animal 1 1.20 0 0.00
Total 83 100 37 100.00
Source: Primary Survey (CMP-2018)
The Parking surveys have been conducted at various locations at identified on-street
parking streches on major arterial and sub-arterial roads and at major existing off-
street parking lots in the study area for 12 hours (8 a.m. to 8 p.m.) on fair weather
working day.
i Parking Accumulation
The observed peak parking accumulation along the surveyed locations is presented in
Table 3.22. The Maximum peak hour parking accumulation was observed about 855
E.C.S. at Railadevi (Road No 22).
ii Parking Demand
The total parking demand at the surveyed locations is presented in Table 3.23. The
table indicates that parking demand is high at many locations. Many locations have
on street parking provisions which in turn reduces the effective carriageway width
and affects the smooth movement of the traffic. The total parking demand over the
day at the main parking stretches was observed to be about 7545 E.C.S. with
maximum demand of 550 E.C.S. being observed at Railadevi (Road No 22).
Equivalent
S.
Name of Location Side Peak Accumulation Car Parking Type
No
Spaces
Car Auto 2-W bus
f Uthalsar
Jambhalinaka To Civil
1 Hospital To Minatai Thakre Both 110 22 116 0 184.5 Perpendicular
Chowk
Nitin Co. To Khopat Rd To
2 Both 306 72 423 10 601.5 parallel
Golden Dyse Naka
Khopat Rd To Gavdevi
3 Both 95 65 165 0 226.25 Perpendicular
Chowk
Rutupark Nalla Bridge To
4 Both 118 4 201 0 221.5 Perpendicular
Golden Dyse Naka
Golden Dyse To Minatai
5 Thakre Chowk To Almieda Both 144 136 386 0 439 Perpendicular
Chowk
Dr.Babasaheb Ambedkar
6 Both 44 27 117 0 122.75 parallel
Road Bridge To Gaondevi
Khopat Rd To Singnagar To
7 Both 134 34 244 0 281.5 Perpendicular
TMC Office
Panchganga To Nalla
8 Both 36 64 141 0 154.5 parallel
Culvert To Saket Road
Holly Cross To Bape House
9 Both 62 55 122 0 164.25 Perpendicular
To Shrirange Police Chowki
Source: Primary Survey (CMP-2018)
Parking
S. No Name of Location Car 2-Whlr
Demand (ECS)
2 Sane Guruji Road 90 213 196.5
3 Bajiprabhu Road 112 105 164.5
4 LBS Road 173 292 319
5 Veer Savarkar Path 74 36 92
6 Almeda Road 161 258 290
7 TMC Marg 141 252 267
c Vartak Nagar
1 Pokharan Road No1 289 398 488
2 Pokharan Road No2 274 353 450.5
3 E.S.I.S Road 153 260 283
4 Tuslidham Road 75 57 103.5
d Majiwada
1 Majiwada Road 5 13 11.5
2 Bhiwandi Road 64 19 73.5
3 Kolshet Road 166 208 270
4 Bhranand Road 134 110 189
5 Hirananda-Ni Road 49 48 73
6 Wagbil Road 97 92 143
e Kalwa Prabhag
1 New Thane Belapur Road 9 15 16.5
2 Juna Mumbai Pune Road 47 45 69.5
3 Juna Belapur Road 89 5 91.5
4 Juna Mumbai Pune Road 231 217 339.5
f Uthalsar
Jambhalinaka To Civil Hospital To Minatai Thakre
1 110 116 168
Chowk
2 Nitin Co. To Khopat Rd To Golden Dyse Naka 306 423 517.5
3 Khopat Rd To Gavdevi Chowk 95 165 177.5
4 Rutupark Nalla Bridge To Golden Dyse Naka 118 201 218.5
Golden Dyse To Minatai Thakre Chowk To
5 144 386 337
Almieda Chowk
Dr.Babasaheb Ambedkar Road Bridge To
6 44 117 102.5
Gaondevi
7 Khopat Rd To Singnagar To Tmc Office 134 244 256
8 Panchganga To Nalla Culvert To Saket Road 36 141 106.5
Holly Cross To Bape House To Shrirange Police
9 62 122 123
Chowki
Total 7545
Source: Primary Survey (CMP-2018)
Duration (Hours)
S. Name of
Mode 0-30 30-60 60-90 90-120 2-4 4-6 6-8 Total
No Location Total Total >8 (hrs)
(min) (min) (min) (min) (Hrs) (hrs) (hrs)
2-W 211 364 479 843 1897 19 0 0 19 0 1915
% 11% 19% 25% 44% 1% 0% 0% 0% 100%
Car 414 743 1113 1975 4245 167 81 0 248 0 4493
Total Cars
% 9.21% 16.54% 24.77% 43.96% 94.48% 3.72% 1.80% 0.00% 5.52% 0.00%
Total Two 2-W 790 1180 1611 2419 6000 96 11 0 107 0 6107
wheelers % 12.94% 19.32% 26.38% 39.61% 98.25% 1.57% 0.18% 0.00% 1.75% 0.00%
Total Car & 1204 1923 2724 4394 10245 263 92 0 355 0 10600
Two Wheelers % 11.36% 18.14% 25.70% 41.45% 96.65% 2.48% 0.87% 0.00% 3.35% 0.00%
Source: Primary Survey (CMP-2018)
The following public transport surveys were conducted as part of the study:
The data collected through the field surveys have been analysed to assess the
various public transport characteristics of commuters for different modes.
A total of 4 Rail terminals were selected to conduct terminal survey spread over the
entire study area. It is observed from Table 3.27 that Thane railway station caters to
the maximum number of passengers with 3,08,633 boarding & 3,04,004 alighting.
It is observed from Table 3.28 that share of other purpose trips is about 11% and
trips for service and business purpose together contributes to about 83%.
Educational trips are about 5% followed by social trips which contribute to about 1%.
Distribution of passenger trips by purpose.
The household travel survey has been conducted to bring out socio-economic and
travel characteristics of the study area like household size, income, and vehicle
ownership, per capita trip rates for various purposes viz. Work, education and other
About 5000 household surveys were interviewed in the study area representing 95 traffic
zones. A random sampling technique was used to identify the sample. Further, care
was taken that the representative households of all socio-economic strata i.e. High
Income Groups (HIG), Middle Income Groups (MIG) and Lower Income Groups (LIG)
were covered in the sample.
i. Household Size
The distribution of households by size is presented in Table 3.29. It can be observed
that about 53% of the households fall under the category of to 3-4 persons per
household and about 19% of household’s falls under category of 5-6 persons’ group.
ii. Occupation
The occupational structure of the surveyed household members is presented in
Table 3.30. It is observed that about 54% samples are non-workers comprising of
students, housewives, retired and unemployed people. About 12% are engaged in
business sector. Among the service class, majorly about 23% are in private sector
and about 9% in government services.
The detailed distribution is presented in Table 3.34. Among the total trips,
government and private work trips account for about 40%, education about 34%,
business trips for about 14%, shopping trips about 3.5% and others account for about
7%.
Table 3.35 represent the detailed distribution of trips by the distance covered for
each mode. It is observed that an average trip length of 1.1km is being covered up by
walk. Cars travel an average trip length of 12.5 km, two wheelers 7.65 km while Auto
rickshaws and cycles covers average trip distance of 7.15 km and 5.3 km respectively.
Two
72% 14% 7% 4% 2% 1% - 100% 7.65
Wheeler
Auto
69% 23% 5% 2% 1% - - 100% 7.15
Rickshaw
Bus 53% 21% 11% 8% 4% 1% 2% 100% 10.00
Cycles 94% 6% 0% - - - - 100% 5.30
Train 10% 13% 19% 18% 13% 16% 11% 100% 17.65
Walk 100% 0% - - - - - 100% 1.10
Source: Primary Survey (CMP-2018)
3.3.1 APPROACH
The following steps are involved in traffic demand analysis towards estimation of
ridership on public transit system:
Formulation & Evaluation of Public Transit Networks: The alignments for public
transit corridor are identified and passenger loading on this alignment estimated
along with the engineering feasibility.
Detailed traffic & travel studies and transport demand forecasting have been
carried out by Maha Metro as part of the assignment to establish the existing and
future transport demand in the study area. The same data and travel demand
estimates has been used for this assignment and presented in subsequent
paragraphs.
The standard 4 stage Urban Transport Planning System model consists of:
• Trip Generation and Attraction Sub Model
• Trip Distribution Sub Model
• Modal Split Sub Model
• Assignment Sub Model
The parameters involved in the model development are population, employment and
transport systems (with their accessibility, speed & capacity) of the study area. A
commuter decides on his/ her selection of travel mode considering a number of
parameters including accessibility of travel mode from the house, total travel time,
total cost of travel, convenience/ comfort of travel and cost/ convenience for
reaching the destination at the other end of the main journey. The commuter
evaluates the merits and demerits of all possible alternative modes and their
combinations before deciding on the final selection of travel mode(s).
Trips are usually divided into two types i.e. home-based and non-home based trips.
Home-based trips are those having one end of the trip either origin or destination at
home, of the persons making the trip, The home based trips are further classified as
home based work trips, home based education trips and Home based other trips.
Non home based trips are those having neither end at home of the person making
the trip.
The base year planning variables and Trip generated are presented in Table 3.36.
Based on the correlation between the Planning Variables and the trips produced,
the trip production and attraction equations are developed and the regression
exercise showed a good correlation between planning variables and trip generated.
The base year (2017) Productions and Attractions obtained from the corrected O-
D matrices, skim matrices from network and the calibrated function parameters
were used to generate synthetic matrices. The Trip length distributions from
Observed/Corrected and Synthetic O-D matrices were calculated (Table 3.37).
• For base year model, the existing Modal share (as derived in Household Survey)
has been used.
• For horizon year models, the modal share as derived from ‘willingness to pay and
shift’, PT & IPT Stated Preference Surveys etc. have been used (Table 3.38).
TABLE 3.38:: TRIPS AND MODAL SPLIT FOR BASE YEAR (2017)
S. Vehicle Trips Walk Trips Total Trips By
Trip Purpose
No. Trips % Trips % Purpose
1 Work 8,26,652 27% 3,98,018 13% 11,17,512
2 Business 2,44,934 8% 1,83,701 6% 7,85,278
3 Education 7,96,036 26% 2,44,934 8% 10,87,309
4 Others 2,14,317 7% 1,53,084 5% 30,203
Total 28,08,881 9,79,736 30,61,676
Source: CMP-2018
The calibrated model is validated by comparison of field results and model output
results. The ‘Multi criterion’ approach was followed for model validation. The zone to
zone travel time at aggregate level were analyzed in all the trials till the error of
below 5% is achieved. The second criterion was traffic concentration at roads,
quantitatively measured by flow at the mid blocks. This was validated by comparison
of model outputs and field survey outputs (traffic volume survey at mid blocks).
Highway assignment has been carried out for peak hour, preloading the highway
network with peak hour public transport flows. The peak hour public transport
passenger trips were converted into PCUs by using appropriate PCU-passenger
ratios. These peak-hour public transport (bus and IPT) flows in terms of PCUs were
preloaded on to the highway network before loading the two-wheeler and car O-D
matrices. The passenger matrices of car and two-wheeler were converted into peak
hour PCU units by using appropriate K factors (proportion of daily flow occurring
during peak hour) and passenger-PCU conversion factors based on observed
occupancies. An equilibrium procedure based on generalized cost was used in
loading these car and two-wheeler matrices. The Commercial Vehicle (CV) trips
were taken as preloads on highway network.
The assignment of PT and private vehicle trips were done iteratively till an overall
equilibrium was reached between PT and highway networks. After every step of
this equilibrium assignment, the observed and assigned flows were compared and
the matrices were adjusted if required using O-D Matrix estimation procedure.
Classified traffic count survey, occupancy survey and OD surveys were carried out
at 7 cordon locations for 24 hours. Classified count surveys were carried out at 14
screen line locations for 16 hours.
It can be inferred in case of cordon line and screen line locations that, location wise
the error is within acceptable range indicating the ability of the travel demand
estimates to represent the observed travel pattern.
Using the planning variables and validated total O-D matrix for base year (2018), trip
end models are calibrated for total internal passenger travel. A single gravity model is
calibrated using the validated trip ends and skims (generalized cost) obtained from
assignment process as the seed values. The revised skims obtained after successive
modal split and traffic assignments will be used to calibrate the gravity model.
The population in the study area in the base year 2017 is 20.68 lakh. Accordingly, the
population in the study area for the horizon years 2029, 2035 and 2045 is presented
in Table 3.39.
The distribution of population in horizon years amongst various traffic zones would
be based on land use and population density as derived from Master Plan.
WFPR as observed in the base year 2017 is 25%. The employment for year 2011 has
been worked out from the census data figures and has been extrapolated to obtain
base year 2017 employment figures. Keeping in view the economic profile of the
study area. It has been estimated that 15.99 lakh workers would comprise the
workforce in the study area by 2045. Table 3.40 shows the growth trend in
employment in the study area. Table 3.41 gives the forecasted population and
employment for the horizon years.
TABLE 3.40: WORK FORCE PARTICIPATION IN STUDY AREA FOR BASE AND HORIZON YEARS
Year Workers (Lakh) WFPR (%)
2029 7.60 28
2035 12.43 36
2045 15.99 41
Source: Comprehensive Mobility Plan, 2018
The Thane Metro corridor starts from New Thane Station (Proposed Sub urban
Station at Kopri) and ends at Thane junction Railway Station which traverses through
city in a ring at the North of Thane junction Railway Station up to Kasarvadavali area.
The Alignment Plan of the proposed Corridor with station and depot location are
shown in Figure 3.1.
The proposed Metro corridor is about 29 Km long and have 22 stations. It passes
through important areas like New Thane, Wagle Circle, Lokmanya Nagar, Pokhran
Road No. 1, Nilkanth Terminal, Gandhi Nagar, Kashinath Ghanekar, Patlipada,
Dongripada, Vijay Nagari, Wagbil, Waterfront (TCS, New Brahmand, Azad Nagar,
Manorama Nagar, Kolshet Industrial Area, Balkum Naka, Balkum Pada, Saket, Shivaji
Chowk and Thane Junction.
Station Peak Hour 2027 Peak Hour 2035 Peak Hour 2045
Boarding Alighting Boarding Alighting Boarding Alighting
Patlipada 1,197 149 1,748 163 1,742 241
Azad Nagar Bus Stop 2,642 178 4,080 254 4,559 423
Manorama Nagar 4,509 267 6,655 382 6,722 635
Kolshet Industrial Area 944 936 1,436 893 1,548 1,229
Balkum Naka 1,637 1,137 1,659 6,083 1,840 2,427
Balkum Pada 1,365 133 1,993 192 1,984 305
Rabodi 7,167 1,656 7,586 1,609 7,088 1,330
Shivaji Chowk 3,781 1,802 3,723 1,601 3,180 1,333
Thane Junction 9,071 23,258 7,842 29,211 8,104 31,026
Source: MAHA- Metro (CMP, 2018)
4. s Y S T E M & T E C H N O L O G Y
SELECTION
4.1 TECHNOLOGY
The urban transport requirements of Thane City have been evaluated based on
projected traffic demand. Considering the city specific characteristics, traffic
demand, availability of right of way, Medium Capacity Metro rail system, which can
cater to Design capacity of 28000 PHPDT, is proposed to be adopted for Thane Metro
corridor.
Metro Rail system is most prevalent mass transit system adopted worldwide. In
India, MRTS is operational in various cities viz. Delhi, Chennai, Kolkata, Mumbai,
Bangalore, Kochi, Jaipur etc. Metro rail technology offers the advantage of latest
technology being available off the shelf with standardization, indigenization and has
already stabilized for reliability, acceptance and availability of manufacturing
infrastructure (for spare parts etc.) around the world and also in India. It is a grade
separated system with exclusive right of way characterized by short distances of
stations spaced at about 1 km and modern state of the art rolling stock having high
acceleration and deceleration with maximum speed of 80-120 KMPH. Sharpest curve
of 120m radius is permitted for MRTS. The system can be designed to meet the peak
hour peak direction traffic (PHPDT) carrying capacity from 10,000 to up to 80,000
depending upon the type of system and infrastructure adopted such as rolling stock,
train set configurations, signaling system, stations platform length etc. The capacities
indicated for 6 car trains have been calculated by considering 1.5 minutes (90
seconds) headway which is achievable with advanced signaling system i.e. CBTC
technology.
The maximum pea`k hour peak direction traffic (PHPDT) for the proposed Thane
metro corridor is estimated to be about 28000 in year 2050. Considering the city
specific characteristics, traffic demand, availability of right of way, 6 car train
composition is proposed to be adopted for Thane Metro.
Following system specification parameters are considered for the Thane Metro
corridor. The rationale for choosing the particular technological parameter has been
discussed in detail in the subsequent chapters.
The Thane Ring Metro corridor was agreed upon for the study. Corridor starts from
Kopriand ends at Thane junctionwhich traverses through city in a ring at the North
of Thane junction Railway Station up to Kasarvadavali area.
Metro Route of the corridor was initially planned on Google Map. For detailed
planning of the proposed metro route, ground survey was carried out with the help
of DGPS, Total Station and Auto levels. Details of all the existing features falling in
the proposed corridor were collected for proper planning of the alignment and
Depot. Detailed Methodology of the Survey and other descriptions are given in
subsequent paragraphs.
i. Before starting the detailed topographical survey work, a team of expert in the field
of alignment design and survey has conducted reconnaissance survey to familiarize
withthe area and selection of control points along the proposed Metro Route.
ii. Topographical survey of the Corridor has been carried out to collect all manmade
and natural features like roads, building, drain, railway line telephone/electric pole
etc., falling in the proposed metro corridor for better and accurate planning of the
metro alignment.
iii. Topographical survey was carried out in detail covering all the activities which are
mentioned in Terms of Reference of the Contract using modern surveying
instrument like DGPS, Total Station and Auto/Digital Level. Survey Drawings were
prepared in AutoCAD format.
iv. Topographical survey and alignment design have been carried out in following steps:
In this survey, Spectra Precision SP-800 GPS has been used for collecting GPS Data.
Data was downloaded and processed with Survey Pro office software. In this
processing UTM Projection system and WGS84 Datum has been used for horizontal
controls whereas for vertical control Earth Gravitation Model 2008 (EGM 08) has
been used. Grid Co-ordinates have been converted in Ground Co-ordinate by using
combined scale factor. These Ground Co-ordinates are used in total station during
the traversing and topographical survey.Details of established GPS Control points
(GCP) are provided in Table 5.1.
For densification of
Horizontal Control Points,
nine to ten additional pillars
of size(150x150x450)on
traverse points have been
fixed between GPS control
points which were used
during the detailed
topographical survey of the
corridor.Details of
additional control points (Traverse Control Point) established are given in Table 5.2.
For densification of horizontal points, traversing was carried out by Nikon Total
Station of 1"(one second) accuracy between GPS points which co-ordinates are
already determined with help of GPS observation. Co-ordinates of intermediate
points established with the help of total station have been determined by solving
the traverse network between GPS control Points. Closing error of traverse network
was calculated and errors which were within permissible limits, were adjusted by
transit rule method after adjusting the angular error of the traverse. Total linear
error in traverse after angular adjustment was permitted as 1 in 20,000 whereas
angular error of traverse was permitted as 15"√n where n is the number of angle
measured in the traverse network.
1 GPS-1 72d58'00.35660" 19d10'48.71442" -50.932 286198.662 2122013.321 13.275 Railway bridge near Dattaji salvi Udyan
2 GPS-1A 72d58'04.47705" 19d10'40.87831" -56.078 286316.229 2121770.986 8.142 Copri Village Road
3 GPS-2 72d58'26.18324" 19d10'27.99867" -59.914 286945.764 2121367.605 4.394 On Football Ground, Hari On Nagar
4 GPS-2A 72d58'29.36780" 19d10'29.62879" -60.455 287039.384 2121416.644 3.828 On Football Ground, Hari On Nagar
5 GPS-3 72d59'03.24122" 19d11'50.50944" -57.288 288057.76 2123891.945 6.964 Kalwa bridge
6 GPS-3A 72d58'57.06381" 19d11'50.07468" -58.28 287877.157 2123880.666 5.938 Police station Near Kalwa Naka
GPS-4
7 72d59'16.65342" 19d12'11.69404" -59.632 288457.068 2124538.759 4.614 Saket Police Ground
(BASE)
8 GPS-4A 72d59'16.49958" 19d12'17.23837" -59.263 288454.534 2124709.237 4.919 Saket Police Ground
9 GPS-5 72d59'51.46151" 19d13'15.40729" -59.967 289496.342 2126485.967 4.256 Pipe road,Fishing Pond near Dadlani Park
10 GPS-5A 72d59'53.46982" 19d13'20.27193" -59.734 289556.719 2126634.86 4.525 Pipe road,Fishing Pond near Dadlani Park
16 GPS-8A 72d58'11.77869" 19d13'59.37158" -26.272 286600.706 2127871.456 37.638 NearValley Tower,Kewra Circle
17 GPS-9 72d57'10.57416" 19d13'07.35266" -7.106 284794.406 2126293.003 56.675 On Road Shivai Nagar
18 GPS-9A 72d57'13.65694" 19d13'03.17866" -15.791 284882.938 2126163.608 On Road Shivai Nagar
19 GPS-10 72d56'57.73778" 19d11'47.12328" -26.526 284390.428 2123830.628 37.35 Near Weltech Fectory
20 GPS-10A 72d56'57.66319" 19d11'41.15487" -29.805 284386.088 2123647.145 34.084 In side of Wagle circle
21 GPS-11 72d57'19.22651" 19d11'12.98807" -46.968 285005.829 2122773.707 17.009 On S G Barve Road,near MIDC Colony
22 GPS-11A 72d57'20.84242" 19d11'07.90131" -48.081 285051.201 2122616.753 15.971 On Medulla Chowk
Establishment of vertical control was started from a known GTS benchmark situated on Pillar top at
office of the Junior Engineer office (Jail Jalkumbh). The value of this benchmark is 6.280m. From this
location bench mark was transferred along the corridor using three stadia method of leveling with
Digital Auto levels. Every loops of level has been closed and closing error of leveling loops has been
worked with the formula given below:
28 T17 287570.458 2123002.289 4.108 Right Side Police Booth & Park
30 T18 287609.509 2123098.361 4.194 Near TMC Toilet, (Josho Bedekar Canteen)
31 T19 287671.414 2123272.039 3.797 Near SR Bhosle Krida Sankul Stadium
37 T21A 287942.576 2123642.437 6.114 Right Side Near Culvert (Rahul Tailor)
42 T23 288211.223 2124158.649 4.819 on Median Near Rabodi Vahan Police Tiraha
43 T24 288264.262 2124317.489 4.847 on Footpath Near Nallah Culvert
44 T25 288365.71 2124440.976 5.019 on Footpath Near Nallah Culvert
90 T56 287899.734 2128538.44 26.95 Left Side of Sai Kripa Hair Traders
on Neil Top Left Side of Bhoomi Property
91 T57 287819.329 2128581.339 32.118
Solution
92 T58 287802.025 2128609.558 34.1 More Vegitable Shop
93 T59 287762.789 2128739.847 33.949 on Pillar Left Side of Near Police Booth
100 T66 287733.784 2129425.341 10.288 Neil Top Perfect Aotu Garage
101 T67 287606.32 2129486.386 10.294 Patlipada
Near Park T-Point Opposite DJ 5 Bsahkarj
102 T68 287480.101 2129558.941 10.65
Building
on Neil Flyover Bottam 220Kv. Kolshet
103 T69 287226.557 2129323.687
Substation
104 T70 287221.5 2129107.638 17.611 Flyover End on Neil Top
113 T79 286601.819 2128253.174 38.09 Neil Top Near Median End
121 T86A 286618.998 2127080.78 31.588 on Road Near Regal Plaza Shoping Centre
124 T89 286586.414 2126584.018 17.827 on Median Near Lok Upvan Complex
127 T92 286410.872 2126280.144 26.188 on Footpath Near Galaxo Smith Kline
128 T93 286181.654 2126343.075 31.076 on Footpath Opposite Hanuman Temple
129 T94 285933.016 2126406.426 32.078 on Median End Galaxo Smith Kline
130 T95 285776.868 2126450.43 35.651 on Median Near Dethane Hospital
131 T96 285539.359 2126562.926 46.078 on Road Near Nilkhant Terminal
133 T98 285327.484 2126770.816 53.959 on Median End Near Upvan Lake
134 T98A 285325.93 2126796.257 54.603 on Median End Near Upvan Lake
136 T100 284977.495 2126586.161 47.204 Near Bus Stop Upvan Lake
139 T103 284763.9 2126319.914 59.664 on Median End Near Darus Sakina Gate
140 T104 284922.867 2126150.072 45.913 on Median Front Side of Hotel Annpurna
141 T105 285065.766 2126014.787 39.106 on Road Near Sailyam Socity Shivai Nagar
146 T110 285030.678 2125560.08 31.25 on Road Near Pipal Tree & Laxmi Park Gate
152 T112 284849.381 2125346.47 35.423 Shri Swami Samarth Full Mart
153 T113 284813.169 2125333.673 35.359 opposite Shri Mahavir Jewelors
162 T122 284476.741 2124773.092 42.953 on Road Near Baba Saheb Ambedkar Chowk
170 T130 284670.563 2123592.669 28.856 on Median End Shri Engineering Corporation
171 T131 284824.616 2123530.424 28.856 on Median End Lokshaheer Andabhau Chowk
175 T135 285036.89 2123177.759 20.133 on Road Edge in Front of Opal Square
179 T139 285332.441 2122642.609 14.345 on Neil top Near the Residancy Vastusilp Gate
180 T140 285579.063 2122731.323 12.719 on Median Near Foot Over Bridge
184 T144 285937.159 2122371.783 9.503 Near Sai Temple & Gali
185 T145 286023.651 2122409.986 9.622 on Neil Near Foot Over Bridge
186 T146 286073.77 2122271.095 13.028 on Neil Near Foot Over Bridge
187 T147 286119.717 2122201.808 14.962 on Neil Top Kopari Bridge Near High Mask
188 T148 286156.633 2122093.183 15.147 on Road Near Foot Over Bridge
189 T149 286179.16 2122323.663 on Median Near Under Construction Flyover
Left Side of Dr. Neha Gupta (Narvi Tanaji
190 T150 286249.034 2122470.307
Chowk)
191 T151 286320.578 2122433.661 Near Anmol Height
Closing error within permissible limit has been adjusted. Permissible error in leveling
is 6√K mm where K is length of the loop in Km. The Leveling was carried out by a
precision auto level with accuracy of ±6√K. Reduced levels of all traverse stations
and permanent control points were taken by Double territory method. Bench mark
has been established at interval of 500m along the corridor or as per instruction of
site in- charge. Details of benchmarks are given in Table 5.3.
Based on Easting & Northing co-ordinates arrived by the traversing and Elevation by
Precise Leveling, Detailed survey was carried out along the proposed metro route for
100m wide corridor (50m either side of the centre line of the road) or upto Built up
line using total stations of desired accuracy. At some places instrument having
reflector-less facilities has been used for collecting details of features due to
inaccessibility of the area.
E. Preparation of Drawings
Drawings were prepared in Auto CAD format in 1: 1000 scale as per project
requirement showing all the manmade and natural features. Different features are
shown in different layers. Attributes of all the features like name of the road its
width, name of railway line, name of the building and its number of stories, width of
drains and its HFL, Type of overhead crossings (Electric and Telephone lines) and its
rating have been provided in this drawing.
Details of all the religious structure such as Temple, Mosque, Gurudwara, Church,
Monuments, Tomb, etc have been shown in the drawing as per standard legend.
Spot levels have been shown in drawing to access the terrain of the area along with
trees falling in said survey corridor of 100m. Control points, established during
conducting the survey work, have been also shown in the drawings.
Details of features shown in the drawings were verified at site and additional details
were collected and incorporated in the drawing wherever needed.
Based on the finalized topographical survey drawing, the alignment design was done
using MX-Road software.
The proposed Thane Metro - Ring corridorhas been finalized for implementation in
this Phaseas shown in Figure 5.1. Corridor starts as New Thane station adjacent to
Sub urban Station Kopri and traverses through city in a ring via Dongripada,
Kasarvadavali areas and Thane junctionRailway Station at the North of Thane
junction Railway Station.
a. Alignment Description
Considering km 0/000, centre line of New ThaneStation near proposed Kopri sub-
urban station as starting of alignment, this corridor ends at the same location and
forms a Ring. The length of Ring Alignment is 27400.172 m. A connection of length
1177.7 m is planned from Waghbil to Kasarvadavali area as depot connectivity. This
corridor consists of elevated and underground stretches along with Switch over
Ramps (SOR).
From To Length
Alignment Type
(m) (m) (m)
Underground 0.0 317.0 317.0
Switch over Ramp (-)8.0m to(+)7.5m 317.0 1181.0 864.0
Elevated 1181.0 24917.0 23736.0
Switch over Ramp (+)7.5m to (-)8.0m 24917.0 25342.0 425.0
Underground 25342.0 27400.2 2058.2
Depot Entry 0 1177.7 1177.7
Total 28577.8
The Alignment of the Ring Corridor is described in detail in following sub sections:-
• This section is completely underground from Ch: 0m to Ch: 317m and from Ch:
25342m to Ch: 27400.2m(total 2375.2m) and consisting of total 2 nos. underground
stations namely Thane Junction and New Thane Station. All the stations have been
proposed by Cut & Cover method.
• Entire stretch in this section isdensely populated with very narrow lanes leading to
no path for movement of construction equipments and machinery, hence planned
for construction by TBM or NATM, to keep in mind this underground section is
designed 15m below the ground level.
• All the underground stations are off the road and are proposed in open land leading
to ease in construction and avoidance to disruption in road traffic.
• Thane Junction station has been proposed inside open land of Thane Bus depot and
Private land near Thane Junctionfor better integration with existing Railway station
and Bus system.Master plan/Modifications Plan of Thane Junction railway Station
has been considered for planning of station. An area of about 4940 sqm will be
requiredon temporary basis for about 4 years period for construction of
underground stations by Cut & Cover method.
• There exists a 4-storied Hotel Mourya with in proposed Thane station boundary,
which needs to demolish during constructionof underground stations by Cut & Cover
method.
• New Thane Station, the second underground station, has been proposed inside open
land of State government for better integration with proposed sub-urban Kopri
Railway station. Around 4940 sqm of land will be required on temporary basis for
about 4 years period for construction of station by Cut & Cover method.
FIGURE 5.1: PROPOSED THANE METRO RING CORRIDOR – NEW THANE TO NEW THANE VIA DONGRIPADA & THANE JUNCTION
• Both Stations, in this underground stretch have been proposed with 1- Island
platform.
• After Ch: 317m, alignment is planned on rising gradient to come out from
underground to At-grade.
• Further, the alignment after New Thane station heads in North-West direction along
Nallahnear mental Hospital.
• To become elevated from underground (from -8.0m to +7.5m), ramp has been
provided along Nallah. The switch over ramp has been proposed from Ch: 317m to
Ch: 1181m. About 11628sqm land will be required permanently for locating the
ramp.
• The proposed section is completely elevated from Ch: 737m to Ch: 25127m with
total length of 24.390 Km and consists of total 20 elevated stations with 2- sided
platform namely Raila Devi, Wagle Circle, Lokmanya Nagar Bus Depot, Shivai Nagar,
Nilkanth Terminal, Gandhi Nagar, Dr. Kashinath Ghatekar Natyagraha, Manpada,
Dongripada, Vijay Nagari, Waghbil, Water Front, Patlipada, Azad Nagar Bus Stop,
Manorma Nagar, Kolshet Industrial Area, Balkum Naka, Balkumpada, Rabodi and
Shivaji Chowk
• The alignment mostly follows the High Capacity Mass Transit Route (HCMTR) and
Future Development Plan Roads (DP Roads)in this section.As shown in Figure 5.2.
• The alignment runs from Ch: 1300m to Ch: 4400m (Raila Devi to N.G. Vihar), Ch:
9500m to Ch: 11100m (Bhavani Nagar to Patlipada), Ch: 18900m to Ch: 22600m
(Manorma Nagar to Balkumpada) and Ch: 24000m to Ch: 26000m (Shivaji Chowk to
Thane Junction Railway Station) on proposed HCMTR.
• In terms of Future Development Plan Roads (DP Roads) in this section, Thane Ring
Metro Alignment has been planned from Ch: 4400 to Ch: 5350, Ch: 9500 to Ch:
11100, Ch: 13450 to Ch: 15200, Ch: 16000 to Ch: 16400, Ch: 17650 to Ch: 18800, Ch:
18800 to Ch: 20900 and Ch: 20900 to Ch: 23250aligns along 40m, 30m, 40m, 20m,
40m, 30m and 40mDP Roads respectively.
• Passenger Integration of Thane Ring Metro with Mumbai Metro line- 4&5 has been
planned at three locations namely Modella Chowk, Dongripada and Balkum Naka.
For this arrangement suitable vertical clearance has been maintained.
• At Ch: 1255m (Raila Devi), proposed alignment encounters with Mumbai Metro line-
4 and Lal Bahadur Shastri Marg, where Rail level of Mumbai Metro line-4 is 35.2m
with 19.5m as vertical clearance from ground. Due to availability of sufficient vertical
clearance, proposed Thane Ring Metro has been planned below the Mumbai Metro
line-4 with Rail level 24.8m. A special span bridge has been proposed from Ch:
1200m to Ch: 1308m.
• The alignment passes through a cluster of buildings between Ch: 4400m to Ch:
5000m (from Lokmanya Nagar Bus Depot to Pokharan Road No.1). The section is
part of HCMTR and shall be developed before take up of the metro project work.The
section is shown in Figure 5.3.
vertical clearance, proposed Thane Ring Metro has been planned below the Mumbai
Metro line-4 with Rail level 27.2m. A special span bridge has been proposed in this
section.
• From Ch: 11050m to Ch: 11450m and Ch: 11920m to Ch: 12050m, two flyovers exist
on Ghodbunder Road, to keep in view metro alignment has been kept to off road
from median in this stretch.
• The alignment crosses proposed line-5 of Mumbai Metro and SH-35: Old Mumbai-
Agra Road at Balkum Naka (Ch: 20620m), where Rail level of Mumbai Metro line-5 is
19.0mand vertical clearance from ground is 10.3m.Thane Ring Metro flythe Mumbai
Metro line-5 at this location. A special span bridge has been proposed from Ch:
20555m to Ch: 20721m to accommodate both structures.
• At Kalwa Bridge crossingnear Shivaji Chowk, a new clover leaf bridge is proposed in
future development plan and NH-4: Mumbai- Pune Highway crossing exists, to keep
in view sufficient lateral clearance has been kept from the proposed bridge.At this
location, a special span bridge has been proposed from Ch: 24232m to Ch: 24340m.
• The alignment runs elevated till Ch: 24917m, thereafter, from Ch: 24917m to Ch:
25342m ramp has been proposed to become underground(from +7.5m to -8.0m)
with a gradient of 3.7% (Compensated) along the creek in open land of State
Government. About 4900Sqm of Govt. land has been proposed for locating ramp.
v. KasarvadavaliDepot Entry
• Two separate connections for Up and Down connectivity as third line have been
proposed at Waghbilstation and Waterfront (TCS) station. The alignment length for
Up and Down connectivity is 1177m each up to start point of depot. This
connectivity is proposed along the 40m development planed Road. In the planning
of connectivity provision of sufficient vertical clearance has been kept. A Ramp at
limiting gradient of 4%is proposed to meet the ground and enters in Kasarvadavali
depot of length 1140m.Depot location is shown in Figure 5.4.
A. Reference Point
For the planning convenience, the zero point of the Corridor is considered at the
centre line of the proposed New Thane station near proposed Kopri sub-urban
Railway station. The chainage along the Ring Metro Alignment increases in clockwise
direction and the last point of alignment meets with the first point of alignment. All
elevations are from Mean Sea Level (MSL).
B. Interchange Stations
Efforts have been made to select station locations in such a fashion so as to provide
convenient and efficient passenger interchange with other modes of transport such
as other Railway system, Metro system and Bus system. Interchange stations
provided along the Corridor are shown in Table 5.5.
The major roads along and across the alignment are given in Table 5.6 and 5.7
respectively.
The HT Power Lines across the alignment are given in Table 5.8.
5.1.4. Stations
• Stations have been located so as to serve major passenger catchment areas and
to enable convenient integration with other modes of transport.
• Stations vary in complexity along the route and have been located by an
interactive process influenced by ridership forecasts, availability of open land,
interchange requirements with other modes of transport, construction
feasibility, inter station distance, alignment geometry, utilities, road and
pedestrian requirements, future infrastructural developments and joint site visits
& consultations with MMRCL and TMC.
• Possibility of Parking space at all the stations has also been explored.
• List of stations along with their chainage and interstation distances (ISD) for
Corridor is given in Table 5.9.Wherever space and site condition permits, portal
type arrangement is proposed for elevated stations. However, due to limited
ROW and narrow roads, most of the elevated stations are proposed with
Cantilever type arrangement, which is also used extensively in Maha Metro.
Comprehensive Mobility Plan prepared in 2018 has been taken as basis of ridership
and proposed corridor for mass rapid transit systems.
Alternative Analysis Report for MRTS system selection has been taken as the basis
for selection of metro system for the study area.
A site reconnaissance survey was carried out by RITES along with TMC & MMRCL
officials to finalise the alignment of Thane Metro corridor. The details of catchment
areas as well as the abutting landuse along the corridor and Development Plan
Thane were also collected during the site visit. Photo graphs were also taken during
site reconnaissance to identify the alignment options of Metro Corridor, Depot and
Station locations.
The geometric design norms presented in subsequent paragraphs have been worked
out based on detailed evaluation of passenger comfort, safety, experience and
internationally accepted practices being followed in currently operating rapid transit
and rail systems.
ii. To utilize the existing road Right of Way (ROW) to the maximum extent in order
to minimise the land acquisition and also length of diversions.
iv. To avoid private built up areas, villages, habitation and religious structures etc.
to the extent feasible.
B. General Criteria
General Criteria used for the design purpose are given in Table 5.10.
C. Horizontal Alignment
Horizontal alignment gives the details of curves in horizontal plane as the entire
alignment can-not be on straight. The alignment on mainline track shall consist of
tangent sections connected to circular curves by spiral transitions.
i. Circular Curves
Circular curves shall be defined by their radii in meters. Larger radii shall be used
whenever possible to improve the riding quality. The minimum radius of
curvature for mainline track shall be governed by the design speeds and by the
limits for cant but shall not be less than 120m.The horizontal curve parameters
are tabulated below inTable 5.11.
The use of reverse curves is discouraged but where necessary, the two curves
have been separated by minimum 25 m. If provision of 25 m straight length is
restricted by physical constraints, the two curves have provided without any
straight in between.
It is necessary to provide transition curves at both ends of the circular curves for
smooth transition from straight section to curved section and vice-versa.
Table5.12shows required Length of transitions for Horizontal curves.
D. Vertical Alignment
The purpose of this section is to establish criteria for use in all design stages of the
vertical alignment and track centre of the viaduct, tunnel, station and depot area.
i. Elevated Section
As per para 2.12.2 of IRC: SP-73, "Minimum 5.50 m vertical clearance shall be
provided from all points of the carriageway of project Highways to the nearest
surface of the overpass structure”. However, it is recommended to keep suitable
margin for future raising of road by resurfacing etc. Rail level will also depend
upon the type and detailed design of pier cap and super-structure elements.
above. At stations, depth of rail below the ground level shall accommodate
station concourse also.Table 5.14shows required Track centres and depth for
underground station.
E. Gradients
i. Mid-Section
The grade on the mid-sections shall not be generally steeper than 3.0%.
However, there are a few situations, where steeper gradients are unavoidable,
such as:
• Where the existing road gradient is more than 2.5% as the elevated section is
kept parallel to the road surface to minimise the rail level (to reduce the pier
height).
Suitable longitudinal grades with drains at the low point are proposed for
assuring proper drainage.
ii. Stations
Preferably, the stations shall be on level stretch with suitable provision for
drainage by way of cross slope and slope of longitudinal drains.However,
maximum grade shall not exceed 1 in 400. There shall be no change of grade on
turnouts on ballastless track.
iii. Depot
F. Vertical Curves
Vertical curves are to be provided when change in gradient exceeds 0.4%. However,
it is recommended that all changes in grade shall be connected by a circular curve or
by a parabolic curve.
G. Welding
To minimize noise and vibrations, track joints should be welded by Flash Butt
Welding Technique and Alumino-Thermit Welding may be done only for those joints
which cannot be welded by Flash Butt Welding Technique
• Earth retaining structures like diaphragm walls, sheet piles, secant piles etc.
In cast in-situ construction method, structure is cast at its final location of use. This
involves erection of temporary shuttering, scaffolding and support system for
casting the structure. The temporary supports and shuttering is removed when the
concrete is set and structure attains the strength to bear its dead weight and other
loads. This method involves longer construction time and interference to road users
for longer period. This method is restricted to casting of substructure - open
foundation, pile, pile caps, columns; station structure; earth retaining structures.
B. Pre - castconstruction
In this method, structural segments are pre-casted in casting yards, pre-stressed and
then transported to the location of use and launched by means of suitable launching
arrangement. The structural elements for superstructure i.e. box segments, I-
Girders, U-girders and sometimes pile caps are casted by pre-cast technique. Pre
cast construction may be segmental or non-segmental type.
Casting yard is required for casting of precast structural segments and other precast
units like U-girder, I-Girder etc. The construction depot has arrangement for casting
beds, curing and stacking area, batching plant with storage facilities for aggregates
and cement, site testing laboratories, reinforcement steel yard and fabrication yard
etc. An area of about 2.5 Ha to 3 Ha is required for each construction depot.
• For segmental, pre-cast element (of generally 3.0m length), transportation from
construction depot to site is easy and economical. For other type of construction
i.e. I-Girder, U Girder etc. longer trailer and straighter roads are required but
erection can be done by using road cranes in comparatively less time.
For casting of segments, both long line and short line method can be adopted.
However, the long line method is more suitable for spans curved in plan while short
line method is good for straight spans. A high degree of accuracy is required for
setting out the curves on long line method for which pre-calculation of offsets is
necessary. Match casting of segments is required in either method. The cast
segments are cured on the bed as well as in stacking yard. Ends of the segments are
to be made rough through sand blasting so that gluing of segments can be effective.
A. Sub-structure
Two broad categories of sub-structure i.e. Pile Foundation and Open foundation are
considered for Metro Systems. For heavy/medium loads and loose/soft/filled up
upper strata, Pile foundation systems are proposed. This requires lesser space and
time for excavation. Pile load bearing capacity is calculated as per IS 2911 Part 2 &
IRC- 78. At locations where hard strata/rock is available close to ground level, open
foundations may be adopted.
To prevent the direct collision of vehicle to pier, a Jersey Shaped crash barrier of
1.0m height above existing road level has been proposed all around the pier. A gap
of 25mm has been also provided in between the crash barrier and outer face of pier.
The shape of upper part of pier has been so dimensioned that the required
minimum clearance of 5.5m is always available on road side beyond vertical plane
drawn on outer face of crash barrier. In such a situation, the minimum height of rail
above the existing road is 8.5m. The longitudinal center to center spacing of
elastomeric/pot bearing over a pier would be about 1.8m.
The space between the elastomeric bearings will be utilized for placing the lifting
jack required for the replacement of elastomeric bearing. An outward slope of 1:200
will be provided at pier top for the drainage due to spilling of rainwater, if any. The
transverse spacing between bearings would be about 3.0m. The orientation and
dimensions of the piers for the continuous units or steel girder (simply supported
span) have to be selected to ensure minimum footprint at ground/road level traffic.
Since the vertical and horizontal loads will vary from pier to pier, this will be catered
to by selecting the appropriate structural dimensions.
Pier caps are casted over the columns to support the superstructure. Soffit width of
superstructure governs the width of Pier cap. While box girder requires less width of
pile, I-girder and U-girders require larger width of Pier caps to support the full width
of soffit of such superstructures. At locations where elevated alignment moves from
central verge of the road to side of the road and vice versa, Portal arrangement is
made instead of column and Pier cap. Also at locations where elevated alignment
takes a perpendicular left or right turn, portal type arrangement is provided to
provide support to superstructure.
B. Superstructure
V) Special spans
For Box girder segmental construction, normally span of 31m is kept by providing 9
segments of 3m length and two end segments of 2m length each. The other
standard spans (c/c of pier) comprises of 28m, 25 m, 22m, 19m & 16m, which shall
be made by removing/adding standard segments of 3.0m each from the center of
the span.
Transportation of segments from casting yard to the sites of erection will be effected
by appropriately designed low-bedded trailers (tyre-mounted). The segments can be
lifted and erected using erection portal gantry moving on launching girder.
• Facilitates inspection and monitoring of tendons during the entire service life of
the structure.
The main advantages for this type of structural configuration of superstructure are:-
However, Single U- girder has weight in the range of 300 MT per unit and it is
difficult to transport girder of such length and weight. To reduce the weight per
girder, double U- girder may be used, but it results into wider track center of 4.6m to
accommodate the two inside walls of the two girders.
The depth of I-girder is comparable to Box girder. Since unit length of I-Girder is for
full span, their transportation is not possible for all locations. However, the unit
weight of I-Girder is approximately in the range of 70 MT, which is almost half when
compared to Double U-girder and hence can be launched with lower capacity road
cranes. Deck Slab of I-Girder can easily be planned to accommodate curved
alignment. I-Girders are most suitable for station locations, where Box and 'U'
Girders are not continued.
Regular spans upto 31m span are not suitable for crossing large openings like road
over bridges, wide surface road crossings, railway tracks, wide canals, Rivers etc.
Cantilever construction Method using PSC spans are used in such situation. Some of
common span arrangements are suggested as under:-
Other span configurations may also be designed as per specific site requirement.
Other alternative is to use steel span. Steel span of upto 60m have been used in
Metro systems in India.
FIGURE 5.16: CLC SPAN 75M + 105M + 75M AND STEEL SPAN 60M
Recommendation
The Design and Build Contractor may choose any type of super structure keeping in
view site conditions, availability of construction time and other resources i.e. road
cranes/launching girders/shuttering etc. Combination of above type of
superstructure may also be chosen. Appropriate special spans may be provided for
specific locations.
Elevated stations with elevated concourse over the road are proposed for elevated
stretch of alignment. To keep the rail level low, it is proposed not to take viaduct
through the stations. Thus a separate structural configuration is required, with
shorter spans and lower depth of superstructure, although this may necessitate the
break in the launching operations at each station location.
Sub-structure for the station portion will also be similar to that of viaduct and will be
carried out in the same manner. Two configurations as under are available for
elevated station super-structure:-
b. Cantilever structure with single centre pier with the arms extending in transverse
direction at concourse level and platform level.- Concourse and Platform decks
are supported by I girders resting on extended pier arms.
The elevated station is generally located on the road median 81 m long and 23 m
wide and is a three level structure. Passenger area on concourse is spread
throughout the length of the station, with staircases leading from either side of
theroad. Passenger facilities as well as operational areas are provided at the
concourse level. Typically, the concourse is divided into public and non-public zones.
The non-public zone or the restricted zone contains station operational areas. The
public zone is further divided into paid and unpaid areas. Area left over in the unpaid
zone, after accommodating the passenger movement and other station facilities is
earmarked for commercial utilization.
Since the stations are planned generally in the middle of the road, minimum vertical
clearance of 5.50 m has been provided under the concourse. Concourse floor level is
about 7.0 m above the road. Consequently, platforms are at a level of about 13.0 m
from the road. To reduce physical and visual impact of the elevated station, stations
have been made transparent with minimum walls on the sides. Figure 5.20 shows a
typical cross section of elevated station.
To achieve above objectives, use of Tunnel Boring Machine (TBM) is the prime
method of tunneling. Locations where deployment of TBM is not possible (tunneling of
short length, cross passages, underground stations which are not possible by cut and
cover method etc.) are tackled by NATM method.
A. Selection of TBM
Choice of appropriate TMB depends upon the detailed geological studies and soil
conditions. In the rocky strata, heavy disc cutters are required in the cutter head,
whereas for excavating soft soils, scrappers are provided in the cutter head. In mixed
soil conditions, the TBM should be capable of excavating soils and rocks both, hence
combination of scrappers and disc cutters is used under such situations.
The Earth-pressure type TBM is suitable for certain types of soil that can be
directly fluidized. Fluidized soil fills the cutter chamber and the screw conveyor is
used for discharge of muck, thereby keeping the cut face stable. The shield
machine is able to simultaneously excavate soil during shield advance, so not
only is the face well stabilized, but also the effects on the surrounding ground
are minimized.
The Mud-pressure type TBM is that soil pressure at the face is transferred
efficiently to ground that is high in sand content and low in fluidity through the
addition of water, mud, and additives. It is applicable to a large range of soils,
including soft ground with low solidity such as alluvial sand/gravel, sand, silt and
clay, alluvial deposits, and alternating hard and soft soil layers. The only
limitation is that the soil discharge screw conveyor is unable to operate when the
ground has high hydrostatic pressure. For this reason, it is necessary to closely
study the soil properties before implementation.
Slurry type TBM (Air tunnel-boring machine) is used for tunnel-boring in highly
permeable unstable terrain, or under civilian structures sensitive to ground
disturbances.
When digging in highly unstable or liquid terrain, the pressure exerted by the
terrain is directly governed by the depth at which digging is performed. It is
therefore necessary to balance the pressure exerted by the terrain: the front
shield of the Slurry TBM is filled with excavated material, with the exception of
one air-filled part. The pressure within this air bubble is subject to fine control.
Bentonite injection waterproofs the working face and improves its resistance.
B. Proposed Dimensions
a. Pre-Assembly Activities
This is a concrete structure designed to hold the main frame of the Entrance ring of
TBM and prevent water and slurry flowing into the shaft during the assembly and
operation of the TBM. Rubber Seal (25 mm thick) and seal retainers keep full
contact with the shield TBM. Three air ventilation tubes are installed near the
tunnel crown and one at the invert, to release the air, when the void is being filled
with grout while launching the TBM. These can also be used for grouting.
This is a Pre-fabricated steel structure over which the TBM is assembled in–situ.
This also acts as guide to help TBM oriented in the required direction, while in
operation. After the TBM becomes operational, the cradle will be carefully
dismantled so that the same material can be used at different shaft.
This is a steel Structure consisting of the Frame and supports which is fixed to the
shaft floor and is designed to safely bear the thrust [a force of App. 1200 ton (30%
of total thrust)] applied by the TBM during its working (force required by the
cutting edge to cut the rock). The machine is to be assembled in- situ on a platform
called Cradle and a Reaction frame is to be constructed in advance to bear the
reaction of the force exerted by the main drive of the TBM for cutting the rock.
Once the TBM becomes operational, the steel work in the Reaction Frame will be
carefully dismantled as the same material is to be used repeatedly at subsequent
assemblies at different sites.
b. Assembly of TBM
After the Head Wall, Entrance ring, Cradle, Reaction Frames are constructed and
other preparatory works are completed, the TBM can be assembled in- situ in a
launching chamber on the cradle and launched for tunneling. Metro underground
station being constructed by cut and cover method can be used as launching shaft
for TBM.
It takes about three-four weeks each for completing the preparatory work and
actual assembly of TBM in position, before it could be launched. The cradle and the
Reaction Frames are specially designed for every situation depending upon the
machine characteristics and the rock characteristics. A 35 ton crane with a traveling
gantry (or a suitable road mobile crane) is required for assembling the TBM. A 50 ton
mobile crane will be required at the receiving end for dismantling TBM before
shifting the same to another location.
c. Excavation
The TBM will operate at all times in enclosed mode. The pressure being maintained
by balancing excavated material and foam introduced against material removed via
the screw. A belt weighing device will be included on conveyor belt. This will
measure the weight of the excavated material as it is transported on the conveyor
belt.
d. Ring Erection
As the machine advances, the construction of the permanent lining takes place
behind the excavation face of the machine and typically consists of 6 segments
which make one ring.
e. Settlement Control
Settlement is primary caused by over excavation by TBM and the failure to fill
annular voids behind the segments. To prevent over excavation during the TBM
drives the following actions will be carried out:-
• Display in TBM drivers cabin to show actual excavated volume vs. theoretical
excavated volume in real time. Data to be recorded by TBM data logger.
To ensure settlement do not occur due to the annulus ring not being filled by grout
the following actions will be carried out.
The above actions should ensure all annular voids are filled during the initial drive
thereby controlling settlement caused by poor grouting practices.
After ring installation, theoretical void distance between the excavated radius and
the external radius of the precast ring need to be filled up. Grouting fill the voids and
it also controls the ground settlement. Grouting pressure is calculated on the basis
of overburden pressure. Structures shall be watertight if the leakage does not
exceed 5 ml/m2/hour. Inside surface above spring line of the tunnel shall be always
kept dry condition.
The grouting can be distinguished into two types. These are single compound type
and the other is the two compounds type. The hardening time of the one compound
type is relatively slow and its strength is also low. On the other hand it is relatively
easy for the two compounds type to adjust the hardening time and strength. Hence
it is recommended to use the two compounds type for the cavity grout.
The two compounds type is also distinguished into two types - liquid type and plastic
type. The liquid type can be sometime diluted by the underground water and
segregated. However, the plastic type is changed instantly into gel and kept very
stable until it gets its own strength. Thus plastic type grout is recommended. The
major materials of the liquid-A for the plastic type are mainly cement, fly-ash and
bentonite. And the major material of the liquid-B for the plastic type is sodium
silicate.
Segment Gasket
• Gaskets shall be fitted into the grooves provided in the edges of the segment to
be sealed in the manner recommended by the gasket manufacturer. The gasket
dimensions shall match the groove width, subject to the specified tolerance.
• Sealing strips of the hydrophilic or gasket type, or a combination of the two, shall
be provided at all faces between segments to provide a seal against ingress of
ground water. Gaskets must be capable of withstanding the anticipated water
pressure when in use in the tunnel. Test certificates or other information shall
be provided to demonstrate this capability.
Cradle will be installed to drag the TBM in station area and again drive to other end
of station by cutting D-wall. One end of station is receiving chamber and other end is
launching chamber.
The term New Austrian Tunnelling Method Popularly Known as NATM, was first used
by Mr. Rabcewicz in 1962. This method has been evolved as a result of experience
gained in Austrian Alpine tunnelling condition. The first use of NATM in soft ground
tunnelling is done in Frankfurt metro in 1969. The basic aim of NATM is for getting
stable and economic tunnel support systems. Providing flexible primary lining
inshape of shotcrete, wire mesh, rock bolts, lattice girder. In case of weaker rock
mass
the use of pipe forepole/pipe roofing is also resorted for crown support which in
turn leads to less over-break as well as ensure safety during the execution. The main
aspect of the approach is dynamic design based on rock mass classification as well as
the in situ deformation observed. This method has been very useful in complex
diversified geological condition where forecasting of the rock mass is difficult due to
rapidly changing geology.
Generally, two separate tunnels each accommodating a track and platform are
constructed for two tracks and these two platform tunnels are interconnected by
cross passages at regular interval so that both the platforms are accessed through a
common set of stair cases and escalators provided at two shafts. In fact, these two
platforms interconnected with number of cross passages act as an island platform.
i. Dynamic Design – The design is dynamic during the tunnel construction. Every
face opening classification of rock is done and the supports are selected
accordingly. Also the design is further reinforced based on the deformation as
noticed during the monitoring.
ii. Mobilization of the strength of rock mass: The method relies on the inherent
strength of the rock mass being conserved as the main component of tunnel
support. Primary support is directed to enable the rock to support itself.
iii. Shotcrete Protection: Loosening and excessive rock mass deformation should
be minimised by applying a layer 25-50mm of sealing shotcrete immediately
after opening of the face.
v. Primary Lining:The primary lining is thin. It is active support and the tunnel is
strengthened not by a thicker concrete lining but by a flexible combination of
rock bolts, wire mesh and Lattice girders.
vi. Closing of invert: Early as far as possible closing the invert so as to complete
the arch action and creating a load-bearing ring is important. It is crucial in soft
ground tunnels.
B. Construction of Shafts
Generally the shafts meant for entry / exits are constructed by Cut and Cover
method. Due to presence of buildings very close to excavation area rigid support
system in the form of Diaphragm Walls and Secant Pile Walls is proposed to be
adopted for the braced excavation in the soil. However, the excavation in rock is
usually done by stabilizing the rock face by means of shotcrete and rock dowels. A
It is proposed to construct permanent diaphragm wall duly socketed into the rock
and excavation below the diaphragm wall level be done by supporting rock face by
shotcrete / rock bolting depending on the rock conditions. Once the
excavationproceeds in rock diaphragm wall can be extended below by jacketing. For
this it is proposed to use couplers in the diaphragm wall reinforcement. In some
cases, however, where it is considered risky to do trenching for diaphragm wall
panel on account of poor soil conditions and proximity to the building temporary
secant pile or diaphragm wall with shorter panels may be adopted.
C. Cross Passage
• The SGI segment is sometimes used at the location of the cross passage in order
to strengthen the segment lining because some parts of the segment lining must
be dismantled during the construction of the cross passage.
• Ground treatment is carried out from the ground surface. Usually the jet grout is
applied. The jet grout is much more effective than other methods for the ground
treatment because the original soil is totally replaced by the improved soil.
• Ground treatment is also carried out from the tunnel after the jet grouting above
ground. The purpose of the grouting from the tunnel is supplementary grouting
for the jet grouting above ground.
• Dismantling of the piece of the segments is commenced one piece by one piece
together with carefully confirming of the soil condition. Additional grouting
should be done if necessary.
• Structural work
D. Support Measures
Support measures prescribed for these NATM tunnels generally included shotcrete,
wire mesh, lattice girders, forepiling etc. M25 grade of shotcrete is generally
adopted for these tunnels. Standard shotcrete thickness is 25-30 cm for such sizes of
platform tunnels, cross adits and service tunnels. However, in special areas such as
intersections and transitions and areas of weak ground a higher shotcrete thickness
of approximately 30-40 cm is applied. To avoid the buildup of water pressure on the
shotcrete lining weep holes are drilled through the shotcrete lining. These weep
holes are equipped with slotted PVC pipes wrapped in geo-textile.
Lattice girders are installed to provide immediate support for the exposed rock mass
during excavation and to serve as template for the excavation geometry. They also
serve as guidance and support for forepiling and are considered as reinforcement of
the shotcrete lining. Different types of lattice girders are installed depending on the
applied shotcrete thickness.
For the tunnels wire mesh 150/150/6 mm are applied as standard. Wire mesh is
applied after application of a shotcrete sealing layer. Proper overlap of 300 mm (2
mesh Openings) is provided in both directions i.e. circumferential and in longitudinal
direction.
In some cases, forepling is installed in the crown area of the top heading to avoid
development of loosening rock zones. Forepiling is installed after each round from
the current top heading face to provide safety for the following top heading
excavation round. It is installed from the top of the last lattice girder installed.
• Concrete construction
ii. Top Down Construction: In this method, after excavation of first stage, floor
slabs are constructed. These floor slabs are permanent structures which replace
temporary steel struts in the braced excavation method to counteract the earth
pressure from back of retaining wall. In this way, the underground structure
construction is finished with the completion of excavation process. The floor
slabs used in this method are heavier than steel struts used in conventional
excavation method. In addition, superstructure being constructed
simultaneously during excavation puts more weight on the column. Hence,
bearing capacity of column is to be considered. Typical construction procedure
of top down construction method is as under:-
b. Construct piles. Place the steel columns where piles are constructed.
The merits and de-merits of this method are shown in Table 5.20.
Merit De-merit
Where ROW is extremely restricted and it is not possible to adopt cut and cover
method, stations are constructed by NATM. In this method, two separate tunnels
consisting of one track and one platform are constructed by NATM method and are
connected by means of cross passages. This method requires overburden of about 2-
2.5 times dia of tunnel. In this method, progress is slow. This method is described in
detail in tunnelling sub-section.
c. Secant Piles: It is series of piles cutting into adjoining piles to achieve water tight
retaining structure. In this method, alternate soft piles, called female piles, of dia
A typical underground station is three level station with entrances and ventilation
shafts at the ground level, a concourse with ticketing and AFCs at the mezzanine
level and finally platforms at the lowest level. 140 m long island platform is
proposed on the stations. Platform is 12 m wide with 2 sets of staircase/ Escalator
planned leading to either end of the station. A lift is planned in the centre. Figure
5.35 shows a typical cross section of underground station.
Two end concourses have been proposed, one at each end. The concourse is divided
into paid and unpaid area by the AFC gates. Paid area is limited to access to the stair
/ escalator and corridor connecting the two concourses, also lead to the lift which is
centrally provided.
Since, very limited space is available on the ground at stations, all the over-ground
structures are therefore, planned as and where space is available and are therefore,
• Rigid connection
• Pin connection
• Free connection
The Rigid connection is recommended. There are some measures for such joint
between the tunnel and station which are as follows.
• RC segment only
• Flexible joint
Considering safety and cost for the construction it is recommended to apply the rigid
joint at the connection between tunnel and station. Detailed analysis such as FEM
analysis should be done for the earthquake to estimate the displacement of the
joint.
The corrosion control system shall be designed to mitigate the potential effects of
stray currents. The consultant team recommends the following measures.
• Cathodic protection should be applied to all the pipes inside the tunnel.
• Bracket for the pipes or cable should be taken care of its insulation.
ix. Ventilation
of the tunnel is relatively small and the direction of the traffic is always same.
Moreover, the innovation of the ventilation fan is so fast that this system is getting
more effective to the ventilation of the even longer tunnels in these days.
The analysis of the ventilation for the normal and emergency condition can be made
by the Subway Environment Simulation (SES) computer program, which was
developed by the Department of Transportation of USA. However, the air velocity of
2 m/s is applied for designing the capacity of the ventilation fan in the Japanese
latest metro system. This figure complies with the NFPA 130 and a reference for the
system in the project.
x. Grade of Concrete
i. Piles : M-35
It is proposed to use HYSD 500 or TMT steel as reinforcement bars. For pre-stressing
work, low relaxation high tensile steel strands with the configuration 12 T 13 and or
19 K 15 is recommended (confirming to IS:14268).
Geotechnical investigation was carried out by RITES forThirty (30) boreholes drilled
throughout the Corridorwith the objective of determining subsurface profile of the
underlying strata and required strength characteristics of the underlying soil / rock
strata in order to propose the suitable substructure for elevated section, stations
buildings, other buildings and underground alignment.
Geotechnical report includes field investigation, laboratory test results of the soil
samples to evaluate the soil parameters and recommendations with regard to
suitable sub-structure which may be adopted for various elevated and underground
structures.
ii. Physiography
The headquarters of the district is the city of Thane. Other major cities in the district
are NaviMumbai, Kalyan-Dombivli, Mira-Bhayander, Bhiwandi, Ulhasnagar,
Ambarnath, Badlapur, Murbad and Shahapur.
The district is situated between 18°42' and 20°20' north latitudes and 72°45' and
73°48' east longitudes. The revised area of the district is 4,214 km². The district is
bounded by Nashik district to the north east, Pune and Ahmadnagar districts to the
east, and by Palghar district to the north. The Arabian Sea forms the western
boundary, while it is bounded by Mumbai City District and Mumbai Suburban
District to the southwest and Raigad District to the south.
There are two distinct climates in the district, one on the western coastal plains and
the other on the eastern slopes of Sahyadri. The climate on the western coastal
plains of Thane, Vasai, Palghar and Dahanutalukas is tropical, very humid and warm.
The climate on the plains at the foot of the slopes (Kalyan, Bhiwandi, Vada,
Ulhasnagar, Ambarnath and Talasaritalukas) and on the eastern slopes of Sahyadri
(Murbad, Shahapur, Jawhar, Vikramgad and Mokhadatalukas) is comparatively less
humid. The temperature variation is more in the eastern part of the district
comparing to the western coastal areas.
The district has four seasons. Winter is from December to February, followed by
summer from March to June. The southwest monsoon season is from June to
September. October and November months constitute the post-monsoon season,
which is hot and humid in the coastal areas.
In the coastal area, the average daily maximum temperature in summer is 32.9 °C
(maximum recorded at Dahanu is 40.6 °C on 19 April 1955) and in winter average
mean daily minimum temperature is 16.8 °C (minimum recorded at Dahanu is 8.3 °C
on 8 January 1945). But in the interior parts of the district, the average daily
minimum temperature is slightly lower in the winter season and the average daily
maximum temperature is higher in the summer.
The average annual rainfall in the district is 2293.4 mm. The rainfall in the district
increases from the coastal areas to the interior. The rainfall varies from 1730.5 mm
at Mahim on the coast to 2588.7 mm at Shahapur in the interior. The rainfall during
the southwest monsoon season, June to September, constitutes about 94% of the
annual rainfall. July is the wettest month with a rainfall of about 40% of the annual
total. The variation in the annual rainfall from year to year in the district is not large.
The highest rainfall recorded in 24 hours at any station in the district was 481.1 mm
at Dahanu on 1 September 1958 CE.
The Thane district forms part of western slope of Sahayadri hill range. This hill range
passes through the eastern part of the district. Major part of the district constitutes
rugged and uneven topography, characterized by high hills and steep valleys.
Physiographically, district can be divided into two broad divisions-Undulating Hilly
Tract and Coastal Plain in western part. The area is drained by innumerable streams
and tributaries of Vaitarna and Ulhas River. The four main tributaries of river
Vaitarna are Surya, Tansa, Deharaja and Pinjal Rivers. Ulhas River is the other
important river in the district. Most of the soils in the district can be considered as
being derived from trap (Basaltic) rocks. The soil has been classified into three broad
categories based on the characteristics and relationship with topographic set up.
1) Soil of Coastal Lands with Residual Hills - These soils are slightly deep, poorly
drained, fine soils on gentle sloping land and very fine soil on sloping land.
These soils are calcareous and occur along the coast of Vasai, Palgarh and
Dahanu.
2) Lighter Colored soils - These soils are occurring on the undulating, elongated
hills and 5 intervening valleys. These are medium to deep grayish in color,
poor in fertility, clayey to loamy in nature, shallow in depth and coarse in
texture. These soils are known as Varkas and are suitable for rice. These soils
occur on the eastern part of the district.
3) Black Colored Soil- These soils occur on plains in the middle and eastern part
of the district along the valleys.
The soils of thane district can be conveniently divides into three categories
The first type of soil, which is found in Dahanu, Palghar, Vasai and Thane tahsil, is
fertile and useful for horticulture, Paddy cultivation and vegetables. Whereas, the
second type which is found in Mokhada, Talasari and some parts of other tahsils on
the Eastern slopes is useful for growing coares millets like Nagli and Varai. The third
type of soil found in Bhiwandi, Kalyan and Shahapurtahsils is useful, particularly for
Paddy cultivation.
v. Seismicity
In peninsula India the state of Maharashtra, along with Gujarat and Madhya
Pradesh, has suffered from frequent earthquakes, both deadly and damaging,
although not located on or near any plate boundaries. All the earthquakes here, as
in all of peninsula India, are interpolating events. In the 20th century alone, three
earthquakes with magnitudes greater than 6.0 were recorded here. According to
GSHAP data, the state of Maharashtra falls in a region of moderate to high seismic
hazard. As per the 2002 Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) map, Maharashtra also falls
in Zones II, III & IV. Historically, parts of this state have experienced seismic activity
in the M6.0-6.5 range. Approximate locations of selected towns and basic political
state boundaries are displayedin Figure 5.36.
Seismic Zones in India and Earthquake Hazard map are shown in Figure
5.37andFigure 5.38.
Field Investigation at the site were planned to determine the required strength
characteristics of the underlying soil/rock to design the foundations of the proposed
structure to be constructed. The geotechnical investigation work includes:
a. Drilling of 150mm diameter boreholes in all kind of soil including gravels and
cobbles, & 76 mm dia. drilling in Weathered Rock, Soft Rock & Hard Rock up to
depth ranging from 15m to 21m. Boreholes have been terminated after
completing at least 3 m drilling in fresh and hard Rock. These bore holes have
been drilled at an interval of about 1000m c/c distance along the alignment or at
change of strata.
A. General
In total, 30 bore holes have been drilled up to maximum 21.00 m depth along the
proposed Corridor for investigation. In which one Bore Hole has been drilled in
Kasarvadavali Depot area.
Standard Penetration Test (SPT) was conducted in the boreholes at every 3.0 m
interval and change of strata as per specifications. Standard split spoon sampler
attached to lower end of drill rods was driven in the boreholes by means of standard
hammer of 63.50 kg falling freely from a height of 75 cm. The sampler was driven 45
cm as per specifications and number of blows required for each 15 cm penetration
was recorded. The number of blows for the first 15 cm penetration was not taken
into account as it is considered seating drive. The number of blows for next 30 cm
penetration was designated as SPT ‘N’ value. Wherever the total penetration was
less than 45 cm, the number of blows & the depth penetrated is incorporated in
respective bore logs. Disturbed Soil samples obtained from standard split spoon
sampler were collected in polythene bags of suitable size. These samples were
properly sealed, labeled, recorded and carefully transported to laboratory for
testing.
Undisturbed Soil Samples (UDS)UDS wherever could not recover due to presence of
hard strata or slipped during lifting, were duly marked in the respective bore logs.
The depth of Ground Water Table was checked/ measured in all bore holes. The
ground water table was encountered in all bore holes during the boring activity.
A total of 29 BHs have been drilled in the soil for corridor. Summary of the boreholes
drilled in the corridor is given in Table 5.23.
Depth of Ground
S. Chainage
BH Nos. BH Location Borehole Water Table
No. (m)
(m) (m B.G. L)
23 BH-19 Near Balkumpada 22300 16.50 6.80
24 BH-20 Near Saket 22850 18.00 8.30
25 BH-21 Near Rabodi 23660 16.50 5.30
26 BH-22 Near Shivaji Chowk 24485 15.00 6.50
27 BH-23 Near Thane Junction 25460 16.00 6.50
28 BH-24 Near Brahman Society Thane Junction 26585 21.00 4.50
A total of 1 BH having 15.0 m depth has been drilled in soil for the proposed depot.
Summary of the borehole drilled is given below in Table 5.24.
LAYER TYPE – I: Overburden comprising of silty sandy soil with gravels and pebbles
yellowish brown in colour
LAYER TYPE –III: BedrockRock comprising fresh & hard Basalt with zeolite Type of
Foundation
BH-1 Near New Thane 0.00 4.50 4.50 15.00 15.00 18.00
BH-2 Near Kashish Park 0.00 6.00 6.00 12.00 12.00 15.00
BH-3 Near Modella chowk 0.00 3.50 3.50 12.00 12.00 15.00
BH-4 Near Neheru Nagar 0.00 6.00 6.00 18.00 18.00 21.00
BH-5 Near Wagle Industrial Estate 0.00 6.50 6.50 14.00 14.00 17.00
BH-6 Near Lokmanya Nagar Bus Depot 0.00 6.00 6.00 16.50 16.50 19.50
BH-7 Near Shastri Nagar 0.00 4.50 4.50 13.00 13.00 16.00
BH-8 Near Upvan Lake 0.00 6.00 6.00 13.00 13.00 16.00
BH-9 Near Gandhi Nagar 0.00 4.50 4.50 13.00 13.00 16.00
BH-10 Near Vasant Vihar 0.00 4.50 4.50 12.00 12.00 15.00
BH-11 Near Khewra Circle 0.00 4.50 4.50 12.00 12.00 15.00
BH-13 Near Hiranandini Estate Road 0.00 3.00 3.00 12.00 12.00 15.00
BH-13 A Near Vijay Nagri 0.00 4.00 4.00 12.00 12.00 15.00
BH-13 C Near Hiranandini Road Enclave 0.00 7.50 7.50 12.00 12.00 15.00
BH-13D Near New Brahmand 0.00 4.50 4.50 12.00 12.00 15.00
BH-14 Near Azad Nagar Bus Stop 0.00 7.50 7.50 15.00 15.00 18.00
BH-15 Near Manorma Nagar 0.00 6.00 6.00 12.00 12.00 15.00
BH-16 Near Kolshet Industrial Area 0.00 4.50 4.50 15.00 15.00 18.00
BH-17 Near Old Agra Road 0.00 9.00 9.00 12.00 12.00 15.00
BH-18 Near Balkum Naka 0.00 10.50 10.50 13.00 13.00 16.00
BH-22 Near Shivaji Chowk 0.00 9.00 9.00 12.00 12.00 15.00
BH-23 Near Thane Junction 0.00 10.50 10.50 13.00 13.00 16.00
BH-24 Near Brahman Society Thane Jn. 0.00 4.50 4.50 18.00 18.00 21.00
BH-25 Near New Thane 0.00 4.50 4.50 13.50 13.50 16.50
A. Introduction
B. Safe Load Carrying Capacity and Safe Uplift Capacity for Pile
Depth of foundations in soil shall be decided as per clause 7 of IS: 1904 for special
cases like; where volume change is expected / scour is expected / foundations on
sloping ground / foundation on made up or filled up ground / frost action is
expected etc. The Depth of foundation also depend upon the Rock Strata
encountered down the ground level at adequate depths and hence, calculated as
per IRC-78 2014. The safe pile load carrying capacity and safe uplift capacity for
various lengths and diameters of piles has been worked out as per IS 2911 (Part
1/Sec 2): 2010- Design and Construction of Pile Foundations equation and tabulated
below in Table 5.26 and Table 5.27.
TABLE 5.27: SAFE LOAD CARRYING CAPACITY & SAFE UPLIFT CAPACITY OF DEPOT
Net Safe bearing Capacity of shallow foundation at depot locations, where bed rock is
met at shallow depth has been calculated and tabulated below in Table 5.28.
Thirty boreholes have been drilled down to maximum depth of 21.00 m below ground
level for sub soil/Rock exploration. Following is recommended for different type of
foundations:
• Since heavy loads are to be transferred to sub soil strata at viaduct part of alignment
therefore Pile Foundations have been recommended for the proposed viaduct
• The design safe load carrying capacity of Deep Foundation has been giveninTable
5.26above.
• The load capacities of piles are based on empirical correlation’s and should be
confirmed by conducting pile load test as per IS: 2911 (Part 4) on test piles before
execution of working piles.
• Since the proposed site is situated in seismic Zone III of the seismic zonation map of
India, suitable seismic coefficient commensurate to seismic Zone III (IS: 1893) should
be adopted in the design of the structures.
Following considerations have been kept in view, while designing the alignment.
a. The alignment has been proposed to cover the high-density traffic corridor and
origination/destination centers.
b. The elevated alignment has been generally proposed along the median of the
road.
c. Track Centre of 4.1 m has been proposed for elevated section for superstructure.
d. Underground alignment has been designed with a view to avoid high rise
buildings having deep foundations.
f. Traffic diversion will be required where elevated stations are proposed along the
road.
g. Effort has been made to minimize disruption to road traffic during construction
phase.
h. Effort has been made to position the ramps and depots on Government land.
A. Horizontal Curvature
The proposed alignment negotiates frequent horizontal curves to follow the existing
road median. At some places there are sharp turns and curves along the road and
this necessitates provision of sharp curves on metro alignment also.
Total 82 nos. horizontal curves have been provided on the entire length of the
alignment. The minimum radius of curves is 200 m in underground section and 120
m in elevated section. About 51.17% alignment is on straight & about 47.83% of
alignment is on curves. The abstract and details of curves are indicated in Table
5.29and5.30respectively.
B. Gradients
While designing vertical alignment, efforts have been made to avoid frequent
gradients. The number of gradients has been kept to minimum, however, due to
ground profile, difference in rail level of viaduct over mid section and station
location, horizontal alignment and switch over ramps, gradients are inevitable.
Efforts have been made to provide the gradients as flat as possible, subject to
ground profile.
Curve Chainage Intersection Angle Transition Length Tangent Curve Total Curve Straight
Direction Radius
No From To D M S In Out Length Length Length Between
26 7750.41 8087.33 Left -135 121 27 44.64 50 50 268.77 236.92 336.92 591.23
27 8128.67 8255.02 Right 210 20 30 0.36 50 50 63.69 26.36 126.36 41.33
28 8339.59 8430.51 Left -800 4 12 53.28 30 30 45.48 30.92 90.92 84.57
29 8456.84 8586.98 Right 350 13 4 15.24 50 50 65.28 30.14 130.14 26.32
30 8659.62 8809.00 Left -230 24 27 7.92 50 50 75.57 49.38 149.38 72.64
31 8835.11 8961.79 Right 190 23 4 20.64 50 50 63.97 26.68 126.68 26.11
32 9103.36 9205.08 Left -650 5 21 56.88 38 38 50.89 25.71 101.71 141.57
33 9237.74 9363.72 Left -280 15 19 30.36 50 50 63.27 25.98 125.98 32.66
34 9429.58 9582.73 Right 125 47 9 52.2 50 50 80.05 53.15 153.15 65.86
35 9876.04 10006.30 Left -150 30 23 36.24 50 50 66.29 30.27 130.27 293.31
36 10551.29 10741.13 Right 125 64 3 16.2 50 50 103.74 89.84 189.84 544.99
37 10938.99 11140.15 Left -125 69 10 14.88 50 50 111.91 101.16 201.16 197.86
38 11216.02 11400.56 Left -250 30 30 2.88 50 50 94.05 84.55 184.55 75.87
39 11694.24 11956.84 Right 1200 11 21 0.36 20 20 131.72 222.61 262.61 293.67
40 11985.76 12132.18 Right 125 44 6 50.4 50 50 76.06 46.42 146.42 28.92
41 12175.00 12292.80 Left -500 8 12 11.16 45 45 58.97 27.80 117.80 42.82
42 12456.32 12588.93 Right 200 23 23 43.8 50 50 67.00 32.61 132.61 163.52
43 12679.43 12804.56 Right 240 17 33 39.6 50 50 62.93 25.13 125.13 90.50
44 12829.56 12970.62 Left -125 41 26 33 50 50 72.94 41.06 141.06 25.00
45 13125.51 13251.27 Left -400 11 15 10.8 46 46 63.03 33.76 125.76 154.89
46 13276.47 13540.59 Right 125 98 5 3.84 50 50 170.09 164.12 264.12 25.19
47 13793.02 13918.65 Left -160 27 2 44.16 50 50 63.67 25.63 125.63 252.43
48 14152.98 14272.07 Right 480 8 25 57.36 46 46 59.63 27.09 119.09 234.34
49 14348.13 14560.95 Right 125 74 22 30.36 50 50 120.88 112.82 212.82 76.06
50 14924.19 15042.19 Left -410 10 2 4.2 46 46 59.11 26.01 118.01 363.23
51 15092.57 15355.21 Right 125 97 16 51.6 50 50 168.38 162.65 262.65 50.38
52 15595.91 15747.76 Left -125 46 24 37.08 50 50 79.27 51.85 151.85 240.70
Curve Chainage Intersection Angle Transition Length Tangent Curve Total Curve Straight
Direction Radius
No From To D M S In Out Length Length Length Between
53 15773.05 15898.25 Right 260 16 20 31.2 50 50 62.92 25.20 125.20 25.29
54 15934.58 16060.22 Left -150 28 32 1.32 50 50 63.80 25.64 125.64 36.33
55 16085.28 16210.91 Right 160 27 2 43.44 50 50 63.67 25.63 125.63 25.06
56 16308.26 16434.22 Left -125 34 29 25.44 50 50 64.42 25.96 125.96 97.35
57 16487.67 16616.50 Right 125 36 4 49.08 50 50 66.02 28.83 128.83 53.45
58 16805.57 16937.12 Left -125 37 13 28.56 50 50 67.53 31.55 131.55 189.07
59 16970.15 17096.39 Left -250 17 16 55.92 50 50 63.47 26.24 126.24 33.02
60 17121.53 17246.09 Right 175 24 14 37.32 50 50 62.96 24.56 124.56 25.14
61 17294.39 17510.64 Right 125 76 7 21 50 50 123.65 116.26 216.26 48.30
62 17651.32 18005.01 Left -125 139 7 13.08 50 50 363.33 253.69 353.69 140.67
63 18247.90 18375.99 Right 150 29 29 42.36 50 50 65.12 28.10 128.10 242.89
64 18738.94 18902.36 Left -125 51 35 28.32 50 50 86.32 63.42 163.42 362.94
65 19358.82 19475.94 Right 400 10 6 39.96 46 46 58.67 25.12 117.12 456.47
66 20029.08 20814.65 Right 450 94 5 43.08 46 46 507.17 693.57 785.57 553.14
67 21341.66 21471.30 Right 300 15 7 23.88 50 50 65.09 29.64 129.64 527.01
68 21583.43 21711.34 Left -300 14 31 28.2 50 50 64.21 27.91 127.91 112.14
69 22547.83 22674.16 Left -250 17 17 39.84 50 50 63.53 26.34 126.34 836.49
70 23097.96 23249.91 Right 125 46 26 6.36 50 50 79.33 51.95 151.95 423.80
71 23275.15 23382.64 Left -600 6 15 50.76 40 40 53.79 27.49 107.49 25.24
72 23655.05 23783.27 Left -180 24 32 9.24 50 50 64.85 28.23 128.23 272.41
73 23945.89 24074.87 Right 250 18 3 20.16 50 50 64.88 28.97 128.97 162.62
74 24161.17 24288.65 Left -250 17 27 7.56 50 50 64.11 27.47 127.47 86.31
75 24633.31 24748.48 Right 550 7 11 1.32 45 45 57.64 25.17 115.17 344.66
76 24775.00 24901.13 Left -210 20 27 42.12 50 50 63.57 26.13 126.13 26.52
77 24977.15 25082.41 Right 605 6 6 17.64 40 40 52.67 25.26 105.26 76.02
78 25240.08 25492.86 Right 200 58 3 14.04 50 50 136.35 152.79 252.79 157.67
79 25612.44 25744.68 Right 350 13 16 28.56 50 50 66.34 32.24 132.24 119.58
Curve Chainage Intersection Angle Transition Length Tangent Curve Total Curve Straight
Direction Radius
No From To D M S In Out Length Length Length Between
80 25936.72 26079.19 Left -300 17 23 38.76 50 50 71.66 42.48 142.48 192.04
81 26510.68 26636.34 Left -360 12 1 23.16 50 50 63.00 25.66 125.66 431.48
82 27139.05 27271.67 Left -350 13 18 46.44 50 50 66.53 32.62 132.62 502.71
A total 86 number of change of gradients has been provided in the entire Corridor.
Flattest gradient is level provided for 29.44% of the alignment. Steepest gradient is
3.7% provided for ramp at Thane Junction Railway Station. The abstract and details
of gradients are given in Table 5.31 and 5.32respectively.
S. Chainage
Location Configuration Special span
No From To
Balkum Naka, Mumbai
3 20555 20721 34m + 2x48m + 34m = 164m
Metro Line-5 Crossing
Shivaji Chowk, New Kalwa
4 24232 24340 34m + 48m + 34m = 108m
Bridge Crossing
S. Chainage Length
Location Purpose
No. From To (m)
Before Vijay Nagari Station, the
13 Vijay Nagari 12260 12295 35 alignment is diverted off the road
from median.
After Vijay Nagari Station, the
14 Vijay Nagari 12880 12960 80 alignment is diverted from off road
to median.
Before Waghbil Station, the
15 Waghbil 13360 13460 100 alignment is diverted off the road
from median.
Before New Patlipada Station, the
16 Patlipada 15930 16010 80 alignment is diverted off the road
from median.
After Rabodi Station, the alignment
17 Rabodi 23180 23240 60
is diverted from off road to median.
Break-up of alignment length for Thane Ring Corridor is given in Table 5.35.
5.5.1 Introduction
• Large number of sub-surface, surface and overhead utility services viz. sewers, water
mains, storm water drains, gas pipe lines, telephone/ communication cables,
Overhead power transmission lines, power cables, traffic signals, etc. exists all along
the proposed ring alignment.
• These utility services are essential and have to be maintained in working order
during different stages of construction, by temporary/permanent diversions and
relocation or by supporting in position. Any interruption to these will have serious
repercussions on the most sensitive suburban services and direct impact on the
public besides set back in construction and project implementation schedule &
costs. Therefore, meticulous detailed survey and planning will be required to
protect/divert the utility services.
For identification of likely utilities in the proposed metro Corridor, liaison was made
with following Organizations/Departments (Table 5.36):-
While planning for diversion of underground utility services viz. sewer lines, water
pipelines, cables, etc., during construction of MRTS, following guidelines have been
adopted:
• Utility services have to be kept operational during the entire construction period and
after completion of project. All proposals should therefore, ensure their
uninterrupted functioning.
• Sewer lines and water supply lines are mainly affected in underground cut and cover
construction. These services are proposed to be maintained by temporarily
replacing them with CI/Steel pipelines and supporting them during construction,
these will be encased in reinforced cement concrete after completion of
construction and retained as permanent lines.
• Where permanent diversion of the affected utility is not found feasible, temporary
diversion with CI/Steel pipes without manholes is proposed during construction.
After completion of construction, these will be replaced with conventional pipes and
manholes.
• The elevated viaduct does not pose much of a difficulty in negotiating the
underground utility services, especially those running across the alignment. The
utilities infringing at pier location can be easily diverted away from the pile cap
location.
The storm water drains and water pipe lines generally exists either side of under
main carriageway or at some places on the central verge, as a result of subsequent
road widening. However, majority of sewer lines are running in the centre of the
road.
The major sewer, storm water drains and water pipe lines mains running across the
alignment and likely to be affected due to location of column foundations, are
proposed to be taken care of by relocating the column supports of viaduct by change
in span or by suitably adjusting the layout of pile foundations. Where, this is not
feasible, lines will be suitably diverted. Provision has been made in the project cost
estimate towards diversion of utility service lines. Details of sewer lines & storm
water drains and water pipe lines affected are indicated in Table 5.37and5.38.
Few gas pipe lines with varying diameters belonging to Mahanagar Gas Limited and
BPCL, are running along and across the roads. Though, the alignment is planned
almost along the road, en-route few pipelines running across and along the
alignment likely to be affected by the alignment are detailed in Table 5.39 and Table
5.40.
At several places, telecom cables and OFC of Vodafone, Reliance, Airtel, Tata, MTNL
and BSNL, HT lines of MSEDCL and Telecommunication/signal cables of Indian
Railwaysare also running along and across the proposed corridor and few of them
are likely to be affected. The list of such cables along with their locations and
diversion proposals are shown in Table 5.41 to5.49.
5.6 LAND REQUIREMENT FOR THE CORRIDOR, DEPOT STATIONS, PARKING, MULTI MODEL
STATIONS
• Receiving/Traction Sub-stations
• RadioTowers
No land at surface is required permanently for elevated section, except for small
areas for entry/exit structures, traffic integration and other maintenance utilities at
stations. These will be located either on footpath edge or in front marginal open
setback of the building along the road. Wherever stations are proposed off the road,
land for station building is also required permanently.
No land at surface is required permanently for underground section, except for small
areas for entry/exit structures, traffic integration and ventilation shafts/other
maintenance utilities at stations. These will be located either on footpath edge or in
front marginal open setback of the building along the road. All the underground
stations are planned with island platforms.
Switchover ramps are required for transition from the elevated to underground
section and vice versa. The ramp covers a stretch at ground for the whole width of
structure for two tracks. The length of ramp above ground depends on the existing
ground slope and the gradient provided on Metro alignment (normally 3% to 4%).
Thus the ramp is to be located in an area where sufficient road width is available or
in an open area.
For Thane Ring Corridor, an area of 10620 sqmhas been proposed between
proposed Kopri sub urban station and Railadevifor locating underground to elevated
ramp. Further, an area of 4920 sqm parallel to creekhas been proposed near Thane
JaunctionRailway Station for locating elevated to underground ramp.
At depot entriesarea of 3200 sqmhas been proposed for locating elevated to At-
grade ramp at Kasarvadavali depot.
Govt. land has been proposed for integration with Rail system, Metro corridor and
Bus system.
About 20.7 Hectares (including 4.5 Hectares for Property Development)State Govt.
land for Depot has been proposed for corridor near Kasarvadavali.
Total of two RSS have been proposed on the corridor at Gandhi Nagar and Shivaji
Chowk. An area of 3000 sqm has been proposed for each RSS. ASS and DG Sets are
required at all stations.
Also, large numbers of pre-cast tunnel segments are required for construction of
tunnels for which a large Open area is required for setting up of casting yard. As far
as possible, this area will be in temporary construction depot.
Since the area of land being acquired permanently at most of the stations is bare
minimum, the land required for construction depots purpose is identified
throughout the corridor, in the vicinity of the stations on temporary acquisition
basis. These sites will be obtained on lease temporarily for the construction period.
After completion of construction, these will be handed over back to the land owning
agency.
About 50 Hac land for Thane Ring Corridorhas been proposed for construction yards
along the corridor. At the time of construction, depending upon the need, area
requirements, the location and size can be reassessed and temporary land
acquisitions can be madeaccordingly.
3 Near Wagle Circle TJN-5 2684 2800 1155 Private Viaduct Construction 2G+0,G+2 3 1184
4 Near Sai Sailyam Society TJN-8 5300 5322 395 Govt. (State) Viaduct Construction Nil 0 0
5 Near Sai Sailyam Society TJN-9 5322 5355 249 Private Viaduct Construction Nil 0 0
7 Near Cosmos Hill TJN-12 5993 6069 220 Private Viaduct Construction Nil 0 0
8 On Upvan Lake Road TJN-13 6452 6667 1887 Govt. (State) Viaduct Construction G+0 1 118
16 Near Harab on Parklane TJN-24 15916 16123 2039 Private Viaduct Construction Nil 0 0
17 Near TMC Garden TJN-25 16157 16287 235 Private Viaduct Construction G+0 1 183
18 Near TMC Garden TJN-26 16396 16470 1346 Private Viaduct Construction Nil 0 0
19 Near TMC Garden TJN-27 16470 16575 1713 Govt. (State) Viaduct Construction Nil 0 0
Near Commissnor
24 TJN-35 24348 24836 6526 Govt. (State) Viaduct Construction 10G+0 10 533
office,Shivaji Chowk
25 Near Ambedkar Society TJN-36 24881 24934 143 Private Viaduct Construction G+0 1 865
6. STATION PLANNING
6.1. STATION PLANNING - BASED ON SITE CONDITIONS
The proposed Metro Rail System has been planned to serve major passenger
catchment areas/ destinations and to enable convenient integration with other
modes of transport. Stations have been located by an interactive process
influenced by ridership forecasts, existing major settlements, major roads,
interchange requirements with other modes of transport, station spacing,
alignment, utilities, traffic and pedestrian requirements, station spacing, etc. The
stations locations along with their chainages and inter-station distance are
presented in Table 6-1.
The catchment areas for all stations, issues and concerns, potential improvements
are summarized below:
Proposed location for the station Residential area near station location
Proposed station location on SG Barve road Modella Chowk & Check Naka
SG Barve road connecting Wagle Circle Surrounding areas near station location
It is the fifth station along the proposed Metro Corridor on Pokhran Road No. 1. It is an
elevated station near Shivai Nagar. The station caters to the areas of Shivai Nagar, Devdaya
Nagar, Shanti Industrial Estate, Deshpande Industrial Estate, etc.
Issues & Concerns Potential for Improvements
• Lack of footpaths resulting in pedestrian • Dedicated bays for pick up/ drop facilities
spillover on road further adding to for all mode
pedestrian vehicular conflict • Dedicated pedestrian friendly facilities
• On-street parking causes reduction in
efficient roadway width
• PT/IPT stops do not have dedicated bays
which causes reduction of carriageway
Station Location on Pokhran Road No.1 Land use around station location
Surrounding areas near the proposed Station Station Location on Pokhran Road no.2
Proposed location of the station Smt. Gladys Alvares Road near station
Location
Water Tank on Smt. Gladys Alvares Road Surrounding areas near location
9. Manpada Station
This is an elevated station and lies between Tikuji Ni Wadi & Smt. Gladys Alvares Road.
The catchment area of station are Bhavani Nagar, Dharamvir Nagar, Kokanipada,
Manpada, Hill Garden etc.
Issues & Concerns Potential for Improvements
• Lack of connectivity to station location • Dedicated pedestrian friendly facilities
• PT/IPT stops do not have dedicated bays • Dedicated bays for pick up/ drop facilities
which causes reduction of carriageway • Planning of dispersal facilities through
feeder modes will cater to a larger
catchment and help maximize ridership of
the proposed system
Link Road connecting station location Mixed Land use around station location
Surrounding area near location Ghod Bunder road near the proposed
Location
Proposed location for the station Vehiculer movement on Ghod Bunder road
Proposed location for the Station Wagbil Road along proposed Station
Wagbil Road near proposed station Surrounding areas near proposed location
Location of proposed station Link road near the proposed station location
Location of proposed station on DP road Akbar Camp Road near proposed location
Location of proposed station on DP road Approach road near the proposed station
Location of proposed station on Saket road Saket Road crossing proposed DP Road
Location of station on proposed DP Road Approach road near the proposed station
Land use along station location Saket Balkum Road near the proposed
station
Existing Bus stand near Thane station Proposed location & Bus Shed near location
Existing situation of proposed station location Existing auto stand & pedestrian pathway near
exiting Thane station
i. Planning Parameters
NBC (National Building Code) & NFPA 130 (Standard for Fixed Guide way Transit
and Passenger Rail Systems) are used for station designing & planning.
• Operational requirements.
• Station entry/exit location
• Utilities such as fire fighting systems, ventilation, water requirements etc
• Structural requirements
• Flexibility in design to allow stations to respond to site specific requirements
The essential quality in a good station layout is the provision of adequate space for
efficient movement of passengers between ground level entrances on to the trains
and vice versa in the most direct, simple and logical way.
Station entrances provide the link between station concourse and the surrounding
streets. Station entrances are located with particular reference to passenger
catchment points and also cater for inter modal interchange which includes buses,
IPTs, pick/drop by private mode etc. Important criteria that has been applied in the
development of station planning include:
Concourse forms the interface between streets and the platform. This is where all
the passenger amenities are provided.
Office accommodation, operational areas and plant room space are provided in the
non-public areas of the station.
The platform level has been designed for adequate assembly space for passengers
for both normal operating conditions and a recognized abnormal scenario
(emergency).
The location of DG set, Bore Well Pump House, Underground / overhead tank,
chiller plant and Pump Houses are preferably proposed to be located in one area at
ground level wherever possible.
Station Design is dependent on the peak hour traffic load for each station. The
platform length is planned for 6 cars/train. The evacuation time for the movement
of all passengers in an emergency from platform level to the point of safety is as
per NBC 2016 and NFPA 130 Guidelines in the stations. The station planning is also
in compliance to the “Guidelines and Space Standards for Barrier Free Built
Environment for Disabled and Elderly persons” published by the Ministry of Urban
Affairs and Employment India in 1998.
v. Entry/Exit
The numbers and width of staircases/ escalators are determined by checking the
capacity/available width against peak passenger flows rates for both normal and
emergency conditions such as delayed train service, fire etc.
such a way that maximum surveillance can be achieved by the ticket hall supervisor
over ticket machines, automatic fare collection (AFC) gates, stairs and escalators.
Ticket machines and AFC gates are positioned to minimize cross flows of
passengers and provide adequate circulation space. Sufficient space for queuing
and passenger flow has been proposed in front of the ticketing counters and AFCs
gates. The “Non Public Areas” comprise of the Back of House (BOH) areas. The BOH
areas consists of System Rooms, Operations, Staff Facilities, Water Supply and
Drainage System and Miscellaneous requirements. Passenger handling facilities
comprise of stairs/escalators, lifts, ticketing counters/automatic ticket vending
machines and ticket gates required to process the peak traffic from street to
platform and vice-versa. These facilities are provided in the concourse and they
also act as a medium to transfer between Paid and Unpaid areas (these facilities
also enable evacuation of the station under emergency conditions, within a set safe
time limit). Uniform number of these facilities has been provided for system wide
uniformity, although the requirement of the facilities actually varies from station to
station based on the peak hour passenger load.
Ticketing Gates
The ticketing system shall be simple, easy to use/operate, and maintain, easy on
accounting facilities, capable of issuing single/multiple journey tickets, amenable
for quick fare changes and requiring less man power. The requirement of the
number of gates is based on the peak hour passenger traffic at the station. Uniform
space has been provided at all stations where gates can be installed in the unpaid
area of the concourse. Ticketing gates provides a means of transfer between paid
and unpaid area of the concourse. Ticketing gates’ requirement has been calculated
taking the gate capacity as 28 persons per minute per gate (85% of the Maximum
Practical Capacity which is taken as 35 persons per minute per gate). In the design
year output capacity of 35 passengers is assumed because of passenger’s familiarity
with the system. At least two ticketing gates are provided at any elevated station.
The total number of gates also includes one service gate, one emergency exit door
in case of breakdown, one separate gate for disabled in Elevated stations.
Ticket Office
The number of Ticket Offices is determined by the passenger traffic and the
operation policy. A minimum of 2 ticket office per station in the stations with high
traffic, and 1 ticket office per station in the stations with low traffic have been
planned (Figure 6.3)
The length of the Platform is 140meter. This allows for the length of 6 car train and
a stopping tolerance for the rail corridor Platforms. The nominal platform width
measured from the platform edge to any continuous (longer than 2000 mm) fixed
structure shall be a minimum of 3000 mm. The minimum distance from the
platform edge to any isolated obstruction e.g. columns, shall be 2500 mm (an
isolated obstruction shall not be longer than 2000 mm). This clearance shall be
maintained for safety reasons, irrespective of passenger flows. The platform width
greater than the minimum may be required at stations with large passenger flows.
The platform edge shall have a safety margin of 600 mm wide with a non-slip
surface and a yellow warning strip of 100 mm wide of contrasting texture. The
platform ends shall be provided with a 1200 mm wide security gate and be installed
with a Pressure Mat Alarm system.
The platform width shall be determined by the peak minute flow, allowing for two
missed headways. The crush load is taken as the sectional load between two
stations. For an island platform, the area between the boundaries of the two
platforms is included in the calculation.
The process to derive the platform width calculations are detailed below:
Peak Minute Peak Direction Boarding = Peak hour Peak direction boarding/50. The
peak minute flow taken in the calculations is assumed to be 20% higher from the
average minute flow as derived from the hourly passenger volume. This takes into
account the peaking minute during the peak hour flow of the passengers.
Platform congregation during disrupted time of service: Peak minute Peak direction
boarding X Disrupted Time
Markings on the platform and ramps to assist and control the flow of passengers
for boarding and alighting with a step free access from/to the trains shall be
provided. Tactile Markings shall also be provided for guiding paths and warning
strips for vision impaired persons to ease the travel for Persons with Disabilities.
The built platforms shall also provide for bright colour contrast for low vision
persons; large lettering and information displays and digital signage; lifts with
lowered control panel with Braille and raised control buttons and auditory signals,
wide doors and grip rails on the sidewalls of the elevator car; resting areas for
senior citizens and disabled persons; well-lit platform corridors along with public
announcement system. Inside the coaches, there will be designated spaces for
wheelchair users, audio announcement with dynamic display and sensory door
closing mechanisms. Space occupied by stairs, escalators, structure, seating,
platform supervisor’s accommodation etc. is not be included as part of the platform
area. Platforms shall have a clear head room of at least 3000 mm to structures and
platform signs to a width of at least 2000 mm from the platform edge over their
entire length. Suspended signs, fittings, and fixtures shall have a minimum
clearance of 2100 mm above finished floor.
The maximum distance on the platform to a point at which means of egress route
leaves the platform shall not exceed 100 m. The provision in the station layouts
from the remote point on the platform to an exit route has been kept within 50
meter.
The time required walking from the farthest point on a platform to the escalator or
stair landing is considered to be half a minute. Walking speed as per NFPA 130 has
been taken as 37.8 meter/minute.
A Check shall be made to ensure that sufficient capacity exists at the level to which
passengers are evacuated as being a place of ultimate safety so that people can
move freely away from stairs and escalators as they arrive. The emergency is
assumed to be occurring in one direction of travel only at any given point of time.
For ensuring adequacy of platform area, stair widths and requirement of additional
emergency evacuation stairs, a maximum accumulation of passengers in the station
has been considered to be comprising waiting passengers at the platform (including
two missed headways) and section load (or full train load if the section load
exceeds a full train load) expected to be evacuated from the peak direction at the
station in case of an emergency. Also, waiting passengers congregated during this
disrupted time of service (two missed headways) in the off-peak direction to be
added in the evacuation from the platform to concourse in case of underground
stations and concourse to ground in both underground as well as elevated stations.
Back of House (BOH) areas comprise of "Public" and “Non Public Areas”. The BOH
areas consist of System Rooms, Operations, staff facilities, Water Supply and
Drainage System and Miscellaneous requirements.
Ticket Office
The Ticket Office can also be used to inform passengers. If the main Ticket Office is
located next to the Station master control room, it will be fitted with a self-closing
door between these two rooms. The room will require special protection (as
armored glass, metal doors, etc.).
Security/Police Room
This room is located in each station and is used by the security staff. It is preferable
that this room is located at the concourse, in the public operation area allowing
watching over the public. This room could be fitted with specific equipment in
relation to the role of security staff.
Water Storage
The Design of the Water tank is based upon the assumption of 35 liter/person for
raw and treated water. The capacity of the Water Tank is provided as 50 cum
approximately(as per NBC 2016) for each elevated station and that for the UG
station, it is taken as 2 lakh litres. However, when commercial areas are present
within metro stations, firefighting facilities shall need augmentation as per NBC
2016.
The following regulations and standards shall form the basis for the design of
escalator system.
Design Criteria
The escalators will be heavy duty “public” service escalators capable of operating
safely, smoothly and continuously in either direction, for a period of not less than
20 hours per day, seven days per week, (except special holiday which may be
operated 24 hours a day) within the environmental conditions prevailing within the
well way and at the location where the escalators are installed. The maximum
allowable passenger load of each step should not be less than load equivalent of
three 65 kg person per step. The escalators will be equipped with energy saving
system. Speed of escalators will be in the range of 0.6-0.75 m/s for normal
operation. The energy saving system will reduce speed of escalators to standby
speed mode of 0.20 m/s during low traffic hour. The number of flat steps at the
upper landing should be in proportion to the vertical rise of the escalator. For 6.1 m
to 18.3 m rise, minimum four flat steps should be provided and for a rise up to 6.1
Interfacing requirements:
The following escalators interface will be monitored by the SCADA and abnormal
conditions will be alarmed:
The following regulations and standards will form the basis for the design of
elevator system.
Design Criteria
Lifts will be of the goods/passenger public service type and rated at minimum 180
starts per hour. Lifts will be of proven technology and designed to have low energy
consumption, low operational costs and will provide environment friendly
passenger service. Lifts will be rope traction type capable of operating safely and
smoothly without jerking under all loading conditions, for a period of not less than
20 hours per day (except special holiday which may be operated 24 hours a day),
seven days per week within the environmental conditions prevailing within the
hoist-way and at the location where the elevators are installed. Lift will be capable
of carrying minimum loading of 750 kg, and may be sized for comfortably taking an
injured person on a stretcher with room for the stretcher bearers to place the
stretcher in the lift without difficulty. The design of the lift will take into
consideration fire prevention, elimination of dust and dirt traps, and easy access for
cleaning and routine maintenance. The drive machine, its associated machinery and
all necessary control equipment of lifts at stations will be installed within the lift
shaft without any lift machine room. Intercom will be provided inside the lift car to
communicate with the Station Operation Room of the station where lifts are
installed. The leveling accuracy at the landing served, under no load and full load
condition in either up and down direction, will be made within + 5 mm. The speed
of lift will be capable of reaching the uppermost discharge point in not more than
one minute. The time will be calculated from the time the doors are fully closed at
the lowest discharge point to the time that they begin to open at the uppermost
discharge point. The minimum speed will be not less than 1.0 m/s irrespective of
the travel distance. Lifts will be equipped with facilities for physically challenged
people, in accordance with the relevant standards.
Interfacing Requirements:
The following shall be monitored by the SCADA and abnormal conditions will be
alarmed:
Retail shops in the stations could provide additional financial income. The expected
level of passenger traffic in the stations provides great potential for a high
commercial value for the retail shops. Here the station area is small so such
Kiosk/shops may me provided outside the station where parking provision exist.
The roof is the most visible part of the station from the surroundings. At
approximately 18 to 26 m height, the roof will be the iconic signature of the station
identity. It has to reflect the modern and contemporary values of the new line,
while being human scaled and properly sized to offer visual comfort for users.
Two types of roof (Figure 6.4) concept for elevated stations are proposed;
The single shell: A set of triangle modules of 15 m span, slightly inclined on the top,
and chasing the soft northern light, while being closed to the south side, to protect
from the sunlight and harsh shower of monsoon season.
In addition, the modular pattern could be easily adapted to the curvy layout of
many of elevated structures.
In the spare space between two modules, a glazed façade could be erected to
protect laterally from the elements. Further detailing during implementation can
improve some of the opacity of the glazed panels to the natural light and air flows.
Glazed
panels
Louvers
The conceptual station planning are the adaptations of the typical stations finalized
keeping in view the projected traffic, station requirements, site conditions, minimal
land acquisition, method of construction and overall cost optimization. Since land is
at a premium throughout the corridor, the process of reconciling the land that is
actually required for the station development has had a major influence upon the
design process and important elements of the stations such as entry/exits,
concourse, platforms etc have been designed and marked for each station to
overcome land acquisition problems. But, wherever the vacant land parcels have
not been found available, land acquisition has been proposed for placing the
necessary utilities/facilities. The most important design consideration is to provide
a safe and comfortable environment to passengers during both normal and
emergency operation. The stations have been provided with an internal
environment suitable for a world class Light Rail system by incorporating the
experience of international best practices. The stations have been planned in such a
way that they are easily operated, maintained and can be upgraded in future.
Accommodation for staff and plant rooms is provided at both platform and
concourse levels within areas that are entirely separate from the public access. The
internal arrangement for the stations is evolved in such a way that Back of House
accommodation is organized, so that the rooms of a similar operational use are
placed along a common corridor and plant accommodation is clearly distinct from
habitable rooms.The detailed descriptions for the elevated station typology are
detailed in subsequent section.
The size of the elevated station has been kept as 140m x 21.95m. The stations are
generally located on the road median. Total length of the station is 140m. All the
stations are two-level stations. The passenger areas on concourse level is
concentrated in the middle of the station, with 2 staircases, escalators & elevators
leading from either side of the road. The total width of the station is restricted to
21.95m. It is planned to be a cantilevered structure thereby keeping flexibility for
provision of a wider carriageway in future below the concourse with 3m wide
central median. Passenger facilities like ticketing, information, etc. as well as
operational areas are provided at the concourse level. Typically, the concourse is
divided into public and non-public zones. The non-public zone or the restricted zone
contains station operational areas such as Station Control Room, UPS &battery
room, signaling equipment room, communication equipment room, TSS Room,
auxiliary substations, security room, refuse store& cleaners Room, staff room, etc.
The public zone is further divided into paid and unpaid areas. Public toilets,
communication closets have been provided in the Platform Level.
Since the station is generally in the middle of the road, minimum vertical clearance
of 5.5m has been provided under the concourse. Concourse floor level is about 8m
above the road. Consequently, platforms are at a level of about 14.74m from the
road.
With respect to its spatial quality, an elevated MRT structure makes a great impact
on the viewer as compared to an at-grade station. The positive dimension of this
impact has been accentuated to enhance the acceptability of an elevated station
and the above ground section of tracks. Structures that afford maximum
transparency and are light looking have been envisaged. A slim and ultra-modern
concrete form is proposed, as they would look both compatible and modern high-
rise environment as well as the lesser-built, low-rise developments along some parts
of the corridor.
In station 3m wide staircase is provided on either side of the platform along with
two escalators on each side of the platform. Provision of 1 lift has been proposed.
Platform roofs that can invariably make a structure look heavy; have been proposed
to be of steel frame with aluminium cladding to achieve light look. Platforms would
be protected from the elements by providing an overhang of the roof and sidewalls
would be avoided, thereby enhancing the transparent character of the station
building. The rest of the station structure is supported on a single column, which lies
unobtrusively on the central verge. The section and plans for this typology is
presented in Figures 6-6. The room schedule for this typology is given in Table 6-2
Room No. Room Name Room Size (m) Area Provided (Sq.m)
Station Control
A-0.1 10.44 3.68 38.50
Room
A02.1 Excess Fare Office 3.75 2.0 7.50
A02.2 Excess Fare Office 3.75 2.0 7.50
A03.1 Ticket Office 2.81 6.12 17.22
A03.2 Ticket Office 2.81 7.95 22.33
Signaling
C-01 5.38 5.84 28.01
Equipment Room
Communication
C-03 9.23 7.95 73.37
Equipment Room
Auxiliary
P-01,02 VARIES VARIES 250.95
Substation
UPS Battery S & T
P-03 7.97 5.45 43.53
Room
- Clean Gas Room 5.84 3.00 17.50
O-02 Paid Area VARIES VARIES 858.19
O-03.1 Unpaid 269.80
O-03.2 Unpaid 269.80
O-04 Security Room 4.0 2.725 10.92
O-08.1 F Toilet Female 3.19 3.57 10.73
O-08.2 F Toilet Female 2.75 3.57 10.43
O-08.1 M Toilets Male 3.56 4.69 16.74
O-08.2 M Toilets Male 3.56 4.69 16.74
O-09.1 Toilets (H) 2.76 2.28 6.30
O-09.2 Toilets (H) 2.76 2.28 6.30
O-11.1 Janitor's Room 3.19 2.17 6.90
Cleaners Room &
O-12 & O-14 2.70 3.87 10.44
Refuse Store
O-13 Staff Room 3.90 3.87 15.093
O-18.1 Platform A 446
O-18.2 Platform B 446
PD-1 VARIES VARIES 48.83
PD-2 VARIES VARIES 106.70
The typical Underground station having size 190m x 23.55m overall. The station
have been planned for 6 car coach having the platform length 140m. The
construction of station will be of cut and cover method. The room schedule for this
typology is given in Table 6-3
CROSS SECTION
CROSS SECTION
1. NEW THANE
2. RAILA DEVI
3. WAGLE CIRCLE
5. SHIVAI NAGAR
6. NEELKANTH TERMINAL
7. GANDHI NAGAR
9. MANPADA
10. DONGRIPADA
12. WAGHBIL
13. WATERFRONT
14. PATLIPADA
19. BALKUMPADA
20. RABODI
The following pedestrian facilities and non motorized vehicles facilities have been
planned near the station influence area.
The station entry/exit have been planned keeping in view the major growth
centers/activity areas. The entry/exit has been designed to integrate the station
with existing/ proposed bus stops/bus bays, pick-drop zones and IPT services within
walking distance.
Pick and drop zones and bays for feeder modes like buses, IPT have been proposed
near the station.
Dedicated linkages have been proposed like subways, skywalks, covered walkways
etc. at interchange stations which reduces the passenger travel time and pedestrian
load on the roads.
All the footpaths in the metro station influence zone have been planned to be
upgraded to desired level of comfort and also proposed new within the stations
vicinity areas. The existing road shoulder areas and service lanes also have been
augmented/ strengthened in the design wherever possible to utilize the complete
ROW to cater to the future traffic volume
A minimum of 1.8m wide footpath has been proposed on the local roads whereas a
continuous footpath of 2 m width on the major roads to provide accessibility to
people on wheel chairs.
The vendors if any on the footpaths shall be removed and desired accessibility to
metro stations will be provided. Junctions and intersections have been proposed
with proper pedestrian crossings. In the design, table top crossings has been
proposed wherever possible, otherwise ramps with gentle slope ranging from 1:5-
1:7 have been designed for pedestrians.
For non-motorized vehicles like bicycle, rickshaw etc, separated NMV lane have
been planned within the station influence area for smooth circulation based on the
availability of land.
The design has been incorporated with a 2-m continuous strip of cycle track on both
sides of the road around stations in accordance to available RoW.
The cycle track will be differentiated by colour, markings and material for
uninterrupted movement.
Space Standards for Barrier Free Built Environment for Disabled and Elderly
Persons-1998 and revised in 2013 by Ministry of Home and Urban Affairs and other
international best practices have been considered.
Tactile Guiding Paver (Line-Type) and Tactile Warning Paver (Dot-Type) shall be
installed from station entry up to the platform boarding/alighting place for visual
impaired persons wherever is needed.
At least one of the ticket gates shall allow a wheelchair user through and have a
continuous line of guiding paver for people with visual impairments.
Public dealing counters (Information or help desks) shall be close to the terminal
entrance, and highly visible. They shall be clearly identified and accessible to both
those who use wheelchairs and those who stand.
Staircase, lift and ramp shall be planned for persons with learning differently abled,
intellectual differently abled, and elderly persons. Location shall be clearly visible
from the pedestrian route. Lifts shall have both visual and audible floor level
indicators.
Tactile Guiding Tiles for Way finding Station Entry symbols for all users
Dedicated parking provision for station are key factors in determining success of a
Metro system. Parking provisions along pedestrian facilities like footpath and feeder
systems would encourage more commuters to use the transit system who could
safely park their vehicles at the nearest station, walk to the station or rely on feeder
connectivity. The tentative station wise parking facility area for personal vehicles
and bicycle as planned along corridor is presented in Table 6.4.
Various modes of transportation like feeder buses, auto rickshaw/taxi and bicycles
can provide first mile as well as last mile connectivity other than walking to the
station. For catchment area of about 0.5-1 km from the proposed network,
commuter can easily access it by walk. People residing in the next 1 km can reach
the station by cycles, 2-Wheeler and auto-rickshaws. Areas beyond the 2-km
catchment will require regular feeder bus services to reach the metro station.
Adequate arrangements have been provided for receiving and dispatch of PT/ IPT at
all stations. Parking for these stations have been already located in the Alignment
Plan.
7. INTERMODAL INTEGRATION
7.1 INTERMODAL INTEG RATION WITH EXISTING MODES
The concept of inter-modal integration with the modes is to provide last mile
connectivity to the commuters residing/working in the MRTS influence zone. The
MoHUA has also laid down policy guidelines to include this important aspect of last
mile connectivity in the DPRs for the MRTS systems. This connectivity is expected to
be achieved through proper access to the metro stations by city buses,
intermediate public transport (auto rickshaws and cycle rickshaws) and pedestrian
facilities etc.
The inter-modal integration with existing modes have been planned at MRTS
stations for efficient passenger movement. The proposals have been formulated for
facilitating traffic dispersal and circulation facilities based on the following
considerations:
• Designated space for embarking and disembarking for vehicular traffic (pick-
drop zones) and existing modes like Buses, IPTs and NMT have been
proposed.
• Proper design of circulation area has been planned to adjoin the station
building to ensure rapid/ efficient dispersal of the passengers and avoiding
conflicts between pedestrian and vehicular traffic.
Based on above, intermodal integration plans for selected metro stations of have
been prepared and presented in Annexure 7.1 to 7.5.
Various modes of transportation like feeder buses, auto rickshaw/taxi and bicycles
can provide first mile as well as last mile connectivity to the metro station. For
catchment area of about 0.5-1 km from the proposed network, commuter can
easily access it by walk. People residing in the next 1 km can reach the station by
cycles, 2-wheeler and cycle / auto-rickshaws. Areas beyond the 2-km catchment
will require feeder buses to reach metro station.
The feeder service facilities are proposed at metro stations to connect the trip
generation/ attraction areas in the influencing zones. Figure 7.1 shows the concept
of provision of feeder services to a MRTS system. The facilities of footpaths, feeder
buses and bicycles (bike sharing) have been planned for peak hour passenger
demand.
The feeder buses shall be of high quality, ultra-modern and customer oriented that
can deliver fast, comfortable and cost-effective urban mobility. Easy-to-board (low
floor), attractive and environmentally friendly mini buses with air conditioning
having capacity of 35 (seating + standing) (for minibuses) are proposed for feeder
system.
The facilities of feeder buses have been estimated for peak hours of various horizon
years 2025, 2035 and 2045. Boarding/alighting at metro stations have been used to
determine the bus fleet requirement. Boarding/alighting at metro stations in
various horizon years is given in chapter 3 of this report. Modal split of access
modes have been assumed to assess the bus fleet and bicycles requirement. The
assumed modal split is shown in Table 7.1. The feeder bus fleets requirement are
presented in Table 7.2. The total number of buses required are 72, 83 and 86 in the
year 2025, 2035 and 2045 respectively. The feeder route planning has been
identified at almost all stations as presented in Figure 7.2. Total 17 feeder routes
have been planned for Thane Metro corridor. The proposed feeder routes have
also been integrated with the nearby metro stations.
This service will be provided for the passengers for 1 km to 2 km of the Metro
stations influence area. A bicycle sharing system is the service in which bicycles are
made available for free and shared use to Metro passengers on a short-term basis.
The main purpose is to allow passengers to depart or arrive at Metro stations. The
requirement of bicycles along the Thane Metro corridor is estimated and is
presented in Table 7.3.
2 Raila Devi R1 Raila Devi To Sunapur Bus Stop Via Balrajeshwar Road, Mulund Coloney Road 6.5 5 5 5
R2 Raila Devi To Maha Nagar Palika Via Rd No. 12, Mahanagar Palika Road 3.0 2 2 2
Lokmanya Nagar
3
Bus Depot R1 Lokmanya Nagar Bus Depot To Central Maidan Via Acharya Atre Marg 4.0 5 6 5
R2 Lokmanya Nagar Bus Depot To Savarkarnanagar Via Vithal Mandir Marg 2.0 3 3 3
4 Gandhi Nagar R1 Gandhi Nagar To Kalwa Station Via Pohkaran Road No.2, Eastern Expressway, Chahu Bhiva Marg 2.2 2 3 2
R2 Gandhi Nagar To Divya Devi Nagar Via Dividaya Society Road Phase-1 3.0 3 3 3
6 Waterfront (TCS) R1 Waterfront (TCS) To Anand Bus Depot Via Forest Avenue Road 3.0 7 10 12
8 Balkum Naka R1 Balkum Naka To Bhiwandi Railway Station Via Balkum Road, SH 35 2.5 1 1 2
R2 Balkum Naka To Teen Haat Naka Via Old Agra Road, Eastern Expressway 3.7 1 1 2
9 Rabodi R1 Rabodito Reti Bunder Circle Via Kalwa Bridge, Mumabi Pune Road 4.0 6 6 6
R2 Rabodi To Willman Company 2.0 3 3 3
Thane Junction To Gavanpada Publuic Garden Via Maharaja Agrasen Chowk, Advani Chowk,
10
Thane Junction R1 Chikhladevi Road 3.5 6 6 7
R2 Thane Junction To Ambedkar Nagar Via Thane Belapur Road 5.0 9 9 9
TOTAL 72 83 86
In case of skywalks and subways, the following facilities are suggested for
differently abled and senior citizens:
Physical integration refers to the provision of jointly used transport facilities &
equipment to provide seamless mobility. Integration of physical space, network
planning and physical infrastructure have been planned to facilitate easy transfer of
commuters between MRTS, city bus system, feeder bus system, IPT, NMT and
private modes i.e. cars, two wheelers etc.
The basic principle behind fare integration is that one ticket provides access to all
modes of transport even when managed by different operators. Choice of fare
structure is a very important part of public transport planning. It directly influences
operators’ revenue. At its simplest, integration of fares, allows a person to make a
journey that involves transfers (within or between different transport modes) with
a single ticket that is valid for the complete journey, modes being buses, trains,
MRTS, taxis, parking, etc. The major benefits of fare integration are as follows:
Smartcard ticketing systems enable commuters to carry one durable card for use
on all transit modes. A single multipurpose ticket makes using multiple transport
modes much simpler and less time consuming. In turn, this facilitates the
multimodal travel behaviour that is encouraged by operators and transport
planners. In this regard, smartcard ticketing is proposed to facilitate a genuinely
seamless multimodal transport system for Thane city.
Creating the possibility to get information about the entire journey and not having
to enquire at different sources. To take an informed decision during travel, real-
time access to information is of strategic importance.
Information integration deals with the Information on routes, schedules, fares, and
transfer points for all transit modes and services throughout the urban area, which
City growth strategies are usually guided by documents like land use plans,
development plans and master plans etc. and the urban transport models are
determined by parameters like existing road network, public transport and its
related infrastructure, personal vehicles, licensing mechanism and authorities, land
ownership, fare structure of public transport, Intelligent Transport System (ITS)
mechanism, traffic enforcement agencies and traffic law enforcing mechanisms,
goods and freight movement and their operators, road safety and accident
management system etc. All these agencies which prepare these policy documents
and oversee governing these functions generally work independently and usually
there is no co-ordination between them. It is recommended that an umbrella
agency may be created to monitor and integrate these multiple bodies in order to
ensure smoother functioning of all aspects related to urban transport.
ANNEXURE 7.1. CONCEPTUAL TRAFFIC DISPERSAL AND MANAGEMENT PLAN OF WAGLE CIRCLE
ANNEXURE 7.4. CONCEPTUAL TRAFFIC DISPERSAL AND MANAGEMENT PLAN OF SHIVAJI CHOWK
ANNEXURE 7.5. CONCEPTUAL TRAFFIC DISPERSAL AND MANAGEMENT PLAN OF RAILA DEVI
Chapter – 8
TRAIN OPERATION PLAN
8. T R A I N O P E R A T I O N P L A N
8.1 SYSTEM OPERATION APPROACH
Train operation plan for proposed New Thane to New Thane(Ring Corridor) via
Dongripada & Thane Junction has been envisaged based on the ridership
assessment/ data. The design peak hour peak direction traffic (PHPDT) is 28000.The
selected system should have high reliability and adequate capacity to carry required
number of passengers to meet peak hour peak direction trips (PHPDT) demand. The
underlying operation philosophy is to provide Mass Rapid Transit Services at
economical cost with fixed Infrastructure and Rolling Stock planning.
• The frequency of Train services shall be optimized to provide sectional
capacity commensurate with the peak direction traffic demand during peak
hours.
• A minimum train service frequency shall be provided during lean period so as
to keep the option of this service attractive during lean period as well.
• Basic unit selected is two motor car and one trailer car.
The train operation plan for the proposed corridor will be based on the following
salient features:
• Running of services for 16 hours of a day (6:00 hrs to 22:00 hrs) with a station
dwell time of 20-30 seconds.
Design Peak hour peak direction traffic demands (PHPDT) for the purpose of
planning of services on the proposed corridor for years 2029, 2035, 2045 and 2051
are indicated below in Table 8.1.
TABLE 8.1: YEAR WISE DESIGN PEAK HOUR PEAK DIRECTION TRAFFIC (PHPDT)
2029 2035 2045 2051
17000 21000 26000 28000
Based on the travel demand assessment as indicated in the table above, the train
operation plan for the corridor has been formulated.
To meet the above projected traffic demand, the train operation plan has been
formulated considering the Rolling stock of 2.9 m wide coaches. The train
composition, capacity and headway required for the operation in the proposed
corridor of Thane Metro is given below:
i. Composition
The car composition to be adopted for Thane MRTS is given below-
Every coach shall be fully interchangeable with any other coach of same type.
ii. Capacity
For the purpose of calculating rake requirement of rolling stock, passenger carrying
capacity is considered as below in Table 8.2.
iii. Headway
To meet the above projected traffic demand, the possibility of running trains with 6
car rake composition at different headways has been examined. The traffic capacity
and demand have been matched by suitable regulation of headways.
The infrastructure and the train operation plan for the corridor are proposed to be
designed for 6 car rake composition.
Based on above, the headway and capacity provided for Thane metro corridor for
the various horizon years is as below in Table 8.3.
The train operation plan is formulated such that the traffic demand for majority of
the sections of the corridor is met with the passenger loading@6 passengers/m2.
However, in the sections where the planned capacity is less than the section load,
capacity can be met by carrying standees @ 8 passengers/ m2 or higher which have
been deliberatively planned for peak hour train operation for optimum utilization of
Rolling stock
Train operation for the different horizon years for New Thane to New Thane(Ring
Corridor)via Dongripada & Thane Junction has been formulated such that there is
optimum utilization of the rolling stock and the empty running of trains is reduced.
• Year 2029
Train operation plan for the corridor in year 2029 is planned with 3 & 6 car rake
composition and 212 seconds headway during peak period. The planned peak hour
peak direction traffic (PHPDT) capacity is 17038@ 6 passengers/m2 of standee area
15000
10000
5000
• Year 2035
Train operation plan for the corridor in year 2035 is planned with both 3 & 6 car rake
composition and 225 seconds headway during peak period. The planned peak hour
peak direction traffic (PHPDT) capacity is 21134@ 6 passengers/m 2 of standee area
(Capacity of 26887@ 8 passengers/m2 of standee area under dense loading
conditions). The demand and capacity for the year 2035 is shown in Figure 8.2
below.
30000
25000
20000
15000
10000
5000
• Year 2045
Train operation plan for the corridor in year 2045 is planned with 3 & 6 car rake
composition and 200 seconds headway during peak period. The planned peak hour
peak direction traffic (PHPDT) capacity is 25902@ 6 passengers/m 2 of standee area
(Capacity of 32949@ 8 passengers/m2 of standee area under dense loading
conditions). The demand and capacity for the year 2045 is shown in Figure 8.3
below.
25000
20000
15000
10000
5000
• Year 2051
Train operation plan for the corridor in year 2051 is planned with 6 car rake
composition and 200 seconds headway during peak period. The planned peak hour
peak direction traffic (PHPDT) capacity is 28332@6 passengers/m2 of standee area
(Capacity of 36036@ 8 passengers/m2 of standee area under dense loading
conditions).The demand and capacity for the year 2051 is shown in Figure 8.4 below.
30000
25000
20000
15000
10000
5000
The services for Thane Metro rail shall be operational for 16 hours of a day (6:00 hrs
to 22:00 hrs). No services are proposed between 22:00 hrs. to 6:00 hrs. which are
reserved for maintenance of infrastructure and rolling stock.
The frequency of train operation during the peak hours is presented in Table 8.3. It is
expected that the traffic demand during other time of the day i.e. off peak hours will
be less. Thus, less number of trains/hr are planned for operation during lean hours.
The hourly distribution of daily train operation between New Thane to Thane
Junction for various horizon years is enclosed in Annexure 8.1.
(i) Coach requirement has been calculated based on headway during peak
hours.
(iv) The calculated number of rakes in fraction is rounded off to next higher
number.
(v) Traffic reserve is taken as 5% to cater to failure of train on line and to make
up for operational time lost.
(vi) Repair and maintenance has been estimated as 10% of total requirement
(Bare+Traffic Reserve).
Based on above assumptions and train operation plan, the rake requirement for the
time horizon 2027~2051 are indicated below in Table 8.4.
Based on the above planning and assuming 340 days service in a year (after
considering maintenance period) Vehicle Kilometers have been estimated. Vehicle
Kilometers for the proposed train operation for years 2027, 2035, 2045 and 2051 is
given below in Tables 8.5.
Annexure-8.1
HOURLY TRAIN OPERATION PLAN FOR NEW THANE TO NEW THANE( RING CORRIDOR)
Year 2029 (3 & 6 Car) Year 2035 (3 & 6 Car) Year 2045 (3 & 6 Car ) Year 2051 ( 6 Car )
Time Headway Headway Headway Headway
Trains/hr Trains/hr Trains/hr Trains/hr
of Day (min) (min) (min) (min)
3 6 3 6 3 6
6 Car
Car Car Car Car Car Car
6 to 7 6.0 8.0 2.0 6.0 3.0 7.0 6.0 3.0 7.0 5.0 12.0
7 to 8 5.0 10.0 2.0 4.6 4.0 9.0 4.3 3.0 11.0 3.8 16.0
8 to 9 3.8 12.0 4.0 3.8 5.0 11.0 3.3 3.0 15.0 3.3 18.0
9 to
10 3.8 12.0 4.0 3.8 5.0 11.0 3.3 3.0 15.0 3.3 18.0
10 to
11 4.0 11.0 4.0 4.0 5.0 10.0 3.5 2.0 15.0 3.3 18.0
11
to12 4.0 11.0 4.0 4.0 5.0 10.0 3.8 2.0 14.0 3.8 16.0
12 to
13 4.6 10.0 3.0 4.6 4.0 9.0 4.3 2.0 12.0 3.8 16.0
13 to
14 4.6 10.0 3.0 4.6 4.0 9.0 4.3 2.0 12.0 4.0 15.0
14 to
15 4.6 10.0 3.0 4.6 4.0 9.0 4.6 2.0 11.0 4.0 15.0
15 to 3.0
16 4.0 11.0 4.0 4.0 5.0 10.0 4.0 12.0 3.8 16.0
16 to
17 4.0 11.0 4.0 4.0 5.0 10.0 4.0 3.0 12.0 3.8 16.0
17 to
18 3.8 12.0 4.0 3.8 5.0 11.0 3.3 3.0 15.0 3.3 18.0
18 to
19 3.8 12.0 4.0 3.8 5.0 11.0 3.3 3.0 15.0 3.3 18.0
19 to
20 4.0 12.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 10.0 3.5 3.0 14.0 3.3 18.0
20 to 2.0
21 5.0 10.0 2.0 4.6 4.0 9.0 4.3 12.0 4.0 15.0
21 to
22 6.0 9.0 1.0 6.0 3.0 7.0 5.0 2.0 10.0 5.0 12.0
Total No. of Train-
Trips per day in
171 51 71 153 41 202 257
either direction
• Automatic Signaling
• ETCS Level – 1
• ETCS Level – 2
• Distance to Go (DTG)
• Communication Based Train Control (CBTC)
While system at S.No. (i) – (iii) have been developed / used for Main Line Railway
networks, system at S.No. (iv) – (v) are for Metro Railway Networks. Therefore, to
have a fair idea of the Signaling & Train Control system for metro railway, the
relative merits & limitations of Distance to Go (DTG) and Communication based
train control system (CBTC) are discussed as below:
With the advent of Communication Based Train Control (CBTC) at almost same
costs, metro transport authorities / organizations are now favoring adoption of
CBTC over DTG based Signaling System for all new projects. World over, for new
MRTS projects, while adoption of DTG based system is on a decline , adoption of
CBTC based system, because of their advanced features and low life cycle costs ,
are increasing steadily. In conclusion while DTG based System can be considered
technology of the past, CBTC based system can be considered technology for the
present & future.
Considering the high cost of Distance to Go (DTG) Signaling system and advent of
new technology viz. Communication Based Train Control (CBTC), which supports
advance features such as Unattended Train Operation, moving block etc. and is
available at almost same cost, Distance to Go (DTG) Signaling system is NOT
recommended for Thane MRTS.
Communication based Train Control (CBTC) Signaling System also has ATP,
ATS,ATO/UTO functionality and works on the Moving or Virtual Block principle to
reduce headways and increase transport capacity. CBTC relies on continuous two-
way digital communication between each controlled train and a wayside control
centre. On a moving block equipped railway, the line is usually divided into areas
or regions, each area under the control of a computer and each with its own radio
transmission system. Each train transmits its identity, location, direction and speed
to the area computer which makes the necessary calculations for safe train
separation (moving authority) and transmits this to the following train.
The radio link between each train and the area computer is continuous so the
computer knows location of all the trains in its area all the time. It transmits to
each train the location of the train in front and gives it a braking curve to enable it
As the CBTC based system has very few way side equipment and supports UTO,
total life cycle cost of the system shall be substantially lower than other Signaling
System due to low Maintenance & Operation (man power) costs.
After reviewing all available Signaling & Train Control Signaling Technologies,
Communication based Train Control (CBTC) system, which is the latest technology
available, is recommended for Thane MRTS.
OCC operations shall facilitate the safe, secure and reliable operation of planned
passenger services and management of unplanned events. The OCC shall be the
primary control centre having a backup control centre (BCC) to take over the
operation if the OCC is to be evacuated due to unforeseen situation.
The key functions of the OCC shall be, but not limited to, as under:
9.1.6 Standards
Table 9.1 shows the standards that will be adopted.
Description Standards
ATS Automatic Train Supervision System, movement of all trains to
be logged on to a central computer and displayed on
workstations in operation control centre (OCC) and at SCR.
Remote control of stations from the OCC as well as local
control from the interlocked stations. ATS/ATO will conform to
SIL2 level of CENELEC standards EN 50126, EN 50128 and EN
50129.
Immunity to External All data transmission on Optical Fiber Cables/Radio. All
Interference. signaling cables will be separated from power cables. CENELEC
standards EN50121-2&4 and EN50082-2 and EN 50081-2 as
applicable for EMI/EMC.
Fail Safe Principles SIL4 safety levels as per CENELEC standard for signal
application.
Fall back system Digital Axle Counter
Other Items Suitable International Standards like CENELEC etc. shall be
followed as per good industry practices.
Maintenance Philosophy of continuous monitoring of system status and
philosophy preventive &corrective maintenance of signaling equipment
shall be followed. Card / module / sub-system level
replacement shall be done in the field and repairs under taken
in the central laboratory/manufacturer’s premises.
9.2.1 Introduction
The telecommunication system acts as communication backbone for Signaling and
other system and provides telecommunication services to meet operational and
administrative requirements of metro network.
The IP network shall consist of highly reliable and fault tolerant Layer-2, Layer-3
and Access switches configured with due redundancy both at Back bone and
Access levels for the MAN/LAN. The switches shall have IP interface cards of 10
GBPS for backbone, 1 GBPS for interface with all telecommunication and non-
telecommunication sub-system and 2 MBPS and higher levels for access level. All
interfaces with other sub system shall be IP based with minimum 2 MBPS capacity.
Telephone Exchange
A cost effective solution of an IP PBX having at least 50 IP extensions will be
provided at each station and 500 IP extensions PBX will be provided at the central,
intermediate location on corridor and depot. The Exchanges will serve the
subscribers at all the stations, OCC and depot. It shall also caters 02 emergency
telephones on each platform for the use of passengers to contact SCR/OCC in case
of emergency. Capacity of Exchanges can be suitably augmented, if required ,
depending on available subscribers. The exchanges will be interconnected at
multiple IP interfaces (2 MBPS) through redundant optical fiber cable paths.
The frequency band for operation of the system i.e 410-430 or 380-400 MHz may
be taken as per availability. The system shall provide mobile radio communication
between the motorman of the moving cars from any place and the Central Control.
The motorman can also contact any station in the network through the central
control, besides intimating the approaching trains about any emergency like
accident, fire, line blocked etc., thus improving safety performance.
FIGURE 9.1: TRAIN CAB RADIO AND COMM. FACILITY FOR MAINTENANCE
To provide adequate coverage, based on the RF site survey to be carried out during
detailed Design stage, base stations for the system will be located at sites
emergency situations. Event reloading shall be possible for post video analysis.
CCTV cameras shall also be provided in Operational rooms like OCC, SCR etc. A
proper IP based recording and storing facility to record and store events for
minimum of one month shall be ensured.
The standards that will be adopted with regard to the Telecommunication system
is shown in Table 9.3. These will conform to appropriate IRS/International
standards.
Platform Screen Doors (PSD) are mainly provided at the metro stations to ensure
safety and comfort of passengers. The principle advantages of Platform Screen
Doors are:
i) It prevents accidental falls off the platform onto the lower track
area, suicide attempts and homicides by pushing.
ii) It prevents or reduce wind felt by the passengers caused by the piston
effect which could in some circumstances make people fall over.
iii) It reduces the risk of accidents, especially from service trains passing through
the station at high speeds.
iv) It improves climate control within the station especially underground stations
(heating, ventilation, and air conditioning are more effective when the station
is physically isolated from the tunnel).
v) It improves security - access to the tracks and tunnels is restricted.
vi) It lowers operating costs- eliminate the need
for motormen or conductors when used in conjunction with Unattended Train
Operation (UTO).
vii) It prevents litter build up on the track, which can be a fire risk.
viii) It improves the sound quality of platform announcements, as background
noise from the tunnels and trains that are entering or exiting is reduced.
There are some disadvantages of Platform Screen Doors, which are indicated
below:
i) Primary disadvantage is their cost; installing a system typically costs approx.
INR 3Crores per platform.
ii) When used to retrofit older systems, they limit the kind of rolling stock that
may be used on a line, as train doors must have exactly the same spacing as
the platform doors;
iii) Maintenance facilities in the depot are required to be augmented for
maintenance of platform screen doors also.
Since the advantages far outweigh the disadvantages, Platform Screen Doors
(PSD) are proposed to be provided at all the stations of Thane Metro to ensure
safety & comfort of commuters. The broad outline/details of Platform Screen
Doors (PSD) is described hereunder:
Mass Rapid Transit System handles large number of passengers. Ticket issue and fare
collection play a vital role in the efficient and proper operation of the system. To
achieve this objective, ticketing system shall be simple, easy to use/operate, easy on
accounting facilities, capable of issuing single/multiple journey tickets, amenable for
quick fare changes and require overall lesser manpower. Automatic fare collection
system meets these requirements. Fare collection technology development is as
shown in Figure 10.1.
The equipments for the same may be provided at each station viz. Automatic Fare
Gates, Ticket Office Machines, Ticket Readers, Hand held device, Central and Station
Computers, Passenger Operated Machines/Ticket Vending Machines (POMs/TVMs)
and UPS.
The AFC System Central Computer (CC) has a capacity to cater for upto 256 stations.
The AFC system shall also have functionality of interface to CCHS (Central Clearing
House System) which is capable of handling upto 32 operators and 10 million
transactions with provision of integration with other transit (metro, bus etc) and
non-transit (parking, toll etc) which may be planned in future in line with the state /
national policy.
An EMV (Europay, Maser and Visa) a global standard is a credit or debit card with an
embedded microchip designed to enable secure payment at compatible point of sale
(POS) terminals. EMV cards can also support contactless payment through near-field
communication (NFC) wireless connectivity. Transit Operator hires one or multiple
financial institutions to issue a prepaid EMV enabled travel card to its
commuters.The EMV based smart cards can be accepted within network of transit
operator’s terminals.
The transit operators fare acceptance terminals would need EMV enabled card
readers. The same card can be used on network of other payment methods at any
merchant outlet. Model is convenient for a commuter as Transit Card and acts as an
eWallet that can be used for all payment needs as single media. The EMV model also
aids commuters to gain loyalty points for usage of cards on transit or non-transit
network. The EMV based system is showm in Figure 10.2
The standard equipment proposed for AFC system are given in the Table 10.1.
Equipment Description
Fare media Fare Media shall be EMV based NCMC card, QR, RFID paper tickets
and NFC.
Gates Computer controlled automatic gates at entry and exit. There will
be following types of gates:
Entry
Exit
Reversible – can be set to entry or exit
Differently abled – Wide reversible gate for differently abled people.
Station computer, All the fare collection equipments will be connected in a local area
Central computer network with a station server controlling the activities of all the
and AFC Net work machines. These station servers will be linked to the central
computer situated in the operational control centre through the
optic fiber communication channels. The centralized control of the
system shall provide real time data of earnings, passenger flow
analysis, blacklisting of specified cards etc.
Ticket office Manned Ticket office machine may be installed in the stations for
machine (TOM/EFO) issuing EMV CSC, QR based paper tickets, recharge to EMV CSC and
validation.
Ticket reader Ticket readers are standalone devices for checking the fare media
details.
Hand held device Hand held devices are electronic ticketing machines and shall be
deployed for checking, validating and issuing the fare media to the
commuters.
Ticket Vending Ticket Vending Machines (TVMs) shall be a kiosk where a
Machine (TVM) commuter can purchase QR based paper tickets and Add
value/products to EMV CSC. These are located in the unpaid area of
the stations.
Mobile Application The AFC Provider shall be responsible for developing a mobile
feature application that shall be integrated with AFC system for the purpose
of ticketing. Mobile Application that shall be developed by AFC
Provider on to offer mobile ticketing services. As part of mobile
platform, it should offer various value added services to its
commuters like e- Commerce tie-ups, taxi sharing etc.
UPS (uninterrupted
power at stations as Common UPS of S&T system will be utilized.
well as for OCC).
11. R O L L I N G S T O C K
11.1 SELECTION OF TECHNOLOGY
The transport demand forecast for the corridor is the governing factor for the choice
of physical parameters of the Rolling Stock viz. capacity, dimensions etc. Keeping in
view, the traffic demand of the city, 2.9m wide coaches have been selected for
adoption in Thane Metro corridor. State of the art proven technology has been
proposed for rolling stock of Thane Metro corridor.
The low life cycle cost is achieved by the way of reduced scheduled and unscheduled
maintenance and high reliability of the sub-systems.
11.1.1 The selection of following technologies is proposed to ensure low life cycle cost.
(ii) Bogies
Bolster less light weight bogies with rubber springs are now universally adopted in
metro cars. These bogies require less maintenance and overhaul interval is also of
the order of 4,20,000 km. The use of air spring at secondary stage may be considered
with a view to keep the floor level of the cars constant irrespective of passenger
loading unlike those with coil spring. A smooth curving performance with better ride
index will be ensured by provision of above type of bogies.
The regenerative braking will be the main brake power of the train and will regain
the maximum possible energy and pump it back to the system and thus fully utilize
the advantage of 3 phase technology. The regenerative braking should have air
supplement control to bear the load of trailer car.
The brush less 3 phase induction motors have now replaced the D.C. series motors in
traction applications. The induction motor, for the same power output, is smaller in
size and lighter in weight and ideally suited for rail based Mass Rapid Transit
applications. The motor tractive effort and speed is regulated by ‘Variable Voltage
and Variable Frequency’ control and can be programmed to suit the track profile and
operating requirements. Another advantage of 3 phase A.C. drive and VVVF control
is that regenerative braking can be introduced by lowering the frequency and the
voltage to reverse the power flow and to allow braking to very low speed.
For Thane Mass Rapid Transit System, three phase AC traction drive with VVVF
control is recommended for adoption.
b) Coach Dimensions
The following broad parameters for coach dimensions are proposed to be chosen for
Thane MRTS corridor as mentioned in Table 11.2.
The train composition is proposed as 3-Car & 6 - Car Train.The carrying capacity of
Metro Rail Vehicle is indicated in Table 11.3.
Driving Motor
Trailer Car (TC)/
Car 3 Car Train 6 Car Train
Motor Car (MC)
Description (DMC)
Dense Dense Dense Dense
NormalCrush NormalCrush NormalCrush Normal Crush
Crush Crush Crush Crush
Seated 43 43 43 50 50 50 136 136 136 286 286 286
Standing 102 204 272 110 220 293 314 628 837 644 1288 1716
Total 145 247 315 160 270 343 450 764 973 930 1574 2002
Normal - 3 Per/ Sqm of standee area, Crush- 6 Per/ Sqm of standee area, Dense Crush – 8
Per/ Sqm of standee area.
d) Weight
The weights of motor cars and trailers are estimated in Table 11.4, considering the
average passenger weight as 65 kg.
The axle load @6 persons/ m2 of standees works out in the range of 14.01T to 14.39T
per coach. Heavy rush of passengers with loading @8 standees per sq. meter can be
experienced occasionally during peak hours. It is recommended to design the
coaches with sufficient strength so that even with this overload, the design will not
result in over stresses in the coach. Coach and bogie should therefore be designed
for 16 T axle load.
e) Performance Parameters
To achieve the desired schedule speed and running time between stations, the
following values of acceleration and deceleration are recommended in consideration
of riding comfort, adhesion and requirement of makeup time.
Velocity
-1.1m/s2
2
1.0m/s
Rolling Stock requirement for different horizon years has been calculated based on
the train operation plan. The calculation for the rake requirement of the corridor for
different horizon years has been given in Train Operation Plan. The coach
requirement for the corridor of Thane Metro is given in Table 11.5:
12. P O W E R S U P P L Y S Y S T E M
12.1 CHOICE OF ELECTRIC TRACTION SYSTEM
Traditionally, electric traction has been used to meet the requirement of high
acceleration, pollution free services and to achieve the optimum performance in
urban, Sub-urban and main line rail transport system. Selection of an appropriate
technology for traction system may be based on following factors:
The Cost of traction power system depends upon the following factors:
There are three standard and proven systems of electric traction for use in
suburban and metro lines:
• 25 KV AC system
• 1500 V DC Third Rail/ Overhead Catenary System
• 750 V DC Third Rail System
12.1.1 25 KV AC System
25 KV AC traction system has been adopted
by Delhi, Jaipur, Chennai and Hyderabad
metro rail corporations as well as Indian
Railways. The system has the potential to
carry large traffic (60,000-100,000) PHPDT
and possibility of linking to mainline
railways, if required.
Unlike DC traction this system does not require substations at frequent intervals
due to high voltage, reduced current levels and lower voltage drops, as a result,
there is substantial reduction in costs. Overall cost of land and equipment’s for
25kV ac traction system is significantly lower compared to that for 1500V dc or
750V dc traction system. In addition, it is widely used traction system on Indian
Railways with availability of proven indigenous technology for all the components
of 25 kV ac systems.
The 1500V DC third rail system has been adopted in Chinese Metros by Guangzhou
Metro and Shenzhen Metro during last decade from aesthetics and reliability
considerations. It can meet higher traffic needs with 5.4m tunnel diameter. There
is not much experience over use of 1500V DC third rail system and also it has major
constraints on requirement of power block for any kind of attention to track,
signaling, other equipment and side evacuation.
In India Kolkata, Kochi and Bangalore Metro have 750V DC traction system
introduced in 1984 and 2011 respectively. Kolkata Metro was built with the
primitive technologies i.e. use of Steel third rail with top contact, non-air
conditioned rakes with tunnel air conditioning and non-regeneration. Bangalore
Metro is using the advanced technology with Al composite third rail, air
conditioned coaches and VVVF control of traction motor with regenerative braking.
750 V DC third rail system offers the best aesthetic solution because of the
absence of any overhead conductors and supporting structures. The 750V DC third
rail needs very little maintenance since by virtue of its solid rigid design it is able to
withstand passing of current collector devices of the train without any significant
wear & tear. However, maintenance of substation costs more as they are more in
numbers.
Because of lower voltage, the 750V DC traction power system handles much higher
operating current resulting into higher voltage drop and line losses along the third
rail distribution system. This necessitates closer spacing of sub-stations, leading to
higher cost of construction. The presence of live third rail at ground may be
hazardous to safety of commuters and maintenance personnel if they fail to adopt
safety precautions.
In a third rail system, where the running rails are used as a return path, a part of
the stray current leaks into the track structure. This current is called Stray current.
The stray current corrosion is often encountered in dc-electrified systems and
therefore, suitable measures are required for protection against corrosion of
metallic components in the track-structures as well as metallic reinforcement and
metal pipes etc in the vicinity of metro alignment. The civil structure should be
compatible with 750V DC third rail system in view of mitigation of stray current.
The elevated and at grade sections of the corridor will be provided with flexible
OHE (Overhead Equipment) whereas the underground sections will be provided
with the rigid overhead catenary system.
Electricity is required for operation of Metro system for running of trains, station
services (e.g. lighting, lifts, escalators, signaling & telecom, fire fighting etc) and
workshops, depots & other maintenance infrastructure within premises of metro
system. The power requirements of a metro system are determined by peak-hour
demands of power for traction and auxiliary applications.
The power supply system is proposed to be designed for 28000 PHPDT (peak hour
peak direction trips) for New Thane to Thane Junction (Ring Corridor).
The Power supply system design has been conceptualized considering 6 car rake
composition and train operation at 200 seconds headway. The designed system
shall ensure high reliability and adequacy of the system to meet unforeseen
growth in traffic demand.
The ultimate (design) power requirement for this corridor will be conceptualized
considering following norms, directives/ guidelines:
• Train operation with 6 car rakes with carrying capacity of 1574 passengers
(standing @ 6 passengers/ m²).
• Peak period headway of 200 seconds.
• Specific energy consumption of rolling stock – 75 KWh/ 1000 GTKM
• Regeneration @ 30%
• At grade/ Elev. station load – initially 200 kW, ultimate design 300 kW
• Underground station load – initially 2000 kW, ultimate design 2500 kW
Keeping in view of the above norms, power demand estimation for the proposed
corridor of Thane Metro is given in Table 12.1.
Load Year
2029 2035 2045 2051
Traction 14.95 18.32 22.50 24.66
Auxiliary 11.08 11.08 12.10 13.13
Total 26.03 29.40 34.60 37.78
The calculations for the traction and auxiliary power demand estimation are shown in
Annexure 12.1. However, this requirement has been worked out based on the conceptual
design and therefore, needs to be reaffirmed and fine-tuned by conducting necessary
simulation study during detailed design stage of project implementation.
In order to ensure high reliability of power supply, feed from more than one RSS
have been planned for the proposed corridor. Under normal circumstances, each
RSS will feed specific sections of the corridor. In case of emergency condition i.e.
when one RSS fails, the other RSS will feed the section of the RSS under outage.
Therefore, it is essential that all the sources of supply and connected transmission
& distribution networks are reliable and have adequate built in redundancies.
The HT power supply from grid substations at 220kV will be stepped down to 25kV
single phase supply for traction purpose and 33kV supply for auxiliary power
supply at the Receiving cum Traction Substations (RSS/ TSSs) of MRTS authority.
The traction power will be fed to 25kV OHE system through cable feeders and the
auxiliary power will be distributed along the alignment through 33kV Ring main
cable network for feeding auxiliary loads. These cables will be laid in dedicated
ducts/ cable brackets along the viaduct/ tunnel.
The entire power supply system & auxiliary power supply system will be monitored
and controlled from a centralized Operation Control Center (OCC) using a SCADA
system.
In normal conditions, RSS 1 will feed the section from New Thane to Waghbil and
RSS 2 will feed from Waghbil to Thane Junction including Depot. In case RSS 1 fails,
the feed can be extended from RSS 2 and vice-versa. Thus in case of failure of one
RSS, single RSS will feed the complete length of the corridor.
The equipment rating of the RSS cum TSS will be determined considering the
normal as well as emergency situation. When one RSS fails, the traction & auxiliary
supply will be maintained by extending feed from adjoining RSS. However, in case
of total grid failure, all trains may come to a halt but emergency lighting, fire,
hydraulics and other essential services can be catered to by stand-by UPS/ DG sets.
Therefore, while the proposed scheme is expected to ensure adequate reliability, it
would cater to emergency situations as well.
33kV and 25kV switchgear shall be rated for 1250 A being standard design. 33kV
XLPE insulated FRLS cable ring network is proposed for Auxiliary ring main network,
which shall be adequately rated to transfer requisite auxiliary power during normal
as well as emergency situations. Adequate no. of cables is also required for
transfer of traction power from Metro’s RSS to nearest feeding point of 25kV OCS.
The rating of major equipments have been worked out based on the conceptual
design and therefore, these capacities needs to be reaffirmed and fine tuned by
conducting necessary simulation study during detailed design stage of project
implementation.
• Contact wire height = 4324mm (with Panto locked down height of4048mm)
• Structure to Live parts clearances = 270/170/150mm (Static/Dynamic/Abs. min
dynamic)
• Vehicle to Live parts clearances = 290/190/150mm (Static/Dynamic/Absolute/ min
dynamic)
12.4.2 25 KV flexible Overhead Equipment System ( For Elevated section & Depot)
25 kV ac Flexible Overhead equipment system shall comprise 150 sq mm HD-
copper contact wire and 65sqmm Cd-copper catenary wire. Return conductor (RC)
shall be All Aluminum Conductor (AAC) of 233 sq mm cross section. From safety
considerations, Hydraulic type Auto-Tensioning Device (ATDs) are proposed on
mainlines which does not require use of balance weight for tensioning of OHE
conductors. Proven catenary fittings are proposed similar to DMRC system.
Each elevated station shall be provided with an Auxiliary Substation with two
33kV/415V, 3-phase, 500 kVA dry type cast resin transformers and the associated
HT & LT switchgear. In addition, provision shall be made for one DG set at each
station for emergency loads. Two transformers (33kV/415V, 3-phase) of 2500 kVA
at each underground ASS for the underground stations are proposed to be installed
(one transformer as standby). Apart from stations, separate ASS is required at each
depot with 2x2000 kVA auxiliary transformers to cater to depot cum workshop
load.
a) LT Power Distribution
33 kV ring main cables running all along the route shall feed each ASS by loop in
loop out arrangement. The 33 kV power supply is stepped down to 415 V, 3 phase
for distribution to the consumption points (service utilities) viz. Elevators,
Escalators, Light & power sockets, Fire system, HVAC system and Signal & Telecom
system etc.
The power distribution system shall be designed by using low voltage power cable
run on the cable tray, raceway and conduit as suitable to supply power to various
loads within station and buildings. The low voltage power distribution cables shall
comply with IEC 60502 or other applicable international standard. Fire resistant
cables shall be used for safety purpose and comply with the performance
requirements of IEC 60331 and BS 6387.
b) Illumination System
For Illumination generally, all lighting fixtures shall be applied with 240V, single
phase 50Hz power supply. The type and quality of fittings and their luminous
intensity shall relate to the space being illuminated and will take into account the
effect of architectural space concept and colour scheme as per IS 3646.
The LED lights offer advantages over conventional fluorescent lighting on account
of Energy savings, lower life cycle cost, longer life span, rugged nature etc.
Considering the benefits of LED light fixtures over the conventional/ fluorescent
fixtures, the use of LED light fixtures is recommended at elevated and underground
stations of the corridor and the office buildings of the depot. However, the
conventional fluorescent light fittings may be adopted at selected locations
wherever payback period for additional cost of LED light is much higher or non-
availability of efficient and proven LED light fixtures such as Medium/ High Bay
lighting of high wattage (250W – 400W) in depot.
x. Rolling Shutters,
xi. Networking of main fire alarm system, at station to the station control room,
and backnet Interface on TCP/IP for third party systems.
xii. Systems not listed above but that requires interfacing with the Main Fire
Alarm System.
e) Fire suppression
Portable Fire Extinguishers
The portable fire extinguishers shall be installed at all the stations in compliance
NFPA standards.
• Lift operation
• Essential lighting
• Signalling & telecommunications
• Firefighting system
• Fare Collection system
Silent type of DG sets, which have low noise levels and do not require separate
room for installation, are proposed. In addition, UPS with adequate power backup
may be installed for the very essential lighting load.
The entire system of power supply (receiving, traction & auxiliary supply) shall be
monitored and controlled from a centralized Operation Control Centre (OCC)
through SCADA system. Modern SCADA system with intelligent remote terminal
units (RTUs) shall be provided. Optical fibre cables provided for
telecommunications will be used as communication carrier for SCADA system. The
SCADA system is presented in Figure 12.3.
25kV ac traction currents produce alternating magnetic fields that cause induced
voltages in any conductor running along the track. Booster Transformer and
Return Conductor (BT/RC) system is proposed for EMI mitigation.
Earthing & Bonding of the power supply & traction system shall be designed in
accordance with the latest standards EN50122-1, IEEE80, IS3043 etc. Two earth
conductors – Overhead Protection Cable (OPC) and Buried Earth Conductor (BEC)
are proposed to be laid along with track. All the concrete and metallic structures,
structural reinforcement, running rails etc. will be connected to these conductors
to form an equipotential surface & a least resistance path to the fault currents.
The overhead protection cable will also provide protection against lightning to the
25kV OHE on the section. Similar arrangements have been adopted on Delhi Metro
as well.
12.8.1 Introduction
The solar mission, which is part of the National Action Plan on Climate Change has
been set up by Govt. of India to promote the development and use of solar energy
for power generation and other uses with the ultimate objective of making solar
energy competitive with fossil-based energy options.
Considering the futuristic technology and potential for solar power generation,
Delhi Metro has recently implemented roof top grid connected solar power
systems at selected locations of elevated stations and maintenance depot. Metro
Railways under implementation in different cities of the country viz. Jaipur,
Lucknow, Nagpur etc. are also exploring the possibilities of harnessing solar
photovoltaic energy.
With the downward trend in the cost of harnessing solar energy and appreciation
for the need for development of solar power, provision of a grid connected solar
photovoltaic power plant utilizing all possible areas viz. roof top of stations/ sheds
The average raw sunshine available which can be harnessed for the power
generation depends on the geometrical coordinates of the place. The intensity of
solar radiation varies with time of the day. The combined effect of these factors
and the additional complication of the wobble of the seasons is that the average
raw power of sunshine per square meter of south-facing roof in India is roughly
100 to 120W/m2.
The mean global solar radiant exposure at Thane varies from 3.7 kWh/ m2/ day in
the month of December to 6.6 kWh/ m2/ day in the month of May.
Based on the solar radiation intensity in the city of Thane, the peak solar power
generation of Thane Metro corridor is expected to be about 50 kWp for the
elevated stations and about 2000 kWp for maintenance depot.
The power generation depends upon various factors such as the intensity of the
solar radiation, the net useable area available on the roof top, the obstructions due
to shadow or the shading factor, the orientation of the solar panels, efficiency of
the solar cells etc. The solar power generation potential in Thane metro corridor is
required to be reviewed and finalized during detail design stage.
1) Modern rolling stock with 3-phase VVVF drive and lightweight stainless steel
coaches has been proposed, which has the benefits of low specific energy
consumption and almost unity power factor.
2) Rolling stock has regeneration features and it is expected that 20% of total
traction energy will be regenerated and fed back to 750 V dc third rail to be
consumed by nearby trains.
4) Machine-room less type lifts with gearless drive has been proposed with 3-
phase VVVF drive. These lifts are highly energy efficient.
6) The latest state of art and energy efficient electrical equipment (e.g.
transformers, motors, light fittings etc) has been incorporated in the system
design.
Annexure 12.1
The underground stations of the Corridor are generally built in a confined space.
A large number of passengers occupy concourse halls and the platforms,
especially at the peak hours. The platform and concourse areas have a limited
access from outside and do not have natural ventilation. It is therefore, essential
to provide forced ventilation in the stations and inside the tunnel for the purpose
of:
• Supplying fresh air for the physiological needs of passengers and the
authority’s staff;
• Removing body heat, obnoxious odours and harmful gases like carbon
dioxide exhaled during breathing;
• Preventing concentration of moisture generated by body sweat and seepage
of water in the sub-way;
• Removing large quantity of heat dissipated by the train equipment like
traction motors, braking units, compressors mounted below the under-frame,
lights and fans inside the coaches, A/c units etc.
• Removing vapour and fumes from the battery and heat emitted by light
fittings, water coolers, Escalators, Fare Gates, etc. working in the stations;
• Removing heat from air conditioning plant and sub-station and other
equipment, if provided inside the underground station.
The Indian Standards & Codes, which pertain to office-buildings, commercial centres
and other public utility buildings, have no guidelines on temperature standards to be
maintained for the underground mass rapid transit system as yet. The standards
used for buildings cannot be applied straightaway for the underground spaces,
because the patrons will stay for much shorter durations in these underground
stations.
The comfort of a person depends on rapidity of dissipation of his body heat, which in
turn depends on temperature, humidity and motion of air in contact with the body.
Body heat gets dissipated by the process of evaporation, convection and conduction.
Evaporation prevails at high temperature. Greater proportion of heat is dissipated by
evaporation from the skin, which gets promoted by low humidity of air. The
movement of air determines the rate of dissipation of body heat in the form of
sensible and latent heat.
There are different comfort indices recognized for this purpose. The ‘Effective
Temperature’ criterion was used in selecting the comfort conditions in the metro
system. In this criterion, comfort is defined as the function of temperature and the
air velocity experienced by a person. More recently a new index named RWI
(Relative Warmth Index) has been adopted for metro designs worldwide. This index
depends upon the transient conditions of the metabolic rate and is evaluated based
on the changes to the surrounding ambience of a person in a short period of about 6
to 8 minutes. It is assumed that during this period human body adjusts its metabolic
activities. Therefore, in a subway system where the train headway is expected to be
six minutes or less, RWI is the preferred criterion.
The temperature conditions of sub-soil play a vital role in the system design of the
underground stations. It is also expected that water table surrounding the
underground alignment is not very much below the surface level, thereby facilitating
adequate heat exchange between the tunnel structures and soil.
Thane has a tropical monsoon climate that borders on a tropical wet and dry climate.
Overall climate is equable with high rainfall days and very few days of extreme
temperatures.
Based on prevalent practices and ambient conditions of Thane, the following VAC
system design parameters are assumed to be provided for underground sections of
the proposed corridor of Thane Metro
From the experience of DMRC, for such conditions it can be concluded that with
open shaft system the piston effects can be sufficient to maintain acceptable
conditions inside the tunnel, as long as the ambient DB temperature is below 330C.
When the outside temperature is higher than 330C, the tunnel shafts should be
closed to prevent any further exchange of air with atmosphere. The station premises
(public areas) can be equipped with separate air-conditioning system during the
summer and monsoon months to provide acceptable environment for patrons.
There shall be provision of Trackway Exhaust System (TES) by which platform air can
be re-circulated. The train cars reject substantial heat inside subway. When the
trains dwell at the stations, TES would capture a large portion of heat released by the
train air-conditioners mounted on the roof tops and under gear heat because of
braking, before it is mixed with the platform environment. The TES includes both an
under platform exhaust (UPE) duct and an Over-trackway (OTE) exhaust duct. The
TES uses ducts formed in the under platform void and over the trackway. Exhaust
intakes are located to coincide with the train-borne heat sources.
The train heat generated inside the tunnel sections would be removed by the train
piston action. It is envisaged that for the design outside conditions, it may not be
necessary to provide forced ventilation using Tunnel Ventilations Fans for normal
operating conditions. The number of shafts required would be two or three
depending on the inter-station distances. The two shafts would be at the end of the
stations and the third shaft, if required, can be built at the mid-tunnel section. These
end-shafts at the stations also serve as Blast Relief Shafts, i.e. the piston pressure is
relieved to the atmosphere before the air-blast reaches the station. All these shafts
are connected to the tunnels through dampers. The dampers are kept open when
the exchange of air with the atmosphere is permitted (Open system). For the closed
system, the shaft dampers can be in closed mode and the displaced air is dumped in
the adjacent tunnel.
Generally, each tunnel ventilation shaft has a fan room in which there are two fully
reversible tunnel ventilation fans (TVF) are installed with isolation dampers. These
dampers are closed when the fan is not in operation. There is a bypass duct around
the fan room, which acts as a pressure relief shaft when open during normal
conditions, and enables the flow of air to bypass the TV fans, allowing air exchange
between tunnels with flows generated by train movements.
Dampers are also used to close the connections to tunnels and nozzles when under
different operating conditions. The details for the shaft sizes, airflow exchange with
the atmosphere, fan capacities can be estimated in more accurate manner with the
help of Computer Simulations during the detailed design stage.
Ancillary spaces such as staff room, equipment plant room, will be mechanically
ventilated or air conditioned in accordance with the desired air change rates and
temperatures/ humidity.
All ancillary areas that require 24-hour air conditioning will be provided with fan-coil
units (FCU) and standby AC units. During the revenue hours when the main chilled
water system is running the FCU will be used for air-conditioning and in non-revenue
hours standby AC units will be operated. Return air grilles will be fitted with
washable air filters for the re-circulation of the air.
Where fresh air is required it will be supplied to the indoor unit via a fresh air supply
system, complete with filter, common to a group of ancillary areas. The fresh air unit
will be located in the VAC plant room and will be time switch controlled with local
override. Temperature control will include an alarm setting, which is activated on
attaining high temperature.
These air conditioning system mix return air with a desired quantity of outside air.
The outside air requirement is based on occupancy, with a minimum of 5 litres per
second per person or 10% of circulated air volume, whichever is the greater. The
provision of free cooling by a simple two-position economizer control system will be
included, with the use of enthalpy sensors to determine the benefits of using return
air or outside air. This will signal the control system to operate dampers between
minimum and full fresh air, so as to minimize the enthalpy reduction needed to be
achieved by the cooling coil. This mixture of outside and return air is then filtered by
means of suitable filters and then cooled by a cooling coil before being distributed as
supply air via high level insulated ductwork to diffusers, discharging the air into the
serviced space in a controlled way to minimize draughts. Return air to the platform
areas is extracted via the track-way exhaust system and either returned to the AHU’s
or exhausted as required.
The station air conditioning closed system scheme and section view are shown in
Figure 13.2 and Figure 13.3.
The TVS is provided in a Subway system essentially to carry out the following
functions:
There are various operating modes (scenarios) for the Tunnel Ventilation system.
These are described as under:
Normal Conditions
Normal condition is when the trains are operating to timetable throughout the
system, at prescribed headways and dwell times, within given tolerances. The
primary source of ventilation during normal conditions is generated by the
movement of trains operating within the system and, in some cases, the trackway
exhaust system.
During summer and the monsoon seasons, the system will be functioning
essentially with the station air conditioning operating. The vent shafts to the
surface will enable the tunnel heat to be removed due to train movements. The
platform air captured by the trackway exhaust system shall be cooled and
recirculated in the station. For less severe (i.e. cool) environmental conditions (or
in the event of an AC system failure), station air conditioning will not be used and
ventilation shafts will be open to atmosphere (open system) with the trackway
exhaust system operating. For cold conditions, the closed system or open system
mode may be used without any station air conditioning. System heating is
achieved by the train heat released into the premises.
Congested Conditions
Congested conditions occur when delays cause disruption to the movement of
trains. It is possible that the delays may result in the idling of a train in a tunnel
section. Without forced ventilation, excessive tunnel temperatures may result
reduced performance of coach air conditioners that may lead to passenger
discomfort. During congested operations, the tunnel ventilation system is
operated to maintain a specific temperature in the vicinity of the car air
conditioner condenser coils (i.e. allowing for thermal stratification). The open
system congested ventilation shall be via a ‘push-pull’ effect where tunnel vent
fans behind the train are operated in supply and tunnel vent fans ahead of the
trains are operated in exhaust mode. Nozzles or booster (jet) fans will be used to
direct air into the desired tunnel, if required.
Emergency Conditions
Emergency conditions are when smoke is generated in the tunnel or station
trackway. In emergency conditions, the tunnel ventilation system would be set to
operate to control the movement of smoke and provide a smoke-free path for
evacuation of the passengers and for the fire fighting purposes. The ventilation
system is operated in a ‘push-pull’ supply and exhaust mode with jet fans or
nozzles driving tunnel flows such that the smoke is forced to move in one
direction, enabling evacuation to take place in the opposite direction depending
upon the location of fire on the train.
Pressure Transients
The movement of trains within the underground system induces unsteady air
motion in the tunnels and stations. Together with changes in cross section, this
motion of air results in changes in air pressure within trains and for wayside
locations. These changes in pressure or ‘pressure transients’ can be a source of
passenger discomfort and can also be harmful to the wayside equipment and
structures. Two types of transient phenomenon are generally to be examined:
a) Portal Entry and Exit Pressure Transients – As a train enters a portal, passengers
will experience a rise in pressure from when the nose enters until the tail enters.
After the tail enters the pressure drops. Similarly, as the nose exits a portal,
pressure changes are experienced in the train.
b) Wayside Pressure Transients – As trains travel through the system they will pass
structures, equipment and patrons on platforms. Equipment would include cross
passage doors, lights, dampers, walkways etc. Pressures are positive for the
approaching train and negative for retreating trains.
Most rapid changes occur with the passage of the train nose and tail. The
repetitive nature of these pressures may need to be considered when considering
fatigue in the design of equipment.
The detailed analysis to assess the effect of pressure transients will be done during
the design stage. For the portal entry/exits the effect of higher train speed may
pose discomfort to the passengers. The estimation of Way-side transients during
The track-way exhaust system will have two fans of each 30 cum/sec. for each
platform. The connections to tunnels and shafts will be through damper units that
may be either electrically or pneumatic actuated.
For the underground stations the control and monitoring of station services and
system such as station air-conditioning, ventilation to plant rooms, lighting,
pumping system, lifts & Escalators, etc shall be performed at Station Control Room
(SCR). However, the operation and control of Tunnel Ventilation as well as Smoke
Management system will normally be done through OCC. All these system shall be
equipped with automatic, manual, local and remote operation modes. The alarms
and signals from the equipment at stations shall be transmitted to the OCC via
communication network.
The concept VAC design is guided by the following codes and standards:
14. DEPOT
14.1 DEPOT LOCATION AND APPROACH TO MAINTENANCE
The Maintenance facilities for New Thane to New Thane (Ring Corridor) via
Dongripada & Thane Junction of Thane MRTS is proposed to be provided at land
near Kasarvadavali for about 41 rakes of of 6 cars. The depot will have infrastructure
to maintain the rakes with necessary facilities viz stabling lines, scheduled inspection
lines, workshop for overhaul, unscheduled maintenance including major repairs,
wheel profiling, heavy interior/under frame/roof cleaning etc. for the rolling stock
operational on the corridor as well as maintenance facilities for Civil – track,
buildings, water supply; Electrical – Traction, E&M; Signaling & Telecommunication;
Automatic Fare Collection etc.
In broad terms, based on the planned rolling stock requirements, this chapter covers
the conceptual design of the following aspects of the Depot.
The details of the two depot are provided on conceptual design basis and will work
as a guideline for detailed design later.
• Adequate facilities for the stabling have been provided at the depot.
All the system and infrastructure on the proposed corridor has been conceptualized
considering 6 car trains operating at 200 seconds headway.
• Body;
• Bogies;
• Wheels (Re-discing / re-axling is planned at workshop only);
• Traction motors;
• Electrical components;
• Electronics; PA/ PIS
• Mechanical components;
• Batteries;
• Rolling stock air conditioning;
• Brake modules;
Type of
Interval Work content Locations
Schedule
Daily Daily Check on the train condition and function at Stabling
every daily service completion. Internal Lines
cleaning / mopping of floor and walls with
vacuum cleaner.
A Service 5,000 Km Detailed inspection and testing of sub - Inspection
Check (approx.15 days) systems, under frame, replacement/ topping Bays
up of oils & lubricants.
B Service 15,000 Km Detailed inspection of ‘A’ type tasks plus Inspection
Check (approx. 45 items at multiples of 15,000 Km (‘B’ type Bays
days) tasks)
Intermediate 420,000 Km Check and testing of all sub-assemblies Workshop
Overhaul (approx. 3.5 (Electrical + Mechanical). Overhaul of
(IOH) years) pneumatic valves, Compressor. Condition
based maintenance of sub-systems to bring
them to original condition. Replacement of
parts and rectification, trial run.
Periodical 840,000 Km Dismantling of all sub-assemblies, bogies Workshop
Overhaul (approx. 7 years) suspension system, traction motor, gear,
(POH) control equipment, air-conditioning units
etc. Overhauling to bring them to original
condition. Checking repair and replacement
as necessary. Inspection and trial.
Heavy - Changing of heavy item such as bogies, Workshop
Repairs traction motor, axles, gear cases & axle
boxes etc.
The above Schedule may need slight revision based on the actual earned kilometers
per train and the specific maintenance requirements of Rolling Stock finally
procured.
The rake induction and withdrawal from depot to the open line will have to be so
planned that the headway of open line is not affected. For the purpose, facilities for
simultaneous receipt and dispatch of trains from depot to open line should be
created. The stabling area should be interlocked with the open line so that the
induction of train from the stabling can be done without loss of time. The rake
washing can be done at automatic coach washing plant provided at the entry of
depot i.e before rake is placed on stabling lines.
The other movements in the depot, viz from the stabling to the inspection shed or
workshop and vice versa may be non-interlocked. One emergency re-railing line have
been provided from which emergency rescue vehicles can be dispatched to open line
in the event of any emergency. To cater to the peak requirements, all trains would
be in the service, only trains under maintenance would be in the shed. However
during the off-peak hour in daytime, approximately half of the trains will be
withdrawn from the service. The scheduled inspections are envisaged to be carried
out during the day off-peak hours and night.
The stabling and the yard layout would be at grade level for least power
requirements in shunting movements and to avoid accidental rolling of Rolling Stock
resulting into accidents and damages to the property.
As per the frequency of inspections indicated in Table 14.2, the visits of rakes to
Depot are as given below in Figure 14.1:
To assess the number of lines required to maintain the rakes, following assumptions
are made:
Kasarvadavali Depot will have the infra-structure for inspection and overhaul of 41
Rakes of 6 Car . Accordingly, 4 lines have been provided for the schedule inspections
& 3 lines for periodical overhaul/major unscheduled repairs etc.
Hence, the depot layout for the proposed corridor is sufficient to cater to the
maintenance requirements of the rolling stock operational on the corridor for the
design/ultimate year.
For the design of the stabling lines in the depot, following approximate lengths have
been taken in consideration:
For the design of the Inspection Bay Lines in the depot, following approximates
lengths have been taken in consideration:
The inspection bay in Kasarvadavali Depot shall be of 160 X 29.75m² size, inspection
lines having sunken floor. The track spacing between the adjacent inspection Bay
Lines shall be 6.25 m.
There would be lighting below the rail level to facilitate the under frame inspection.
Ramps of 1:8 slopes, 3 meter wide should be provided with sunken floor system for
movement of material for the cars. Further, 10 m cross pathways are left at each end
for movement of material by fork lifter/ Leister/ Hand trolley. 415V 3 phase 50 Hz,
230V 1 phase 50 Hz AC supply and Pneumatic supply shall also be made available on
each inspection shed columns. Air-circulators shall be provided on each column.
Roof and walls shall be of such design that optimum natural air ventilation occurs all
the time and sufficient natural light is also available. Each Inspection bay will also
have arrangement close by for cleaning of HVAC filter under high pressure water jet.
• Body furnishing.
• Bogie.
• Wheels.
• Traction Motor.
• Axle box and axle bearing.
• Power Collector.
• Electrical equipment like transformer, converter/inverter, circuit breaker,
relays.
• Battery.
• Air compressor.
• Air conditioning equipments.
• Brake equipment.
• Door actuators.
• Control and measuring equipments.
• Pneumatic equipments
• Dampers and Springs
• Couplers/ Gangways
Cross track equipped with bogie turntables have been provided for movement
between bays. A separate building is planned for housing pit wheel lathe (PWL),
approachable from workshop, inspection bay and stabling lines through rail and road
for placement of cars for re- profiling of wheels within the depot along with space for
depot of scrap.
Since the workshop cum depot is designed optimally, it would not be wise to waste
its capacity in maintaining the other than
passenger Rolling Stock vehicles. Carrying
these vehicles to the inspection shed affects
the Rolling Stock maintenance as shunting is
also involved. Therefore, other vehicles like
emergency re-railing, rail cum road vehicle,
tower wagons, etc. may be housed and given
required inspection attention in a separate
shed called Auxiliary shed cum Emer. re-
railing bldg, for which 1 line have been provided in the main depot. However for the
heavy lifting needs, these vehicles may be taken to main workshop for required
attention.
The newly procured coaches, which are transported by road, shall reach the Depot-
cum Workshop by the road on trailers. To unload the coaches and bring them to the
track, provision of space, along the side of shunting neck, has to be made for
unloading of cars and other heavy materials. There should be enough space available
for movement of heavy cranes for lifting of coaches. The unloading area should be
easily accessible for heavy duty hydraulic trailers.
Provision to be made for Rolling Stock exterior surfaces to be washed using a fully
automated Train Washing System with a throughput capacity of approximately six
trains per hour. The AWP shall be situated at such a convenient point on the
incoming route so that incoming trains can be washed before entry to the depot and
undesirable movement/shunting over ingress and egress routes within the depot is
avoided.
Monthly heavy cleaning of interior walls, floors, seats, windows glasses etc, outside
heavy cleaning, Front/rear Face, Vestibule/ Buffer area, outside walls and roof shall
be done manually in the interior cleaning plant designed for cleaning of one at a time.
A line adjacent to inspection shed should be so provided that placement of rakes is
possible from workshop or inspection lines & vice – versa conveniently and with ease.
Suitable office facility adjacent to the stabling lines at each depot should be provided
so that train operators reporting ‘On’ duty or going ‘Off’ duty can obtain updates
regarding ‘Special Notices’, ‘Safety Circulars’ and other technical updates/information
in vogue. These offices should have an attached cycle/scooter/car stand facility for
convenience of the train operating staff.
a) Ample parking space shall be provided for the two wheelers and four wheelers at
the following points.
There shall be provision of adequate number of watch towers for the vigilance of
depot boundary.
An auxiliary substation of 2500 KVA capacity has been planned for catering to the
power supply requirement of the depot. Details of connected load, feeder may be
worked out during detailed designing stage.
The standby power supply is proposed through silent DG set of 2X320 KVA capacity to
supply all essential loads without over loading.
Silent type compressor units shall be suitably installed inside the depot at convenient
location for the supply of compressed air to workshop and Inspection sheds. Thus,
the pneumatic pipeline shall run within the workshop and inspection bays as to have
compressed air supply line at all convenient points.
In house facilities shall be developed for the water supply of each depot. Sewerage,
storm water drainage shall be given due care while designing the depot for efficient
system functioning. Past records of Municipal Corporation shall be used to design the
drainage system. Rainwater harvesting would be given due emphases to charge the
underground reserves.
Annexure 14.2
Physiography:Thane district extends between 18°42’ and 20° 20’ North latitude and
between 72° 37’and 73° 45’ East longitude. Nasik and Ahmednagar are located on East,
union territory of Dadra to its North, Pune to the south east, Raigad to the south and
Mumbai metropolis to the south west of Thane district. The two main rivers flowing
through the district are the Ulhas and the Vaitarana. The Topographic map of the Thane
district is shown in Figure 15.1.
Geomorphology and Soils:Thane district forms part of western slope of Sahayadri hill
range. The soil has been classified into three broad categories based on the
characteristics and relationship with topographic set up.
(1) Soil of Coastal Lands with Residual Hills - These soils are slightly deep, poorly
drained, fine soils on gentle sloping land and very fine soil on sloping land. These soils
are calcareous and occur along the coast of Vasai, Palgarh and Dahanu.
(2) Lighter Colored soils - These soils are occurring on the undulating, elongated hills
and 5 intervening valleys. These are medium to deep grayish in color, poor in fertility,
clayey to loamy in nature, shallow in depth and coarse in texture. These soils occur on
the eastern part of the district.
(3) Black Colored Soil- These soils occur on plains in the middle and eastern part of the
district along the valleys.
Soil sample was collected from five sampling locations listed in Table 15.3and shown on
Figure 15.5. Soil analysis results are given in Table 15.4.
Station
2. Upvan Lake 19011’21.8940”N,
72057’21.8844”E
3. Near Bakumnaka&Laxminagar Metro Station 19012’48.4452”N,
72054’39.5808”E
4. Raila Devi Talab 19014’53.5164”N,
72058’34.6008”E
5. Creek between Waghbil and Hiranandani 19015’58.8960”N,
road station 72058’37.0236”E
Soil samples were analyzed for Texture, pH, Electrical Conductivity (EC), Organic Carbon,
Available Nitrogen (N), Available Phosphorus (P2O5), Available Potassium (K2O),
Available Sulphur, Available Iron, Available Manganese, Available Zinc, Available Copper,
Available Boron, and Available Molybdenum. The soils of the proposed project were
mostly sandy in texture with the sand content more than 85 percent. The pH value of
study areas varied from 6.6 to 7.4 with an average 7.1.It was observed that the soil
reaction was Neutral in nature.Electrical Conductivity of the soils varied from 250 to
30970mS/cm with an average 10067 mScm. The organic carbon content of the soils
varied from 0.30-0.60 with an average of 0.50 percent. Total Available nitrogen status
varied from 127-947 with an average of 413 kg/ha. The maximum available nitrogen 947
kg/ha was found in sample location No SQ2 while minimum 127 kg/ha observed in
sample location No SQ3.On the basis of the rating suggested by Subbiah and Ashija
(1956) approximately 85 % of the soil samples were rated in low range (< 280 kg/ha).
Plant available phosphorus contents in soils of project site varied from 5.82 to 20.83
kg/ha with an average value of 10.53 kg/ha. According to soil fertility index suggested by
Muhar et al. (1963) all samples were found in higher range (medium range 10-24 kg/ha,
high range > 24 kg/ha). The type of phosphorus ions present in soil solution depends on
soil ph. In soils having neutral to slightly alkaline pH, the HPO4‾ ion is the most common
form. Potassium content in soil ranges from 188-840 kg/ha with an average of 622.2
kg/ha. According to Muhar et al. (1963) potassium was categorized as K2O in low < 140
kg/ha , medium 140-280 kg/ha and high > 280 kg/ha.The K is relatively abundant in the
earth's crust; most of it is not accessible to plant.The water soluble sulphur status varied
from 9.0 -630 with an average value 255.4 mg/kg. Keeping this fact in view the soil
under may be classified as deficient <10 ppm, medium 10-20 ppm and sufficient > 20
ppm category as per the categorization given by Hariram and Dwevedi (1994). According
to these categories all the soil samples were found under higher fertility gradient. The
available zinc varied from 42.40-256.30 mg/kgwith the mean value of 105.9 mg/kg. Only
zero percent were found in deficient range, by considering 0.6 mg/kg as the critical
limits of zinc suggested by Takkar and Man (1975).Available Fe content in the soil
ranged from 14970-51980 mg/kg with mean value of 35858 mg/kg. 100 percent samples
was found in sufficient amount of available Fe considering 4.5 mg/kg as a critical limit
suggested by Lindsay and Norvell (1978).Available Mn studied in soils varied from 328-
2981 mg/kg1with mean value of 1228.8 mg/kg. Considering 1.0 mg/kg as a critical limit
for Mn deficiency (Lindsay and Norvell 1978), all samples were found in sufficient
quantity. Available copper content ranged from 41.9-171.8 mg/kgwith mean value of
102.4 mg/kg. Zero percent soil samples were found in deficient range, by considering
0.2 mg/kgas critical limit for copper deficiency (Lindsay and Norvell 1978). 100
percentwere found in sufficient range. Results show that boron content in soils of study
area varied from 0.4-0.9 mg/kgwith an average of 0.6 mg/kg. These data suggest that
availability of boron in soil is high as per critical limit <0.5 mg/kg (Katya and Rattan
2003).
Geology and Minerals: Thane district is divided into highland forming Sahyadri towards
the eastern and western low lying sea shore. A major part of district is covered with
basalt lava flows generally called as Deccan trap. Small area of the district is covered by
the Alluvium, beach sand, coastal, laterites, trachytes and rhyolite. Thane district is rich
in bauxite, granite, and clay. The geological & mineral map of Maharashtra is shown in
Figure 15.3.
Landuse: The land use distribution is given in Table 15.5. Total developed area in the
Thane District accounts to about 47.3 percent of the entire area.
PROJECT SITE
Seismicity:Thane lies in the seismic Zone III, moderate as per IS: 1893-2002 (BIS,
2002)and corresponds to
MSK intensity VII. Seismic FIGURE 15.4: SEISMICITY MAP OF INDIA
zoning map of India is shown
in Figure 15.4.
Hydro-geological
Characteristics: Deccan trap
Basalt of Upper Cretaceous
to Lower Eocene age is the
major rock type covering
about 80% of the district,
coastal alluvium is other
formation occurring only in
western end of the district.
Alluvium: These are developed in the western part of the area along the coast and river
courses and are lacustrine in nature. Along the coast, alluvium consists of clayey and
mud deposits. The quality of water is slightly brackish and pumping from this formation
has to be restricted to prevent ingress of seawater. The alluvium constitutes the
potential aquifer in the area.
According to CGWB report for Thane district pre-monsoon (May 2012) depth to water
level is 0.50 to 14.60m bgl and post-monsoon (Nov 2012) depth to water level is 1.20to
6.90m bgl.In major part of the district mean water level is less than 2m bgl. 2 to 5 m bgl
is observed in the north western part around Palghar, Dahanu, Talasari and Pansipada
and also in the form of isolated patches in the, central part of the district. The
deeper, mean water level of more than 5 m bgl is observed as isolated patches in
northern part.
Drainage and Water Resources:The two Mains Rivers flowing through the district are
the Ulhas and the Vaitarna.The Ulhas originates from the north of Tungarli near
Lonawala and meets the Arabian sea at Vasai creek. The river has many tributaries; two
important of them (within the boundaries of this district) are Barvi and Bhatra.
Vaitarnarises in the Triambak hills in Nashik district. The River enters the Arabian Sea
through a wide estuary off Arnala. It has a number of tributaries; the most important of
them are Pinjal, Surya Daherja and Tansa.
Water Quality
In order to assess the baseline water quality status of the study area, water samples
were collected along the corridor in the project area at 5 representative locations. The
sample locations from which water samples were collected are shown in Figure 15.2
and details of water sample locations are given in Table 15.6. The samples were
analyzed for physical and chemical constituents for the purpose of domestic and
irrigation use. The results of water analysis are compared with CPHEEO manual for
Drinking Water Specifications and IS 10500:2012. The results of analysis are presented
in Table 15.7.
i) Population no/m2 31 28 34 32 27
ii) Total Groups No 2 3 3 3 3
SW1:Upvan lake, SW2: Railadevi Talab, SW3: Ulhas River Near to Balkumnaka & Laxminagar Metro station, GW1:
Patlipada&Dongripada Metro station, SW4: Vasai Creek Wagbil and Hiranandanai Road railway station
Ground Water:
Physical Parameters: pH levels of the ground water sample that was collected near to
Patlipada & Dongripada Metro station were detected within the acceptable limit.
Total Dissolved solids: TDS in ground water sample was within the acceptable limit but it
is on higher side. Reverse osmosis process is recommended.
Hardness: As per IS 10500:2012 water having the hardness 200 mg/l are acceptable for
drinking purpose. The ground water sample near Patlipada station has hardness 297
mg/l which falls under the permissible limit. However ion exchange process & lime soda
ash softening is recommended.
Surface water:Results for locationsSW1, SW2 and SW3 have been compared with the
CPCB surface water quality criteria. Comparing the values of pH, DO, BOD and total coli
form with ‘Use based classification of surface waters’ published by Central Pollution
Control Board; it can be seen that the analysed surface waters is of class ‘D’ and
can be used for propagation of Wild life and Fisheries. Bacteriological examination of
surface water indicates the presence of total coliforms, which may be due to human
activities.
The location of SW4 lies in the estuary, hence the results have been compared with IS-
7967-1976 (reaffirmed-2014) criteria for controlling pollution of marine coastal area in
terms of pH, DO, BOD, Coli forms, Heavy metals. It can be seen that the analysed creek
water is not suitable for any usage as specified by the CPCB.
Climate and Rainfall: The Project site lies in Thane district of Maharashtra, falls under
the tropical wet climate classification. The cold season is from December to February,
followed by summer from March to June. The southwest monsoon season is from June
to September. October and November months constitute the post-monsoon season.
Average monthly rainfall data of Santacruz station was collected from IMD for the
periods 2012-2017 and is reportedin Figure 15.5.In last five year maximum average
monthly rainfall (1469mm) was recorded in July 2014. During months of January to May
zero rainfall was recorded.
1500 2012
1000 2013
500 2014
0
2015
2016
Months 2017
Humidity:Monthly variation of Humidity data has been collected from the SantacruzIMD
station has been given in the Figure 15.6. Summer months forms the driest part of the
year when relative humidity is low, particularly in April and May. The climate is highly
humid in monsoon, particularly in June and July. The average relative humidity in
monsoon months goes as high as 127percent.
Temperature: Monthly variation in temperature data has been collected from the
Santacruz station from 2012-2017 has been reported in Figure 15.7. It is clear from
figure that May is the hottest month of the year with mean daily maximum temperature
of about 34.890C. With the onset of monsoon, temperature decreases appreciably in
June but remains steady thereafter till September. The climate becomes cool in
December and continues up to February. December and January are the coldest months
of the year.
25 2012
20 2013
15
2014
10
5 2015
0 2016
JULY
SEPT
FEB
DEC
NOV
APRIL
JAN
MARCH
OCT
MAY
JUNE
AUG
2017
Months
The wind rose diagram for the Santacruz station were collected from the IMD stationare
shown in Figure 15.8and 15.9.It was observed that in morning 9% of the time wind was
blowing from West(westerly) during the 1971-2000 Period. During evening wind blows
from the north-west 32% of the time. Average wind speed was 4.5-7m/s and calm
condition was 42% and 2% during the 8AM and 5PM respectively.
FIGURE 15.8: WIND ROSE DIAGRAM (03Hr) FIGURE 15.9: WIND ROSE DIAGRAM (14 Hr)
Air Quality:Locations for ambient air quality monitoring was selected primarily on the
basis of surface influence, demographic influence and meteorological influence. The
technique used for sampling and analysis of pollutants is summarized below in Table
15.9.
Total six monitoring stations were selected which aregiven below in Table 15.10and
locations map for air monitoring stations is given below in Figure 15.10. The monitoring
parameters included Particulate matter, Sulphur dioxide, Nitrogen dioxide, Carbon
monoxide for twice in a week.
Particulate Matter (PM10 and PM2.5) FIGURE 15.11: PM10 CONCENTRATION IN THE STUDY
PM10 concentration observed during
the period ranged from in 56.5g/m3
to 86.5g/m3. Maximum
concentration was recorded at AAQ3
(Balkum Naka). The 98th percentile
PM10 values were observed less than
the prescribed NAAQS of 100 g/m3
at all location.The Graphical FIGURE 15.12: PM2.5 CONCENTRATION IN THE STUDY
representation of PM10 concentration
is shown in Figure 15.11
Average NO2 concentration at all six FIGURE 15.15: CO CONCENTRATION IN THE STUDY
locationsranged from 12.75 g/m3 to
17.40g/m3. 98th percentile values
for all location are quite lower than
the NAAQS prescribed limit of
80g/m3. The Graphical
representation of NO2 concentration is
shown in Figure 15.14
Average CO concentration at all six locations ranged from 0.460 mg/m 3 to 0.730 mg/m3.
98th percentile values for all location are quite lower than the NAAQS prescribed limit of
4 mg/m3. The Graphical representation of CO concentration is shown in Figure 15.15.
From the above discussion it can be interfered that the ambient air quality is
satisfactory with respect to all pollutants.
The noise quality was monitored at six locations across the study area. Noise level was
recorded for 24 hours for two days in April 2018 at hourly interval during
morning;afternoon and evening such that peak and off peak hours are covered. Noise
monitoring locations are given in Table 15.11 and geographical locations are shown
inFigure 15.16. The summarized results of noise level as Leq, L10, L50, L90, Lday, Lnight, LDN,
LMAX and LMINare given in Table 15.13.
Ministry of Environment & Forests (MoEF) has notified the noise standards vide. Gazette
notification dated February 14, 2000 for different zones under the Environment
Protection Act (1986). These standards are given in Table 15.12.
Hrs) Hrs)
1. NQ1 23.04.2018 73.3 75.9 73.3 72.1 76.4 69.3 73.6 74.4 77.2
24.04.2018 72.6 77.6 72.5 68.6 83.7 66.4 73.8 77.5 78.4
2. NQ2 23.04.2018 69.6 72.5 69.6 68.2 73 64.3 70.4 69.7 73.5
3. NQ3 23.04.2018 64.6 71.4 64.5 53 95.8 50.4 83.9 57.1 78.3
4. NQ4 23.04.2018 76.8 87.7 76.7 67.3 95.1 62.1 85.9 72.5 84.8
24.04.2018 75.9 86.3 75.8 67.9 99.9 60.8 89.2 75.1 87.8
5. NQ5 23.04.2018 64.8 67 64.7 57.7 68.4 56.0 64.7 64.6 68.0
24.04.2018 60.9 70.2 60.8 57.1 72.6 53.2 66.4 64.4 69.1
6. NQ6 23.04.2018 62.5 64.8 62.5 60.9 72.3 58.8 64.7 62.2 67.2
The noise levels were compared with the ambient air quality standard in respect of
Noise. Residential Area: The equivalent noise level ranged between 60.9 dB(A)
(Waqhbil) to 76.8 dB(A) (Manorama Nagar). It was observed that noise levels during day
and night time in the residential area are quite high at all locations. Silence area: The
ambient noise levels in the silence area are exceeding the permissible limit.
An ecological study was conducted along the corridor during 26th May 2018 and 27th
May 2018. For ecological study 10 m RoW, stations and depot was considered as core
zone and 15 km area around the project as buffer zone. Primary data was collected for
core zone through field survey. Secondary data was collected for buffer zone.
Forest cover
The vegetation of the area ranges from littoral forests to western sub-tropical hill
forests and as per the revised classification of Indian Forest Types by Champion and
Seth, the National Park has Southern Tropical Moist Mixed Deciduous Forest and
Western Sub Tropical Hill Forest and some of the tree species are Tectonagrandis,
Terminaliatomentosa, Acacia catechu, Adina cordifolia, Mitragynaparviflora,
Pterocarpusmarsupium. Alignment is passing through Sanjay Gandhi National Park.
Tungareswar National Park and Flamingo Sanctuary are located within 15 km from the
project.
A. Flora
Core Zone: The tree species observed are listed in the Table 15.14. Total number of
trees that need to be transplanted and felled will be 411 and 251 respectively. The
inventory of trees in the corridor likely to be felled has been prepared and summarized
in the Table 15.16. Estimated cost of compensatory afforestation is included in the
Environmental Management Plan (EMP).
Buffer Zone: The main tree species found in the buffer zone are listed in Table 15.15
The inventory of trees in the corridors likely to be felled has been prepared and
summarized in the Table 15.16. Total number of trees that need to be transplant and
felled will be 411 and 251 respectively. Estimated cost of compensatory afforestation is
included in the Environmental Management Plan (EMP).
B. Fauna
Fauna were studied through secondary data in core zone and buffer zone. Fauna and
avifauna species are listed in Table 15.17.
Avifauna: Five endangered birds species namely the Peafowl ( Pavocristatus), Osprey
(Pandionhaliaetus), white bellied sea eagle (haliaetusleucoquaster) , Hawks (Accitridae)
and large Falcons (Falco peregrines, Falco biarmicus and Falco chicuera) are found in this
area. The cormorant is a common bird of the area. The nocturnal birds include the Barn
owl, the great Horned Owl, barred Jungle owlet and the spotted owlet
Reptiles: In Sanjay Gandhi National Park there are thirty eight species of reptiles of
which seven are endangered.Crocodiluspalustris, Python molurus, Najanaja,
Ptyasmucosus,ViperarusselliSchedule –Ispecies are found inside the park.
Amphibia: Tree frogs, Bulll frog, Common toad, Fungoid frogs are seen in this area.
Mammals:Nearly 43 species of mammals are seen in Sanjay Gandhi National Park. Out
of these 8 are endangered species and have been included in Schedule –I and Schedule-
II. These are as follows: Leopard pardus, Felisrubiginosa, Felischaus, Viverriculaindica,
Padoxurus hermaphrodites, Canisaureus, Tetracusquadricornis, Tragulusmeminna.
C. Protected area
The proposed alignment passes along the existing Development Plan Road and outside
the compound wall of Sanjay Gandhi National Park at various locations.
The mangrove forest in the District belong to the group “Littoral and swamp Forest”.
The mangrove forest consists mostly of evergreen trees and shrubs belonging to several
unrelated families and share similar habitat preferences and a similar physiognomy. In
the area, lower salinity species of mangroves are Rhizophoraapiculata,
Avicenniaofficinalis and Kandeliarheedi.
The proposed alignment passes along the existing and proposed Development Plan
Road adjacent to the mangroves. Avicenniamarina also known as Grey Mangrove are
predominant in the study area. It is also categorised as tree belonging to family
Avicenniaceae.
1. CRZ I- ecologically sensitive areas such as mangroves, coral reefs, salt marshes,
turtlenesting ground and the inter-tidal zone
2. CRZ II- areas close to the shoreline and areas which have been developed.
3. CRZ III- Coastal areas that are not substantially built up, including rural coastal areas.
4. CRZ IV- water area from LTL to the limit of territorial waters of India.
The alignment approximately from Ch: 14309-15343, Ch: 19800-22500, Ch: 22900-
25400 is passing through CRZ 1A /CRZ II. Draft CRZ map is based on the Draft CRZ
Notification 2018. project area falls in CRZ IA at waterfront station to waqhbil and
Balkum Naka to Thane junction as depicted in Figure 15.17 and Figure 15.18
respectively. The proposed project needs CRZ clearance from MoEFCC.
No archaeological monuments/sites and heritage sites are located along the alignment.
CRZ -IA
CRZ -II
The laws and norms that are applicable to the project are listed out in Table 15.19.
• Employment Opportunities,
• Benefits to Economy,
• Traffic Congestion Reduction, Quick Service and Safety,
• Traffic Noise Reduction,
• Reduction of Traffic on Road,
• Less Fuel consumption,
• Reduced air pollution.
15.3.1 Employment Opportunities
It is assumed that the civil works of the project is likely to be completed in a period of 5
years. During this period manpower will be needed for various project activities. During
construction phase, about 8,900 people will be employed.During operation phase
considering 45 person per km about 1180 persons will be employed for operation and
maintenance of metro corridor. In addition to these, more people would be indirectly
employed for allied activities.
The project will facilitate movement of passengers between different parts of the Thane
city. Introduction of this metro will result in the reduction in number of buses, usage of
private vehicles and reduction in fuel consumption, vehicle operating cost and travel
time of passengers and road accidents. It is likely that trade, commerce and allied
services will benefit from better connectivity.
The saving of Diesel, Petrol and CNG will directly benefit the country in monetary terms.
Net saving on fuel expenditure at current price level (June 2018) is given in Table 15.22.
1
Source: Relation between traffic volume & noise levels, Ellebjerg (2013)
The estimated total savings on fuel will be of Rs948.82 million inyear 2025, Rs1487.60
million in year 2045.
Ambient emissions from operation of Metro rail are limited to those from backup DG
equipment. System-level generation of CO2 from generation of grid electricity which
powers Metro are not included in the ambient emissions.The major vehicular pollutants
that define the ambient air quality are: Particulate matter, Nitrogen oxides, Carbon
monoxide, Hydro CarbonsCarbon dioxide, Sulphur dioxide. In addition to the above
pollution, un-burnt products like aldehydes, formaldehydes, acrolein, acetaldehyde and
smoke are by products of vehicular emissions. The reduction of ambient air pollutants
with the present corridors are presented inTable 15.23.
During this phase, those impacts, which are likely to take place due to the layout of the
project, have been assessed. These impacts are:
Land will be required permanently for stations and running sections. Both government
and private land will be acquired for the project. The details are given in SIA part.
Impact on Birds
The alignment is passing along the existing Development Plan Road outside the
compound wall of Sanjay Gandhi National Park which is home to five endangered
species, namely the Peafowl, osprey, White bellied sea eagle, Hawks and large Falcons.
Potential impacts on birds include habitat loss or degradation, loss ordeterioration of
some roosting, nesting and/or feeding habitat. Noise pollution has been shown to have
a negative impact on species diversity in certain circumstances and that nest
productivity can vary significantly between noisy and quiet areas.
Impact on Mammals
As the proposed alignment passing adjacent to Sanjay Gandhi National Park and SGNP is
The proposed corridors pass adjoining the SGNP reserve forest (near Dongripada
Station, Lokmanyanagar Bus depot). There are approximately 662 trees along the
corridors 251 trees are unfit for transplantation. These trees are likely to be felled
during the construction. 411 trees will be transplanted. Trees are major assets in
purifications of urban air, which by utilizing CO2 from atmosphere, release oxygen into
the air. However, with removal of these trees, the process for CO2 conversion will get
effected and the losses are reported below:
The proposed metro corridors are planned to run through the urban area above the
ground i.e. elevated. The alignment will cross drains, large number of sub-surface,
surface and utility services, viz. sewer, water mains, storm water drains, telephone
cables, overhead electrical transmission lines, electric pipes, traffic signals etc. These
utilities/ services are essential and have to be maintained in working order during
different stages of construction by temporary/permanent diversions or by supporting in
position. Plans and cost of such diversions are covered in the section on Civil
Engineering.
The metro system has been proposed to cater the additional demand of present and
future traffic requirement. The drivers of local transport facilities like buses, taxis, autos
and rickshaws may be utilized to cater the requirement of transport from metro stations
to work place and vice-versa. Additional employment opportunities are also anticipated
due to the proposed metro.
As the alignment and stations are predominantly elevated, visual intrusion will be
experienced. Noise during operation will be higher, elevated stations result in reduced
energy consumption compared to underground stations. Stations give rise to
accumulation of passengers and likely congestion especially in case commercial
development is resorted to.
Energy for climate control, lighting and other facilities and water for drinking and non-
drinking purposes at stations and depot will be required.
The most likely negative impacts related to the construction works are:
• Ecological Impact
• Soil erosion and Land Subsidence
• Traffic diversion
• Air pollution
• Increased water demand
• Impact due to labour camp
• Impact due to supply of construction material
• Impact due to muck disposal
• Impact due to construction/demolition waste Disposal
• Impact due to hazardous waste
• Impact due to Pre-casting yards and Material stockpiling
• Impact on Ground water flow
• Impact on ground water and surface water quality
• Impact on archaeological monuments/sites and heritage sites
• Noise pollution
• Vibration and risk to existing buildings.
Run off from unprotected excavated areas can result in excessive soil erosion, especially
when the erodibility of soil is high. Land subsidence is anticipated at stations which will
be constructed by cut and cover method.
Air pollution occurs due to excavation, loading and unloading of construction materials,
and emissions from vehicles, construction equipment and DG sets etc. It also occurs in
sites of muck disposal, debris disposal and pre-casting yards. Air pollution from road
based vehicles especially particulates are found to cause diseases of brain, heart, lungs
and kidneys.
During construction phase waste water will be generated from the Labour camps.
Improper disposal of waste water can pollute the surface water and ground water.
Construction workers are more prone to infectious diseases due lack of sanitation
facilities (water supply and human waste disposal) and insect vectors However, this
phenomenon will be temporary and restricted to close vicinity of construction site.
About 8,900 persons are likely to work during peak construction activity. Estimated
water requirement comes out to be about 623KLD.Quantity of waste water and solid
waste generated will be about 498 KLD and 1335 Kg per day respectively. Sewage and
municipal solid waste generated from labour camp will be treated before disposal.
Facilities such as shelter at workplace, canteen, first aid and day crèche are statutory
requirement and essential to productivity.
Safety of labour during construction is a statutory requirement and also has impact on
progress of work.
Construction material such as aggregate and earth are sourced from approved quarries
such that environmental impacts as well as wastage of natural resources are minimized
and mitigated.
Hazardous waste would mainly arise from the maintenance of equipment which may
include used engine oils, hydraulic fluids, waste fuel, spent mineral oil/cleaning fluids
from mechanical machinery, scrap batteries or spent acid/alkali, spent solvents etc.
Unsafe disposal can result in water and soil pollution, diversion of green parks and
temporary displacement.
Sites for casting of structural concrete elements and material stockpiling can result in air
and water pollution, noise, diversion of open areas like green parks and temporary
displacement.
Tunnelling can impact ground water flow from aquifers while extraction of ground
water during construction of underground stations can lower ground water table. A
comprehensive hydro geological impact study should be taken before starting
construction.
Ground water contamination can take place if sewage from labour camp or chemical
substances from construction site or dumped muck or construction/demolition waste or
used water from the RMC plant percolate to the ground water table.
For noise prediction various combinations of equipment were assessed for different
construction activities i.e Viaduct, Elevated Station, Underground station, at Grade
Section, Construction Yard, Depot as listed in Table 15.24. For Prediction of Noise levels
(leq), Model of US Department of Transportation has been used.
For prediction, no ground attenuation has been considered as ground was assumed to
be undisturbed, consolidated and hard.Usage factor (number of hours of operation of
different equipment) as per construction practices in metro projects in India and
standard (FHWA,USA) noise emission levels of equipment are taken. The metal
barricade used in construction is assumed to be shielding. Noise prediction has been
carried out for two conditions a) without any shielding and b) with shielding which
provides noise attenuation of 5 dB(A).
Estimation of noise levels has been done upto a distance of 3000ft (914 m). Distances
have been worked out (Table 15.25) upto which noise levels due to combination of
equipment are equal to or less than average base line monitored noise levels i.e 71.25
dB(A). These levels are typical and will vary with specifications of the equipment, usage
pattern, number of construction agencies, existing structures/trees which act as barrier
to noise transmission.
Crane 88 1
Case 5
Underground Excavator 81 24 86.06
station Concrete Pump truck 81 24
Generator 81 24
Crane 88 1
Case 6
At Grade Section Dumper 76 24 89.19
Dozer 85 24
Compactor 82 24
Grader 85 24
Case 7
Construction yard Concrete mixer 85 24 91.98
Truck 88 24
Truck 88 24
Case 8
Depot Dumper 76 24 92.21
Dumper 76 24
Grader 85 24
Grader 85 24
Compactor 82 24
Compactor 82 24
Dozer 85 24
Dozer 85 24
Note: Transient sources create a single isolated vibration event, such as blasting or drop balls.
Continuous / frequent intermittent sources include impact pile drivers, pogo-stick compactors,
crack-and-seat equipment, vibratory pile drivers, and vibratory compaction equipment.Source:
Transportation and Construction Vibration Guidance Manual, Caltrans, September 2013
Typical vibration levels due to working of construction equipment for a wide range of soil
conditions are summarised in Table 15.27.
Peak particle velocity (PPV) of the equipment adjusted for the distance (D) has been estimated
conservatively (no mitigation measures) at different distances and presented in Table 15.28.
TABLE 15.28: ESTIMATED VIBRATION LEVELS FOR DIFFERENT CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT (PPV
in/sec)
Equipment Distance (m)
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Pile Driver Upper 2.86 1.01 0.55 0.36 0.25 0.19 0.15 0.13 0.11 0.09
(Impact) Range
typical 1.21 0.43 0.23 0.15 0.11 0.08 0.07 0.05 0.04 0.04
Pile Driver Upper 1.38 0.49 0.27 0.17 0.12 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04
Small 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.001 0.001 0.000 0.00 0.00 0.000 0.0002
Bulldozer 6 2 1 03 02 2
Where sonic pile driver is used the vibration level will be within permissible limit at 10
m. If significant impacts due to vibration are expected, mitigation measures have to be
implemented and building condition survey have to be conducted before, during and
after construction. In case impact pile is used for hard rock than the vibration level
willbe within the permissible limit at 15 m.
The project may cause the following negative impacts during operation of the project
due to the increase in the number of passengers and trains at the stations:
• Noise pollution
• Vibration
• Water supply and sanitation at Stations
• Energy Consumption at stations
• Congestion Around Stations
• Impact due to depot
15.4.4.1 Noise Pollution
During the operation phase Noise levels from running of trains at particular distance
from the source are predicted and presented in Table 15.29.
Measured noise level are more than the prescribed limits. As such bringing the
composite i.e. metro noise level plus existing ambient noise level to satisfy the
prescribed limits will require a mitigation measure to be implemented at the receptor
which will be more expensive than the measures which can be implemented at the
metro aligment. Therefore the objective of noise mitigating measures recommended in
this report to bring the metro noise level to satisfy prescribed limits by use of noise
barrier on the viaduct and elevated stations.
At average commercial speed of 32kmph with 6 cars per racks and 156 services per day
(peak events 14 /hr)noise level due to metro will be 55 dB(A) at distance of 55 m from
the alignment.
A great part of the alignment passes through the residential area for which prescribed
limits is 55 dB(A). However the alignment passes along the existing development road
adjoining the Sanjay Gandhi National Park (SGNP) for which the prescribed limit will be
50 dB(A) which will be experienced at 92 m. Considering 55 dB(A) as the cutoff noise
level to be achieved will lead to the conclusion that noise barrier will have to be installed
over entire length of the elevated section. Therefore the recommendation in this report
is based on comparison of metro noise level with existing ambient noise level.
It is seen from Table 15.29 that metro noise level is 57 dB(A) to 44 dB(A) which is less
than the measured level.
However with the objective to reduce level to standard limit inside this sensitive area to
the extent possible, noise barrier for elevated section is recommended on both sides of
the viaduct in section which falls along the existing development road adjoining the
Sanjay Gandhi National Park. Metro Noise level estimated at 1m will be 80 dB(A) and
absorptive Noise barrier will be used to reduce the metro noise level by 20 - 25 dB(A).
Subject to approval of safety authorities, the viaduct will be covered in this section with
suitable material toreduce disturbance to birds.
RITES Ltd. Page 15-48
Detailed Project Report for Thane Metro Rail
Final DPR Chapter 15: Environmental and Social Impact Assessment
15.4.4.2 Vibration
During operation phase the sources of the vibration and noise induced by the trains are
mainly the rolling stock, track and the interaction between them. The vibration of the
transit structure excites the adjacent ground, creating vibration waves that propagate
through the various soil and rock strata to the foundations of nearby buildings. The
vibration propagates from the foundation throughout the remainder of the building
structure. The intensity of vibration depends on operational and vehicle parameters,
track system, geology and condition of receiving building. Primary effect of ground
borne vibration will be rattling of window panes and rumble noise which cause
annoyance to the occupants.
The water demand at stations arises from cleaning and air conditioning of stations and
drinking and toilet demands for staff. Total water requirement for the station will be
518 KLD (185 KLD for Underground station, & 333 KLD for Elevated station) that will be
metthrough by public water supply system after taking necessary approvals. Daily
sewage flow is considered as 80% of the flushing water requirement hence total sewage
generated as 266 KLD. Solid Waste generated at the stations will be approximately of
the order of 17cum.
The depot area will be levelled through cut and fill method within the depot. Impacts
anticipated at depot sites are:
• Water supply
• Effluent and Sewage Generation
• Oil Pollution
• Noise Pollution
• Surface drainage changes
• Loss of trees
• Waste disposal
i. Water Supply
Water supply will be required for different purposes in the depot. A three day cycle is
assumed for outside Cleaning (wet washing on automatic washing plant) and thirty day
cycle for outside heavy Cleaning (wet washing on automatic washing plant and Front
Face, Vestibule/Buffer area, Floor, walls inside/outside and roof manually).Water
quantity required in the depot for train maintenance purpose is estimated at 68.47 KLD.
During operation Approx. 100 staff will be working in the depot. Water requirement for
staff working in depot is calculated as 11.8 KLD. Water demand will be met from supply
water by Municipal Corporation. Water demand for horticulture will be met from
recycled water.
About 55 KLD of Effluent and 9 KLD of Sewage will be generated from Depot. The
wastewater will be treated and will be recycled to use at depot horticulture purpose.
The remaining domestic waste /sewage generated at the Depot will be collected at one
suitable point inside the depot from where it will discharge to the nearest manhole of
existing sewerage system.
Oil spillage during change of lubricants, cleaning and repair processes, in the
maintenance Depot cum workshop for maintenance of rolling stock, is very common.
The spilled oil should be trapped in oil and grease trap. The collected oil would be
disposed off to authorised collectors, so as to avoid any underground/ surface water
contamination.
The main source of noise from depot is the operation of workshop. The roughness of
the contact surfaces of rail and wheel and train speed is the factors, which influence the
magnitude of rail - wheel noise.
v. Surface Drainage
In case of filling in low-lying area of depot sites, the surface drainage pattern may
change. Suitable drainage measures will be adopted to drain off the area suitably in the
nearby water body.
In addition to solid waste different types of waste will be generated during operation
phases from depot and which will consist of waste oil, waste tube lights/LED’s, batteries,
rubber, plastic, various ferrous/non-ferrous scrap, wooden scrap, paper waste.
RITES Ltd. Page 15-51
Detailed Project Report for Thane Metro Rail
Final DPR Chapter 15: Environmental and Social Impact Assessment
• Compensatory afforestation
• Right of Way, Alignment, Track design and Architecture
• Spatial Planning of Stations and Inter-Modal Integration
• Robust Design
• Provisions for Green Buildings and solar power
• Use of Energy and Water
• Supply of Construction Material
• Pre-casting yards and Material Stockpiling
• Construction Material Management and Housekeeping,
• Safety Management Measures,
• Labour Camp,
• Energy Management
• Hazardous Waste Management
• Construction and Demolition Waste Management
• Muck disposal
• Utility Plan,
• Air Pollution Control Measures,
• Noise Control Measures during construction,
• Vibration Control Measures during construction,
• Traffic Diversion/Management,
• Soil Erosion and subsidence Control,
• Noise Control Measures during operation
• Vibration Control Measures during operation,
• Water Supply, Sanitation and Solid Waste management,
• Rain water harvesting,
• Disaster and Risk Management.
tree to be cut. Hence, total 3,721 trees need to be planted. The estimated
compensatory afforestation cost will be about 2.04 Crore. The native plant species and
miscellaneous indigenous tree species recommended for afforestation. 3,721 trees, on
maturing will absorb about 81,118 kg of CO2 per year and will release 1,82,329 kg of
Oxygen per year.
Alignment has been kept elevated where adequate width of right of way on roads is
available. Geometric design of the alignment will be such as to optimize curvature. Track
design will incorporate welded rails and elastic fittings. Viaduct and elevated stations
shall be shaped to minimize visual intrusion.
Adequate and well-laid out space shall be designed for concourses and platforms,
escalators, elevators and staircases, lighting, turnstiles for normal and abnormal
operating conditions; optimal height / depth of the stations, forced ventilation shall be
provided. Physical and operational integration of metro with other modes shall be
planned. Adequate design of stations and multimodal integration prevents and
mitigates congestion at stations and safety is improved. Consumption of energy for
climate control, lighting and other facilities at stations is significantly reduced by proper
design of passenger flow inside stations, space & facilities inside stations.
Green building refers to both a structure and the using of processes that are
environmentally responsible and resource-efficient throughout a building's life-cycle:
from siting to design, construction, operation, maintenance, renovation, and
demolition. Green buildings help in better preservation of environment as in such
structures there are provisions for better saving of energy, water and CO2. Such
buildings also have better waste management arrangements. All stations and Depot
buildings can be designed as green buildings.
For the utilization of renewable energy, wherever feasible, installations for solar power
can be implemented on the roof of elevated stations and in Depots. Feasible solar plant
size works out to 246.4kw for each station considering 80% of roof top is available for
solar panels. Total annual electricity generation from stations works out to 7392MWh
which corresponds to 1,84,800MWh for 25 years life span. The installation cost for solar
system is about Rs30 crore. Installation of these solar panels can mitigate CO2 of the
order of 1,51,536ton which will be equivalent to 2,42,458 trees over life time. Feasible
solar plant size workout to 10.35 MW for depot considering 50% of roof top is available
for solar panel. Total annual electricity generation from depots works out to 15,525
MWh which corresponds to 3,88,125MWh for 25 years life span. The installation cost
for solar system is about Rs62.10 crore. Installation of these solar panels can mitigate
CO2 of the order of 3,18,263 ton which will be equivalent to 5,09,220 trees over life
time.
Requirement of electrical energy for climate control, lighting and other facilities at
stations shall be optimized by proper use of natural day/night light and design of
passenger flow inside stations and on streets outside stations. Installations for solar
power will be implemented at stations and Depot where feasible.
Water supply in stations for air conditioning, cleaning and use of staff and passengers
will be procured from municipal supply. Water for depots will be sourced from
municipal supply.
Sites for casting of structural concrete elements and material stockpiling will be decided
before start of construction. Land for these sites will be temporarily acquired such that
displacement of persons is not involved to the extent possible.
• Full height fence, barriers, barricades etc. shall be erected around the site in order to
prevent the surrounding area from excavated soil, rubbish etc, which may cause
inconvenience to and endanger the public.
• All stairways, passageways and gangways shall be maintained without any blockages or
obstructions. All emergency exits passageways, exits fire doors, break-glass alarm
points, fire-fighting equipment, first aid stations, and other emergency stations shall be
kept clean, unobstructed and in good working order.
• All surplus earth and debris shall be removed/disposed off from the working areas to
officially designated dumpsites. Trucks carrying sand, earth and any pulverized materials
etc. shall be covered while moving.
• Unused/surplus cables, steel items and steel scrap within the working areas shall be
removed to identified locations.
• All wooden scrap, empty wooden cable drums and other combustible packing
materials, shall be removed from work place to identified locations.
• Empty cement bags and other packaging material shall be properly stacked and
removed.
• Proper and safe stacking of material is of paramount importance at yards, stores and
such locations for future use. The storage area shall be well laid out with easy access
and material stored / stacked in an orderly and safe manner.
• Flammable chemicals/compressed gas cylinders shall be safely stored.
The contractor during the progress of work will provide, erect and maintain necessary
(temporary) living accommodation and ancillary facilities for labour will be provided as
per Section 32 of BOCWA. All temporary accommodation must be constructed and
maintained in such a fashion that uncontaminated water is available for drinking,
cooking and washing. Adequate health care is to be provided for the work force.In
addition the following facilities will be provided in the labour camps sanitation facilities
like toilets and drains, shelter at workplace, canteen facilities, first aid facilities, day
crèche facilities, health awareness campaigns to preventInfectious Diseases, facilities for
water supply and waste water treatment and solid waste management.
The contractor shall use and maintain equipment so as to conserve energy and shall be
able to produce demonstrable evidence of the same upon the request of officer of the
Project Implementation Unit.Measures to conserve energy include but not limited to
the following:
• Optimizing the use of tools, plants and equipment to perform tasks with correct
power,cable size and joint can control voltage drops,
• Use of energy efficient motors (90% efficiency or more) and pumps ( at least 80%
efficiency),
• Replacing inefficient lamps with the most efficient lamp for the purpose, taking into
account size, shape, colour and output of the lamp,
• Adequate and uniform illumination level at construction sites suitable for the task,
• Use of energy efficient air conditioner,
• Engine of DG set shall complies with CPCB norms,
• Planning in advance and selecting location to receive and store material such that
these are at the least distance from the place of use.
• Maintenance schedule
• The rooms shall be well insulated to enhance the efficiency of air conditioners and
the use of solar films on windows may be used where feasible.
The contractor shall identify the nature and quantity of hazardous waste generated as a
result of his activities and shall file an application for obtaining authorization with
Maharashtra Pollution Control Board (MPCB). Hazardous waste would mainly arise from
the maintenance of equipment which may include used engine oils, hydraulic fluids,
waste fuel, spend mineral oil/cleaning fluids from mechanical machinery, scrap batteries
or spent acid/alkali, spend solvents etc. Hazardous Waste needs to be stored in a
secure place and adequately labelled and packaged. The contractor shall maintain a
record of sale, transfer, storage of such waste and make these records available for
inspection.
Construction and Demolition (C&D) waste is part of solid waste that results from land
clearing, excavation, construction, demolition, remodelling and repair of structures,
roads and utilities. C&D waste has the potential to save natural resources (stone, river
sand, soil etc.) and energy, reduce transportation over long distances for dumping, and
reduce space occupied at landfill sites. C&D waste generated from metro construction
has potential use after processing, grading solid waste and recycling. Part of this waste
will be hazardous in nature.
The excavated material shall be graded such that part can be re-used in construction;
balance will be disposed. Before excavation, the Contractor will be required to test the
soil quality including heavy metals and the results will be compared with standards. If
the soil is contaminated, disposal will be done with due treatment or isolation of such
muck.
Disposal sites will be identified by Project Authority in consultation with TMC such that
pollution of water bodies and green areas are not impacted and displacement of
persons is not involved. The following activities will be involved for muck disposal:
• Material will be stabilised each day by watering or other accepted dust suppression
techniques. The muck shall be filled in the dumping site in layers and compacted
mechanically.
• Once the filling is complete, the entire muck disposal area shall be provided with a
layer of good earth on the top and covered with vegetation.
The proposed Metro alignment run along major arterial roads of the city, which serve
Institutional, Commercial and Residential areas. Large number of sub-surface, surface
and overhead utility services, viz. sewers, water mains, storm water drains, telephone
cables, electrical transmission lines, electric poles, traffic signals etc. already exist along
the proposed alignments. These utility services are essential and have to be maintained
in working order during different stages of construction by temporary/permanent
diversions or by supporting in position. As such, these may affect construction and
project implementation time schedule/costs, for which necessary planning/action needs
to be initiated in advance.
Prior to the actual execution of work at site, detailed investigation of all utilities and
location will be undertaken well in advance by making trench pit to avoid damage to
any utility. While planning for diversion of underground utility services e.g. sewer lines,
water pipe lines, cables etc., during construction of Metro, the following guidelines
could be adopted:
• Utility services shall be kept operational during the entire construction period and
after completion of project.
• Sewer lines and water supply lines are mainly affected in underground cut and cover
construction. These services are proposed to be maintained by temporarily replacing
them with CI/Steel pipelines and supporting them during construction, these will be
encased in reinforced cement concrete after completion of construction and
retained as permanent lines.
• Where permanent diversion of the affected utility is not found feasible, temporary
diversion with CI/Steel pipes without manholes is proposed during construction.
After completion of construction, these will be replaced with conventional pipes and
manholes.
• The elevated viaduct does not pose any serious difficulty in negotiating the
underground utility services, especially those running across the alignment. In such
situation, the spanning arrangement of the viaduct may be suitably adjusted to
ensure that no foundation need be constructed at the location, where, the utility is
crossing the proposed Metro alignment.
During the construction period, the impact on air quality will be mainly due to increase
in Particulate Matter (PM) along haul roads and emission from vehicles and construction
machinery. Mitigation measures which shall be adopted to reduce the air pollution are
presented below:
• The contractor shall take all necessary precautions to minimize fugitive dust emissions
from operations involving excavation, grading, and clearing of land and disposal of
waste. He shall not allow emissions of fugitive dust from any transport, handling,
Techniques such as impact pile driving can be substituted by press piling where feasible.
During construction exposure of workers to high noise levels can be minimized by job
rotation, automation, protective devices, noise barriers, and soundproof compartments,
control rooms etc. Measures to mitigate noise impact in construction zones shall be
implemented by the contractors the cost of which is included in the project engineering
cost.
Techniques such as impact pile driving can be substituted by press piling where feasible.
At locations where the alignment is close to protected monuments, heritage assets or
other sensitive structures, the contractor shall prepare a monitoring scheme including
building condition survey prior to construction at such locations. In case construction of
underground stations or tunnelling by NATM in hard rock which require controlled
blasting, laid down precautions and procedures in accordance with The Explosives Rules
2008 shall be implemented.
In order to retain satisfactory levels of traffic flow during the construction period; traffic
management and engineering measures need to be taken. They can be worker visibility,
road widening, traffic segregation, one-way movements, segregation of work zones,
signs, traffic diversions, acquisition of service lanes, etc. Various construction
technologies like cut and cover can be employed to ensure that traffic impedance is
minimized. Capital and operating cost are included in engineering cost and therefore is
not included in EMP.
During operation decongestion scheme should involve taxi and auto rickshaw stands, a
halting space for public buses, drop off-pick up for owned modes. Parking space at
stations if any is to be planned well. Capital and operating cost are included in
engineering cost and therefore is not included in EMP.
The surface area of erodible earth material exposed by clearing and grubbing,excavation
shall be limited to the extent practicable. Works such as construction oftemporary
berms, temporary mulches, seeding or other methods as necessary tocontrol erosion
shall be implemented. Mitigation measures include careful planning,timing of cut and fill
operations and re-vegetation. In general, construction works arestopped during
monsoon season.To manage land subsidence measures including maintaining adequate
distance of thetrench from existing structures adjacent to the trench, measures to
support the walls ofthe trench as well strengthen soil underneath adjacent structures
will be required.
During operation use of ballast-less track with elastic and absorbent fittings is a
standard provision for noise control. At depots use of green belt with vegetation of thick
foliage helps reduce noise; where site layout permits barrier blocks of less-vulnerable
buildings can be used; alternatively freestanding barrier walls can be built. Cost of noise
barriers required to be deployed during operation is not included in the project
engineering cost and is therefore estimated as part of EMP cost. Absorptive Noise
barriers for elevated section are recommended on the section passing adjacent to
Sanjay Gandhi National Park. The estimated cost for the noise barrier is 5.72 Crores.
Water requirement for construction will be met through municipal supply or through
sewage treated and re-used. During operation water supply, sanitation and toilets are
needed at the stations. Drinking water and raw water requirement for elevated stations
can be provided from municipal source in consultation with local agencies. During
operation rainwater harvesting will be carried out at stations and elevated corridors.
Non-hazardous municipal solid waste generated in stations will be collected and
transported to local municipal bins and thence to disposal site by municipality.
2293.4 mm. Considering a runoff coefficient of 0.85 the annual rainwater harvesting
potential of elevated stations and elevated section is estimated as 5,08,011 cubic
meterper year. Estimated cost for the rainwater harvesting for viaduct and elevated
stations is Rs2.9 crore.This is not included in the EMP cost.
a) Water Supply
Water will be sourced from municipal supply. This will be supplemented by re-use
ofused water from coach wash. Total water requirement is estimated as 11.8 KLD for
staff and 68.47 KLD for train maintenance. Estimated cost for water treatment plant will
be 207 Lakhs.
About 55 KLD of Effluent and 9 KLD of Sewage will be generated from Depot.
Thewastewater will be treated and will be recycled to use at depot horticulture
purpose.The remaining domestic waste /sewage generated at the Depot will be
collected at one suitable point inside the depot from where it will discharge to the
nearest manhole of existing sewerage system. Estimated cost for STP and ETP will be
134 Lakhs and 152 Lakhs Respectively.
d) Oil Pollution
Oil spillage from during change of lubricants, cleaning and repair processes in the
maintenance Depot cum workshop for maintenance of rolling stock should be trapped
in oil and grease traps and disposed off to authorised collectors, so as to avoid any
underground/ surface water contamination. These traps need to be installed before
effluent treatment plant.
e) Surface Drainage
The Storm water of the depot will be collected through the drain. Rain water harvesting
pits are provided at different locations in the drains and for surplus storm water, the
drainage system is connected to a nearby disposal site. The estimated cost for drainage
will be 103 Lakhs.
The greenbelt development / plantation in the depot area harmonizes the depot with
surrounding environment and acts as pollution sink / noise barrier. It will check
soilerosion. In addition to the compensatory afforestation, green belt is recommended
around the perimeter of the Depot. Treated sewage and effluent can be used for green
belt development. The estimated cost for green belt will be 69 Lakhs.
Solid waste generated from the Depot which includes hazardous waste will be taken
away by the cleaning contractor weekly and recycled/treated and disposed of at
designated waste disposal sites.
Top soil which is found to be rich in nutrients based on soil sampling shall be preserved
during construction and re-used for horticulture post-construction. Permanent
plantation on un-paved area shall be done. Complete dust interception can be achieved
by a 30 m belt of trees. Even a single row of trees may bring about 25 percent
reductions in airborne particulate matter.
i) Solar Power
Depot area can be utilised for renewable energy by installing roof top solar power plant.
Feasible solar plant size workout to 10.35 MW for depot considering 50% of roof top is
available for solar panel. Total annual electricity generation from depots works out to
15,525 MWh which corresponds to 3,88,125MWh for 25 years life span. The installation
cost for solar system is about Rs 62.10 crore. Installation of these solar panels can
mitigate CO2 of the order of 3,18,263 ton which will be equivalent to 5,09,220 trees over
life time.
Disaster risk is the combination of the severity and frequency of a hazard, the numbers
of people and assets exposed to the hazard, and their vulnerability to damage. The main
opportunity in reducing risk lies in reducing exposure and vulnerability. Disaster Risk
Management includes the following actions:
• Reduction and prevention: Measures to reduce existing and avoid new disaster
risks, for instance relocating exposed people and assets away from a hazard
area. In case of mass transit like Metro such measures are not actionable.
• Mitigation: The lessening of the adverse impacts of hazards and related
disasters. For instance implementing strict land use and building construction
codes. This aspect is accounted for in design and construction of the project.
• Transfer: The process of formally or informally shifting the financial
consequences of particular risks from one party to another, for instance by
insurance. This is not yet available.
• Preparedness: The knowledge and capacities of governments, professional
response and recovery organisations, communities and individuals to effectively
anticipate, respond to, and recover from the impacts of hazard events or
conditions, for instance installing early warning systems, identifying evacuation
routes and preparing emergency supplies.
• Water Quality,
• Air Quality,
• Noise and Vibration,
• Environmental Sanitation and Waste Disposal,
• Ecological Monitoring and Afforestation,
• Workers Health and Safety
Construction Phase
During construction stage environmental monitoring will be carried out for air quality,
noise levels, water quality and ecology. At this stage it is not possible to visualize the
exact number of locations where environmental monitoring must be carried out.
However keeping a broad view of the sensitive receptors and also the past experience
an estimate of locations has been made and are summarized in Table 15.31.
These numbers could be modified based on need when the construction actually
commences.
Water Quality
The water quality parameters are to be monitored during the entire period of project
construction. Monitoring should be carried out by NABL Accredited/MoEFCC recognized
private or Government agency. Water quality should be analyzed following the
procedures given in the standard methods. Parameters for monitoring will be as per IS:
10500. The monitoring points could be ground and surface water.
Air Quality
Air quality should be monitored at the locations of baseline monitoring. The parameter
recommended is Particulate Matter (PM2.5 and PM10), SO2, NOX, CO and HC. The
contractor will be responsible for carrying out air monitoring during the entire
construction phase under the supervision of MMRC.
Noise Monitoring
The noise levels will be monitored at construction sites for entire phase of construction
by the site contractor and under the supervision of MMRC.
Ecological Monitoring
The project authority in coordination with the Department of Forest shall monitor the
status of ecology/trees along the project corridors at least 4 times in a year during
construction phase in order to maintain the ecological environment. The
plantation/afforestation of trees by Department of Forest, Government of Maharashtra
will be review four times a year during construction phase.
Monitoring of health risk issues that might arise throughout the project life time will be
done. Epidemiological studies at construction sites will be performed to monitor the
potential spread of diseases. Regular inspection and medical checkups shall be carried
out to workers health and safety monitoring. Any reoccurring incidents such as
irritations, rashes, respiratory problems etc shall be recorded and appropriate
mitigation measures shall be taken. Contractor will be the responsible person to take
care health and safety of workers during the entire period of the construction and
project proponent is responsible to review/audit the health and safety measures/plans.
Even though the environmental hazards during the operation phase of the project are
minimal, the environmental monitoring will be carried out for air, noise, water and
ecology during operation phase of the project. The parameters monitored during
operation will be Particulate Matter (PM2.5 and PM10), SO2, NOx, CO and HC for ambient
air quality. Water quality parameters that will be monitored will be as per IS: 10500.
The monitoring schedule is presented in Table 15.32. Monitoring should be carried out
by NABL Accredited/MoEF recognized private or Government agency under the
supervision of MMRC. Project Operator will be responsible for successful environmental
monitoring of the proposed project during operation phase.
Pre-Construction Stage
The Maharashtra
(urban areas)
protection and
preservation of tree
Act, 1975
Construction Stage
Water (Prevention
and Control of
Pollution) Act 1974,
Operation Stage
• Controlled documents of approved SH&E Manual, EMP and EMoP with revisions thereof
and time schedule of such revisions if any.
• Controlled documents of formats of site inspection checklists with revisions thereof and
time schedule of such revisions if any
• Reports of site inspections, monitoring data, reports of internal or external audit,
observations of PIU and local statutory agency if any like Pollution Control Board, local
municipal authority, Forest Department etc. and subsequent remedial action taken by
Contractor if any.
• Records of coordination meetings of PIU/GC and Contractor with subsequent remedial
action taken by Contractor if any.
• Records of incident reporting and remedial action taken by Contractor if any and
followup of such incidents.
A typical EMS organization is depicted in Figure 15.19. One indicative activity i.e.,
approval of EMS documents is shown in this organisation chart.
15.6.2.1 Training
The training for engineers and managers will be imparted by MMRC on regular basis to
implement the environmental protection clauses of the tender document and to
implement the best environmental practices during the construction phase. Apart from
training, programmes should include guidelines for safety, methods of disaster
prevention, action required in case of emergency, fire protection, environmental risk
analysis etc.The cost involved for such programmes is estimated as Rs 9.60 lakh. Details
are given in Table 15.35.
Estimated environmental cost for the proposed metro corridors is about Rs 13.09 crore.
Summary of cost estimate is given in the following Table 15.37.
Project Director
Project Implementation Unit (PIU)
Development of proposed metro rail corridor in Thane involves acquisition of land for
stations, running sections, TSS, Depot and for other facilities. Acquisition of this private
land may cause social disruption and economic loss for the families/people who are
likely to be affected. While implementing the project, there is a need to take into
account these disturbances and losses due to the project, their impact on socio-
economic condition of the people and plan for their mitigation measures to minimize
any negative impacts through SIA. The present preliminary SIA study is only for the
requirement of Detailed Project Report (DPR).The objectives of this study are to (i)
socio-economic profile of affected families/people in the project area,(ii) examine
potential impacts of project on socio-economic condition of affected families/people,
and (iii) develop socially, culturally and economically appropriate measures for
mitigation of adverse effects of the project
The SIA which includes RAP has been prepared in accordance with the State and
national policy and guidelines. The input tasks are desk research, site visits and
identification and enumeration of affected structures and families, sample socio-
economic survey and local public consultation.
The project shall require the acquisition/transfer of 28.6479 ha of land. Out of the total
land, 21.8491 ha is private land and 6.7988 is government land.
Type of structures
STATION/AFFECTED AREA Commercial Residential Other Total
LOKMANYA NAGAR BUS DEPOT 10 0 1 11
SHIVAI NAGAR 12 2 0 14
NEELKANTH TERMINAL 3 0 0 3
DONGRIPADA 13 0 2 15
PATLIPADA 1 0 0 1
NEAR SHIVAJI CHOWK 0 15 0 15
NEW THANE 1 0 0 1
WAGLE ESTATE 0 0 1 1
TOTAL 40 36 4 80
Note: Other structures include bus stop, Govt. structures, community toilet and temple.
Table 15.39 depicts corridor wise fully affected structures. Out of the total structures
about 68 structures are fully affected. Among the total fully affected structures, majority
(36) is residential structures and 30 are commercial structures.
Out of the total partially affected structures four are residential, 11 are commercial and
five are residential cum commercial structures. It is observed that majority of structures
which are likely to be affected either partially or fully are commercial (Table 15.40).
Type of structures
STATION/ AFFECTED AREA Commercial Residential Other Total
NEELKANTH TERMINAL 3 0 0 3
DONGRIPADA 1 0 0 1
PATLIPADA 1 0 0 1
NEAR SHIVAJI CHOWK 0 0 0 0
NEW THANE 1 0 0 1
TOTAL 12 0 0 12
Out of the total structures which are likely to be affected due to development of
proposed metro rail project,45 structures are pucca,15 are semi-puccaand remaining 19
structures are kutchha (Table 15.41).
Impact on Families/Persons: About 132 families consisting 620 persons shall be affected
due to the proposed metro project. Majority of families shall be affected in
ShivaiNagar,LokmanyaNgar Bus Depot and Dongripada. Area/Station wise number of
PAFs and PAPs are presented in Table 15.42. Exact number of affected and displaced
families/persons will be found out during detailed Census/Baseline Socio-Economic
Survey (BSES) after peg marking of alignment on the ground.
Categories of affected families are given in Table 15.43. In total, there are 51 title
holders and 81 non-title holders affected families. Out of the total titleholders, 48 PAFs
are commercial and 3 PAFs are residential. Similarly, out of the total non-titleholders, 42
PAFs are commercial tenants and 39 PAFs are residential.
Loss of Residence: Out of the total affected families 58 PAFs shall be displaced physically
as their residential units are getting affected due to proposed project. Majority of
residential PAFs will be displaced at Raila Devi and near ShivajiChowk.
Loss of Business: Out of the total affected families 69 PAFs shall be displaced physically
as their commercial units are getting affected due to proposed project. Majority of
residential PAFs will be displaced at Raila Devi and near ShivajiChowk.
Out of the total partially affected structures four are residential, 11 are commercial and
five are residential cum commercial structures. It is observed that majority of structures
which are likely to be affected either partially or fully are commercial (Table 15.44).
Impact on Community Structures: One religious structure at Wagle Estate and two
community toilets at Dongripada are likely to be affected.
As the proposed alignment for Thane Metro Rail Project is part of proposed
Development Plan Road (DP Road) in Thane City, the sample socio-economic survey has
been conducted among the PAFs except those are affected due to DP Plan road.
Table 15.41 shows demographic characteristics (i.e. sex, age and marital status) of
sample PAPs. Among the surveyed population it is observed that 57% are male and
remaining 43% are female. The sex ratio is 753 per 1000 males. The persons of surveyed
families have been categorized into four age groups. The distribution of person’s age in
various group shows that around 25% of the total persons belong to below 17 years;
about 35% belong to the 18-34 years age group that is potentially productive group. A
little more than one-third belongs to 35-39 years (34%). About 6% of total persons
belong to above 60 years, who are dependent population. It is observed that majority of
persons belong to 35 to 60 years age group and average age of surveyed population is
30 years. It is observed that out of total surveyed people, majority of them (65%) are
married, and about 32% are unmarried.
Table 15.45 shows social characteristics like religious and social groups, family pattern
and its size of PAFs and educational level of PAPs. The study result shows that about
87% of the surveyed families are Hindu followed by Muslim (12%) and others (1%) are
Jains. About 50% belong to General Caste followed by OBCs (25%). About 16% are
Scheduled Caste and 9% are Scheduled Tribe. Majority of surveyed families are nuclear
(75%) followed by joint (17%). About 46% of families are medium and small in size
each and remaining 8% families having more than seven members. The analysis
indicates that out of the total surveyed people, about 9% are illiterate. So far as
educational attainment is concerned 17% are educated up to primary class, 44% are
educated up to upper primary, about one-third studied up to high school and 18%
have studied up to higher secondary level. Other than this, about 11% of persons have
attained college.
Table 15.46 shows household main occupation, monthly income & expenditure, and
earning and dependent members.The survey results in Table 15.39 shows that majority
of head of the surveyed households are employed in some activities. Out of the total
surveyed families, majority (52.63%) of them are involved in business, 28% are in other
activites, 13.16% are in private job. The majority of families monthly income is
between Rs. 12000 to Rs. 20000/-. The average income of a families is Rs.21184/- per
month. Monthly per capita income is Rs.4859/-. Average family expenditure is
Rs.17736/- per month. On an average earning member per family is one and
dependent is two.
constructed houses and shops in resettlement site. 12% families preferred land for
land and only 1% preferred cash assistance. Proximity to school, hospital and market
followed by income from business activity, daily jobs are considered as main factors
while providing alternate place to displaced families.
accessibility is higher. If Government want their land, they should need to resettle
properly and house need to be provided.
It was observed during socio-economic survey as well as public consultations that
people were curious and happy that metro will be reality but showed their grave
concern regarding resettlement and rehabilitation of project affected families.
15.8.9 Applicable Laws, Guidelines for Land Acquisition, Rehabilitation and Resettlement
As per the observation received from Maha Metro, following guidelines and circulars of
Government of Maharashtra are applicable for land acquisition, rehabilitation and
resettlement compensation.
• Direct purchase method ensures that the property owners are negotiated directly
for purchase of land by giving them an amount amicably accepted by the affected
person which is 250% of the market value. In the process the concerned person is
getting better price for the involved land and structure. This has been adopted for
this DPR.
Project Implementation Unit (PIU): The PIU headed by the Project Director (PD) is
responsible for the overall execution of the project and planning and implementation of
resettlement and rehabilitation component during preparation, implementation and
post implementation phase of the project. The PIU will coordinate with all implementing
agencies and monitoring the progress of the project.
Social Management Unit (SMU): MahaMetro shall set up a Social Management Unit
(SMU) which shall look after land acquisition, resettlement and rehabilitation activities.
A Sr.Social Development Officer (SSDO) will be appointed on full time by MahaMetro.
The SMU shall ensure that all land acquisition issues are handled according to the
approved Rehabilitation & Resettlement Plan. It will also monitor that all the procedural
and legal issues involved in land acquisition are fulfilled. The SMU will assist for getting
all the necessary clearances and implementation of the resettlement activities prior to
start of any civil work.
Other than disputes relating to ownership rights under the court of law, GRC will review
grievances involving all resettlement benefits, compensation, relocation, replacement
cost and other assistance.
➢ Identification of Cut-off Date (CoD) and notification for land acquisition. For non-
titleholders the cut-off date shall be date of start of Census Survey.
➢ Verification of properties of PAFs/PAPs and estimation of their type and level of
losses.
➢ Preparation of list of PAFs/PAPs for relocation/rehabilitation.
➢ Relocation and rehabilitation of the PAPs.
Timing of Resettlement
The resettlement process must be completed before the start of civil works on the
particular corridor. Requisite procedure will be developed by the Maha Metro to carry
out resettlement of PAPs located within Corridor of Impact (CoI), before the civil work
starts on any section of the project. All activities related to the land acquisition and
resettlement shall be planned to ensure that 100% compensation is paid prior to
displacement and the affected people will be given at least four months of notice to
vacate their property before civil work begins. Stretches which are free of encroachment
and other encumbrances will be handed over first to the contractor.
Implementation Schedule
The period for implementation of RAP has been taken as two and half years. However,
monitoring and evaluation will continue beyond the period of implementation. The R&R
activities of proposed project are in three phases: project preparation, RAP
implementation and Monitoring and Evaluation (M&E).RAP implementation schedule is
given in Figure 15.20.
16. D I S A S T E R M A N A G E M E N T &
SEC URITY M EASURE S
Disaster is a crisis that results in massive damage to life and property, uproots the
physical and psychological fabric of the affected communities and outstrips the
capacity of the local community to cope with the situation. Disasters are those
situations which cause acute distress to passengers, employees and outsiders and may
even be caused by external factors. As per the disaster management act, 2005
"disaster" means a catastrophe, mishap, calamity or grave occurrence in any area,
arising from natural or manmade causes, or by accident or negligence which results
insubstantial loss of life or human suffering or damage to, and destruction of,
property, or damage to, or degradation of, environment, and is of such a nature or
magnitude as to be beyond the coping capacity of the community of the affected area.
World Health Organization (WHO), defines disaster as “Any occurrence that causes
damage, economic disruption, loss of human life and deterioration of health and
services on a scale sufficient to warrant an extra ordinary response from outside the
affected community or area.”
Disaster brings about sudden and immense misery to humanity and disruptions to
normal human life in established social and economic patterns. It has the potential to
cause large scale human suffering.
Metro systems will carry thousands of passengers daily, therefore the effect of any
disaster spread over in operational area (station, tunnels, viaducts etc.) is likely to be
considerable. It may also cause destruction or damage to infrastructure, buildings and
communication channels of Metro.
Metro specific disasters can be classified into two broad categories as Man-made and
Natural.
• Terrorist attack
• Bomb threat/ Bomb blast
• Hostage Situations
• Release of Chemical or biological gas in trains, stations or tunnels
• Fire in metro buildings, underground/ elevated infrastructures, power stations,
train depots etc.
• Train accident and train collision/derailment of a passenger carrying train
• Sabotage
• Stampede
b. Natural Disaster
• Earthquakes
• Floods
16.4 4
OBJECTIVES OF DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN
16.5 5
PREPAREDNESS OF STAFF FOR DISASTERS
Being a technologically complex system with a new set of staff, intensive mock drills
for the staff concerned is very essential to train them to become fully conversant with
the actions required to be taken up while handling emergencies. They also need to be
trained in appropriate communication skills while addressing passengers during
incident management to assure them about their wellbeing seeking their cooperation.
Since learning can only be perfected by ‘doing’ the following Mock Drills are
considered essential:
• Making announcements
• Protecting the area
• Summoning assistance
• Using firefightingequipment locally available
• Passenger evacuation in case of need
• Announcement to passengers.
• Closing of booking offices.
• Opening of AFC gates/ Emergency exits
• Changing the direction of escalators.
vi. Hot line telephone communication with state disaster management authority.
16.5.1 Authorities Coordination in Case of Disaster, Command & Control at the National,
State & District Level
i. With effect from such date as the Central Government may, by notification in the
Official Gazette appoint in this behalf, there shall be established for the purposes
of this Act (The Disaster Management Act, 2005), an authority to be known as the
National Disaster Management Authority.
ii. The National Authority shall consist of the Chairperson and such number of other
members, not exceeding nine, as may be prescribed by the Central Government
and, unless the rules otherwise provide, the National Authority shall consist of the
following:
• The Prime Minister of India, who shall be the Chairperson of the National
Authority, Ex officio;
• Other members, not exceeding nine, to be nominated by the Chairperson
of the National Authority.
iii. The Chairperson of the National Authority may designate one of the members
nominated under clause (b) of sub-section (ii) to be the Vice-Chairperson of the
National Authority.
iv. The term of office and conditions of service of members of the National Authority
shall be such as may be prescribed.
i. Every State Government shall, as soon as may be after the issue of the notification
under sub-section (1) of section 3, by notification in the Official Gazette, establish a
State Disaster Management Authority for the State with such name as may be
specified in the notification of the State Government.
ii. A State Authority shall consist of the Chairperson and such number of other
members, not exceeding nine, as may be prescribed by the State Government and,
unless the rules otherwise provide, the State Authority shall consist of the following
members, namely:
iii. The Chairperson of State Authority may designate one of the members nominated
under clause (b) of sub-section (ii) to be the Vice- Chairperson of the State
Authority.
iv. The Chairperson of the State Executive Committee shall be Chief Executive Officer
of the State Authority, the Chief Minister shall be the Chairperson of the Authority
established under this section.
v. The term of office and conditions of service of members of the State Authority shall
be such as may be prescribed.
iii. Command & Control at the National, State & District Level
The mechanism to deal with natural as well as manmade crisis already exists and that
it has a four tier structure as stated below:
Cabinet Secretary
ii. Crisis Management Group (CMG) under chairmanship of Union Home
Secretary.
iii. State Level Committee under the chairmanship of Chief Secretary.
All agencies of Government at National, State and district levels will function in
accordance with guidelines and directions given by these committees.
Every office of the Government of India and of the State Government at the district
level and the local authorities shall, subject to the supervision of the District Authority:
ii. Coordinate the preparation and the implementation of its plan with those of the
other organizations at the district level including local authority, communities and
other stakeholders;
iv. Submit a copy of its disaster management plan, and of any amendment thereto,
to the District Authority.
16.6 6
PROVISIONS AT METRO STATIONS/OTHER INSTALLATIONS
necessary.
The above said provisions are suggestive and an exhaustive set of facilities have to be
provided based on site conditions, location and other internal and external factors.
Fire has been recognized as one of the most dreaded accidents on metros primarily because of
large concentration of passengers at stations and in trains. Fire prevention and prompt
response to any incident of fire or smoke emission is therefore the most important component
of disaster management on Metros. For better management and safety from fire disaster on
metro system, various signages like prohibition signs, warning signs, emergency escape signs
etc. shall be installed as mentioned in NFPA 130,Standard for Fixed Guideway Transit and
Passenger Rail Systems and National Building Code of India,2016 part 4. Universally accepted
measures for fire prevention include:
• Non accumulation of garbage in the metro station premises and inside trains
• All staffs posted at stations must ensure instructions are rigidly enforced by
regular checks.
In the event of fire and / or smoke either in train , station premises, right of way
including the tunnel or other metro premises, every Metro Rail official whether on
duty or not shall,
• Report the occurrence to the nearest Station Controller (SC) or Chief Controller
(OCC). A reporting system shall be developed as per NFPA Guidelines and
officials shall be trained accordingly.
• Take all possible steps to extinguish fire like using portable fire extinguishers,
blankets, water, sand etc. that is available on site depending on the source of
fire. Standards steps/measures to extinguish may be followed from NBC of
India, 2016 and NFPA 130.
• Disconnect electric supply, if required
B. Fire in a Train
The guidelines set out below are based on the content analysis of past accidents on
other Metros and are in the nature of best practices. Since every fire incident is
unique, the train operator is to exercise quick judgment based on:
The Train Operator shall open all train doors on the platform side and ask passengers
to vacate the train. He will inform OCC and Station Controller and take assistance from
station staff as required.
A water pipeline should run along the entire underground Metro corridor. These
pipelines have hydrants fixed every 15 m where hose pipes can be connected. The
pipes are of great help to quickly extinguish any fire outbreak. Each underground
section should equip with one to three cross passages between the up and down
tunnels. These passages can be used for speedy evacuation of commuters in case of
emergency. There is a Fire Detection and Suppression system equipped to
automatically activate alarms for Vents, Fans and Dampers & Suppression equipment.
The system is operated from a panel located in the Station Control Room.
A wet Fire Main System covers the station area as well as the entire length of the
tunnels. In addition there are automatic sprinklers, inert gas based suppression
systems and portable fire extinguishers at various locations. Immediately on receipt of
information about a train with fire incident held up between stations – Auxiliary
System Controller (ASC) will
Before starting evacuation, ASC/ Traction Power Controller (TPC) shall check for the
adequacy of Tunnel Lighting and correct Operation of TVS & ECS and Tunnel lights can
be switched on from Station control room by BMS controller/ nominated E&M staff.
• In areas, where the passengers enter for purchasing tickets or leave the station
after performing their train journey including lifts, staircases and escalators.
• Concourse
• Auxiliary electrical substations.
In case of fire in areas where passengers enter/leave the station premises, the
endeavor of station staff should be to cordon off the area so that it is not
approachable for intending Metro users or by Metro passengers leaving the station
area.
In the event of a train collision involving Metro trains, any employee witnessing,
discovering or being involved in a train collision shall inform the Operations Control
Center (OCC) and provide the following information-
If the employee making the first report is a Train Operator (TO), Traffic Controller (TC)
shall instruct the Train Operator to secure the train, inform the passengers about the
incident, check if any passenger or employee needs medical attention. The TO will
inform TC accordingly. If the other TO has not communicated with OCC, TC will ask TO
to collect similar information about the second train and report.
• Look for presence of smoke or fire. Furnish details of visible damage, if any coaches are
derailed or
• If the other track is obstructed.
• The OCC /TC shall instruct Train Operators of trains in approach of the collision site, in
both directions, to stop their trains at stations and report their positions.
• In the event of collision taking place involving his train, the train operator shall
inform OCC by giving as many details as possible.
• In case of adjacent track is infringed, he will first protect the adjacent track to
avoid multiple accidents as per prescribed procedure.
• He will inform passengers about the incident advising them about rescue and relief
arrangements being made.
• He shall quickly assess the situation particularly in respect of passenger’s injury
and again inform OCC with as much details as available seeking medical and other
assistance as required.
• He will render first aid to passengers and check for injury and damage to the train
(both his train and other train).
• Shall seek OCC’s permission for passenger evacuation.
• Shall await further instructions from OCC.
• The Station Controller on receipt of information about collision at his station shall
inform OCC.
• Arrange for immediate medical assistance as required.
• Inform Metro rail police/Local police.
• Mobilize the staff for evacuation of passengers and rendering of first aid to the
injured and their hospitalization as required.
• Inform passenger waiting at the station of the likely delays.
• Station controller will evacuate passengers as per instructions of OCC.
• On receiving information about train collision the Traffic Controller shall block all
movement on both the tracks to protect the site of accident.
• Inform Maha-Metro Disaster Management Team members.
• And other designated Maha-Metro departments and Personnel.
• Mobilize medical assistance as required.
• Inform the train depot to be in readiness to move rescue and relief train.
• Instruct Station Superintendent to depute staff for evacuation of passengers and
providing medical aid to the injured.
• Regulate train services and inform all stations on the route about the likely
dislocation in train services.
• Activate ventilation system based on condition of the scene (for tunnel section
only).
• Arrange for Public Address announcements to be made to passengers in trains and
at stations.
• Initiate operating procedure to relieve train congestion at collision site by: a) Single
track operation (Single Line Working), b) Turning trains on both sides of collision
site (Short Loop Operation) etc.
• The OCC Chief Controller shall inform the Disaster Management Team, ED/OP,
GM/OP and all controllers in OCC, the Police/Metro Police and Security Controller
to secure the accident scene and Station Superintendent/Station Controllers on
the affected line. Chief Controller shall also inform emergency services. All
controllers in OCC shall inform their respective officers, maintenance/emergency
team and others as applicable.
E. Medical Assistance
The TO/SC requesting medical assistance to OCC shall provide an estimate of the likely
number of people requiring medical assistance and also indicate the most convenient
access point for medical personnel to enter. (The names and addresses of person
requiring/receiving medical assistance and the names of medical agencies and
personnel shall be recorded in the Accident Log book maintained at site/at OCC).
• TC shall instruct TOs of trains approaching the derailment site on both tracks to
stop their trains and report their positions.
• Inform the depot to be in readiness to move the rescue and relief train.
• Regulate train services and inform all stations on the route about the likely
dislocation in train services.
• Activate ventilation system based on condition of the scene (for tunnel section
only).
• Request assistance of Police / Metro Police / Security/ Watch & Ward for crowd
control at critical stations.
C. Medical Assistance:
The employee requesting medical assistance to OCC shall provide an estimate of likely
number of people requiring medical assistance and will also indicate the most
convenient access point for medical personnel to enter. (The names and addresses of
passengers requiring medical assistance and the names of medical agencies and
personnel shall be recorded in the Accident Log book maintained at site/in OCC).
Increase in terrorist actions against public transport worldwide, indicates that public
transport systems are becoming more vulnerable and potential targets for terrorist. It
is clear that preventing terrorist activities is the primary responsibility of security
agencies and state police.
However, concern for passenger wellbeing and their security and adverse effects of
such mishaps on the public image of transport systems itself, requires best possible
level of preparedness for prevention of such threats within Metro premises. Key
components of such preparatory and preventive action include:
• Shall visit the affected spot, assess the extent of impact on human life and also
how it may affect train services.
• Sound the hooter and get the station premises vacated of all the passenger
• Depute staff to announce at 5 minute interval, through the station PA system
what has happened and what the passengers are expected to do without getting
panic.
• Mobilize resources to render first aid and evacuate the injured.
• In case any person is seen moving in a suspicious manner, he may be detained for
interrogation with the help of security staff.
• Passengers found near the affected area may also be asked about their firsthand
knowledge of the occurrence and their statement with name and addresses
recorded.
• Inform Police/Metro Police and depute station security staff to protect and
cordon the site to preserve the clues and leave the site undisturbed for police
investigation.
• Inform Police/Metro Police and security personnel and ask them to rush to the
spot of occurrence.
• Mobilize Medical Assistance and/ or Fire Services to reach the spot.
• Inform the DMT and other Maha-Metro departments and personnel.
• Hold trains at stations. Train movement shall only be resumed after confirming
that the running of train through the affected station is safe, till the position
becomes clear regular announcement to be made to passengers in train and at
station of the likely delay and evacuation procedures started. The entire Metro
network shall remain closed till rescue and search operations have been
completed. Revenue operations shall only be started after ensuring that the
system is fully safe and secure.
Of all the cases of terrorist attack, those within a train will have most disastrous
consequences and very prompt action will be necessary to restrict the damage to men
and material. Such a situation may include:
There may be derailment of the train with large scale damage to the train and fixed
structures as well as injury to the passengers in the train. In case of derailment, the
train will immediately come to a stop. The Train Operator shall immediately inform
Traffic Controller about the occurrence and ask for immediate assistance as required.
TO shall seek permission for evacuation of passengers. In case the situation does not
permit detrainment from one end, it may be arranged from both ends. The injured
passengers should be evacuated as soon as the Medical Team arrives on the spot.
Whenever other terrorist activities described above produce loud noise, explosion, fire
and smoke, release of lethal or harmful gases works silently and can only be generally
inferred from-
• Unusual smell
• Passengers or employees complaining of Breathing problems- including
choking/fainting, Severe eye/Skin irritation and Vomiting etc.
Receiving any such complaint the Train Operator or Station Controller/ Station
Manager will take serious note of it and immediately inform OCC to take prompt
action to handle the emergency as case of suspected release of poisonous gases. If gas
release is detected in a train, TO will inform OCC and expeditiously bring the train to
the next station, open train doors and request all passengers to detrain. He will
personally check with station staff, security and Police/Metro Police that the train has
been completely vacated.
To prevent further spreading of gas in platform area and to help Police and Medical
teams to investigate and identify the gas he will close the train doors. In the event of
gas release in station premises, the station should be fully vacated and kept closed
unless certified free of contamination by medical authorities.
Whereas, release of gases on the Right of Way in Rail corridors may not have serious
impact, with gas spreading into atmosphere. In tunnel sections it will be necessary to
Normal operation should only be resumed after running of a trial train with Police,
Medical and metro authorities confirming that the section has been made free of
contamination.
On being informed about an earthquake in the city of Thane or experiencing the same,
OCC Traction Power Controller (TPC) will switch off Traction power Supply in a manner
which does not shut down station supplies informing the Traffic Controller who will
instruct the TOs to stop their trains and report their position.
• If at station, he will not move the train, inform OCC and advice passengers to
remain inside the train.
• After receiving OCC instructions that the earthquake has subsided, the trains
waiting at stations will detrain passengers.
• For the trains held up between stations, TOs to visually check the track. If the
track is unaffected and there are no visible obstruction after informing OCC/TC,
train can be moved at walking speed up to the next station where passengers
shall be detrained.
• Train Operator (TO) will keep passengers informed of the problem andrequests
them to maintain calm.
In case of any doubt, OCC will arrange for passenger evacuation on the right of way as
per procedure. Normal operation of revenue trains shall only be resumed after the
track and structures department issuing of a certificate of fitness for normal
operations which will be issued after detailed physical inspection. OCC and Station
Superintendent/Station Controllers will continuously inform passengers of the
situation and likely time for commencement of train services.
Metro Rail System has emerged as the most reliable mode of urban transportation
system in India. The inherent characteristics of metro system make it an ideal target
for terrorists and miscreants. Metro systems are typically open and dynamic systems
which carry thousands of commuters. Moreover, high cost of infrastructure, its
economic impacts to the society, being the life line of city with high news value pose
greater threat to its security. Security is a relatively new challenge in the context of
public transport. It addresses problems caused intentionally and differs from safety
which addresses problems caused accidentally. Security problems or threats are
caused by people whose actions aim to undermine or disturb the public transport
system and/or to harm passengers or staff. These threats range from daily operational
security problems such as disorder, vandalism and terror threat.
The public transportation system is increasingly becoming important for urban areas
to prosper in the face of challenges such as reduction in congestion and pollution.
Therefore, security system for public transportation like metro rail plays an important
role in helping the system to become the preferred mode choice for commuters.
Therefore, provision of an excellent and reliable security system is a prerequisite for
metro system for increasing its market share. Metro railway administration must
ensure that security model keep pace with the rapid expansion of the metro and
changing security scenario.
Security means protection of human, intellectual assets and infrastructure either from
criminal interference, destruction by terrorists or criminals or incidental to
technological failures or natural hazardous events. Three important pillars of security
are as follows:
Staff interaction with passengers create a sense of re-assurance which cannot fully be
achieved by technology. For human factor to be more effective, staff has to be
qualified, trained, well equipped and motivated. The staff members should be skillful,
trained, drilled and experienced. The security risk assessment is the first step for
understanding the needs and prioritizing resources. The organization of security
should be clear and consistent. Security incidents, especially major ones, often happen
without warning. Emergency and contingency plans must be developed,
communicated and tested in advance. There are number of technologies which can be
used to enhance security e.g. surveillance systems. The objectives of the security
systems differ i.e., detection of the plan before an attack, deny the access for carrying
out an attack and mitigation measures after an attack.
There are three different phases associated with the security system in metro. These
phases are as under:
i. Prevention
These are the measures which can prevent a security breach from taking place. These
can be identified by conducting risk assessment and gathering intelligence. Prevention
begins with the daily operational security problems. Care has to be given in controlling
unused, damaged properties which could otherwise prove to be a breeding ground for
more serious crimes.
ii. Preparedness
iii.Recovery
Urban transport system should have laid down procedures/instructions for quick
recovery of normal service after an incident. Financial health is important for the
recovery operation, but it also sends a clear message to public, it reassures passengers
and gives them confidence to continue using the system. Communication is key to the
quick restoration after such incidents. Restoration should also include an evaluation
process for the lessons learnt.
The responsibility of the Security lies with the state. Security in public requires clear
governance. Responsibility should be clearly defined. In the present scenario, this is
the responsibility of the State Government to ensure secured travel in Thane Metro.
For providing an efficient security system in metro station areas the following
provisions are suggested:
i. CCTV coverage of all metro stations with provision of monitoring in the Station
Security Room as well as at a Centralized Security Control Room with video wall,
computer with access to internet TV with data connection, printer and telephone
connection (Land Line and EPBX) for proper functioning, cluster viewing for
stations.
ii. Minimum one Baggage Scanners on all entry points (1 per AFC array). Additional
requirement of baggage scanners at heavily crowed stations i.e at interchange may
also be required.
iii. Multi-zone Door Frame Metal Detector (DFMD) minimum three per entry (2 per
AFC array). The number can increase in view of the footfall at over crowed
stations.
iv. Hand held Metal Detector (HHMD) as per requirement of security agency,
minimum two per entry, which varies from station to station with at least 1.5 per
DFMD installed at the station.
17.1.1. Coverage
Cost estimate for Thane Metro Ring corridor has been prepared covering civil,
electrical, signaling and telecommunications works, rolling stock, environmental
protection, rehabilitation, etc. at July 2023 price level.
While preparing the capital cost estimates, various items have generally been
grouped under three major heads on the basis of (i) Route km length of
alignment, (ii) Number of units of that item and (iii) Item being an independent
entity. All items related with alignment, construction, permanent way, OHE,
Signaling &Telecommunication, etc. have been estimated at rate per Route
km/km basis.
Cost Estimate has been updated based on the rates for individual components
as per Benchmarking of Cost Estimates for Metro Rail Projects by MoHUA
published in February’ 2019, escalated @ 5% per annum.
Basic cost is exclusive of taxes and duties. i.e. GST and Custom duty. Taxes and
duties mainly comprising of latest prevalent GST & Custom duty are worked out
for each corridor. Public procurement order-2017, issued by Department of
Industrial Policy on minimum Indian component in Procurement in Metro Rail
systems have also been taken into consideration.
a. Finalization of alignment, location of stations, entry / exits etc. has been done with
the objective of keeping land requirement to the bare minimum. For this purpose,
alignment, stations, depots, parking and Property Development (PD) have been
planned in the State Government land unless and until it becomes unavoidable to
plan these facilities in Central Government land or private land. The summary of land
requirement for the Corridor is as Table 17.1.
b. The land area for piers of elevated alignment, elevated stations falling over the
existing road and entry/exit falling on road / State Government land has not
been accounted for in the land requirement and costing as present land use is
not getting affected by these facilities. Land requirement for other metro
utilities like ramp, off the road elevated stations, depot, RSS, ancillary buildings
etc. have been accounted as far as per details in subsequent paras.
c. Rate of Central Govt. land required on permanent basis has been taken from
Circle rates. No solatium has been applied to the basic land cost.
d. Rate of State Govt. Land required on permanent basis has been taken from Circle
rates. No solatium has been applied to the basic land cost. In case, State Govt. is
in a position to provide its land free of cost or at reduced rates, it will further
improve the financial statistics of the project.
e. Rate of Central Govt. land and State Govt. land required on temporary basis for
5 years construction period, has been taken @ 1% Per annum on Circle rates. No
solatium has been applied to the basic land cost.
f. Rate of Private land have been taken from Circle rates. As per Policy of Govt. of
Maharashtra, compensation for land in Urban areas (Municipal corporation and
Municipal Council areas) is computed as under:
g. Efforts have been made to provide parking for maximum possible stations.
Details of land required for parking is mentioned separately in relevant chapter.
h. Rates of Structures have been taken from Circle rates after applying depreciation
(depending on age of structures). Additional 4% water charges,4% sanitary
charges & 4% Electrical charges has been taken into account for calculation of
structures rates.
i. The total cost of Land including escalation for first three years works out to be
Rs. 3,414.20 Crore for Thane Metro based on Ready Reckoner. However, latest
RR rates shall be applicable during the time of acquisition.
As explained above, the rates of items other than land are based on
Benchmarking of Cost Estimates for Metro Rail Projects by MoHUA published in
February 2019. The rates of cost components at July 2023 price level are given
in Table 17.2. As per soil conditions mentioned in Chapter 5, TBM will be working
in mixed soil conditions. The TBM should be capable of excavating soils and rocks
both, hence combination of scrappers and disc cutters will be used under such
situations. Secondly, Thane is situated in seismic zone III of the seismic zonation
map of India. Therefore, suitable seismic coefficient commensurate to seismic
Zone III have to be adopted in the design of the structures. Considering the
topography of Thane for the UG section by T.B.M in alignment & formation and
Similar Geotechnical conditions and seismic zonation have been observed in Pune.
Serial number of items in the table denotes the serial number of item in detailed
cost estimate. On other items, Escalation of 5% per annum is applied to bring the
rates at current price level of July’2023.
TABLE 17.2: BASIS OF RATES OTHER THAN LAND
S. No. Item Unit Rate
(Rs. In Crores)
2.0 Alignment and Formation
2.1 Elevated section including viaduct length in station R. Km. 46.10
2.2 Underground section by T.B.M and cut & cover section R. Km. 165.00
excluding station length
2.3 Elevated to at-grade depot entry R. Km. 11.62
5.0 P-Way
5.1 Ballastless track for elevated & underground Section Route Km. 8.22
5.2 Ballasted track for Depot Track Km. 4.86
5.3 Ballasted track for Depot entry/exit Route Km. 8.22
6.0 Traction & power supply incl. OHE, ASS etc. Excl. lifts
& Escalators
6.1 Elevated section including SCADA R. Km. 9.34
6.2 UG Section R. Km. 14.33
6.3 For Depot Track Km. 2.49
6.4 RSS cum TSS Each 56.07
12.0 Multimodal Integration and Last mile connectivity Per Station 3.74
13.0 Rolling Stock Each 8.00
The type of viaduct, tunnel and other structural, track parameters are adopted
similar to that adopted in other metro projects being executed nationwide. This
shall encourage indigenous development and manufacturing of components
that are being presently imported. Such steps shall induce progressive increase
in local content in procurement, construction etc.
Detailed capital cost estimate for Thane Metro ring corridor is given in Table17.3.
2.1 Elevated station - Civil Works excluding Viaduct Each 32.39 20.00 647.86
2.2 Elevated station - EM Works, Lifts & escalators etc. Each 4.98 20.00 99.67
b UG station - EM Works, Lifts & escalators etc. Each 52.33 2.00 104.66
PPP for AFC (incl. GC, contingency, tax & escl etc.) 131.34
Total Completion Cost including Land
12,200.10
RITES Ltd. September 2023 Page 17-7
Detailed Project Report for Thane Metro Rail
Final DPR Chapter17: Detailed Project Cost Estimates
Taxes and duties are worked out for Thane corridor. The components is
presented in Table 17.4. Current rates of GST (i.e. 18% on Metro projects) have
been taken into consideration and have been applied as per prevalent practice.
Taxes & duties have been worked out in Table 17.5.
4 P-Way 291.69 20% 80% 4.81 5.68 5.68 16.18 18% 21.00 21.00 42.00 58.18
6 S and T Works
Signalling 203.28 50% 50% 8.39 9.90 9.90 28.19 18% 9.15 9.15 18.30 46.49
Telecommunications 135.18 50% 50% 5.58 6.58 6.58 18.75 18% 6.08 6.08 12.16 30.91
7 Environmental works 11.56 0% 100% 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 18% 1.041 1.041 2.08 2.08
8 Misc.
Civil works 106.52 0% 100% 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 18% 9.587 9.587 19.17 19.17
EM works 106.52 0% 100% 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 18% 9.587 9.587 19.17 19.17
9 Security
Civil works & EM works 10.14 0% 100% 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 18% 0.913 0.913 1.83 1.83
10 Staff quarters
Civil works 41.50 0% 100% 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 18% 3.735 3.735 7.47 7.47
EM works 10.14 0% 100% 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 18% 0.913 0.913 1.83 1.83
11 Multimodal Integration 82.23 0% 100% 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 18% 7.401 7.401 14.80 14.80
12 Rolling stock 1200.00 40% 60% 39.20 46.764 46.764 132.728 18% 64.80 64.80 129.60 262.73
13 General Charges 287.27 0% 70% 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 18% 18.098 18.098 36.196 36.196
14 Total 5745.30 81.58 96.342 96.342 274.264 446.17 446.17 892.352 1166.618
15 Lifts & Escalators 94.95 60% 40% 3.13 3.70 3.70 10.53 18% 5.127 5.127 10.254 20.784
The abstract of capital cost estimate of Thane Metro is given in Table 17.6.
The Operation and Maintenance cost for Thane Metro Ring Corridor is worked
under three major heads:
• Staff cost
• Maintenance cost which includes expenditure towards upkeep and maintenance
of the system and consumables and
• Energy cost
The O&M staff is assumed to be provided @ 35 persons per kilometre and the
annual cost this account is estimated considering average staff salary of Rs. 14.6
Lakhs per annum in the year 2029 considering pay-revision. The escalation factor
used for staff costs is 9% per annum to provide for growth in salaries. The estimated
staff cost is Rs.143.84 Cr. for Thane Metro for the inception year i.e. 2029
Maintenance expenses are taken @ Rs. 1.68 Crores/km in the year 2023.
Maintenance cost for Thane Metro would be Rs. 72.15 Crore in the inception year
i.e. 2029 considering escalation @ 5% p.a. for every year of operation.
The energy consumption to meet the traction and non-traction power requirement
is based on traffic demand for different horizon years. The cost of electricity is a
significant part of O&M charges, constituting about 30% of total annual working
cost. The traction power tariff is taken @ Rs. 5.8 per kWh & Rs. 270 per kVA per
month in the year 2018, which is escalated @ 5% every year of operation. Annual
energy consumption charges have been estimated as Rs. 121.67 crore in year
2029, Rs. 184.77 crore in 2035, Rs. 352.99 crore in 2045 and Rs. 481.58 crore
in 2050 for Thane Metro
The replacement costs are provided for meeting the cost on account of
replacement of equipments due to wear and tear. With the nature of equipment
proposed to be provided for the corridor, it is expected that about 25% of the
equipment comprising Electrical, Rolling stock and 50% of Signalling & Telecom
would require replacement/ rehabilitation after 20 years.
The replacement cost for Thane Metro works out to be Rs. 1945.99 Crore in the
year 2045.The replacement cost has been worked out considering an escalation
factor of 5% per annum.
The year wise total Operation and Maintenance cost for the corridor of Thane
Metro is indicated in Table 17.7
TOD focuses on creation of high density mixed land use development in the
influence zone of transit stations, i.e. within the walking distance of (500-800
m) of transit station or along the corridor in case the station spacing is about 1
km. TOD advocates pedestrian trips to access various facilities such as
shopping, entertainment and work.
TOD increases the accessibility of the transit stations by creating pedestrian and
Non-Motorised Transport (NMT) friendly infrastructure that benefits large
number of people, thereby increasing the ridership of the transit facility and
improving the economic and financial viability of the system. Since the transit
corridor has mixed land-use, where the transit stations are either origin
(housing) or destination (work), the corridor experiencing peak hour traffic in
both directions would optimize the use of the transit system.
18.2 2
OBJECTIVES OF TOD
• To provide all the basic needs of work/ job, shopping, public amenities,
entertainment in the influence zone with mixed land-use development
• To establish a dense road network within the development area for safe
RITES Ltd. Page 18-1
Detailed Project Report for Thane Metro Rail
18.3 3 TOD
STUDY METHODOLOGY
• The study begins by discussions with the client to understand the key
considerations such as metro line alignment, land use in the corridor alignment.
This include details on existing and proposed land-use, planned and under
construction infrastructure projects, development control regulations etc.
• The study has been supported by segmentation of metro corridors into clusters,
real estate market research in each cluster, study of TOD policies in other cities
etc.
• Demand assessment along the TOD corridor for potential asset classes has been
carried out to identify the potential along the corridor and determine the
revenue estimation through sale of premium FSI (basis the supply demand
dynamics).
• Revenues from other sources of non-fare box revenue streams have been
estimated on the basis of case studies, benchmarks and primary data collection.
The other sources of non-fare box revenue taken in the study are as under:
18.4 4
DEVELOPMENT CONTROL REGULATIONS
The city of Thane has been divided into five (5) land-use zones such as
Residential, Commercial, Industrial, Green and Special Reservations (TABLE
18.1).
Since TOD Policy specifically for Thane city is not available, therefore the
benchmark study analysis of TOD policies of Mumbai and Nagpur cities have
been carried out.
A TOD Framework for the Mumbai city can be developed to ensure a clear
priority towards land use and transport integration can be realized at all scales
from vision to implementation.
TOD Zones have been identified around all Suburban Rail stations, and around
the metro line 01, 02, 03 & 04, as well as the monorail stations. These TOD
zones have been classified into a hierarchy on the importance based on a
Passenger Volume Survey and Interchanges. Accordingly, growth bands within
1.0 km influence zones on either side of the 3 Suburban Rail lines (the Western,
Central & Harbour Railway lines), and 0.5 km influence zones along metro rail
(TABLE 18.3).
• Order 2 stations have a lower intensity than Order 1 stations and are
proposed to have an influence radius of 500 m from the railway station. This
distance can be covered by walk
• Order 3 stations have the least intensity and an influence area with a 300 m
radius.
TOD policy in Nagpur has been notified as per notification no. TPS-
2414/477/CR-248 (Part 1)/2014/UD-9 dated 14th March 2018 – Urban
Development Department, Government of Maharashtra. The notification
• Nagpur Metro Rail Corridor (NMRC) - It is defined as the area falling within
500 mt distance on either side of the Nagpur Metro Rail measured from its
center line and includes the area falling within 500 mt distance from the
longitudinal end of the last Metro Railway Station.
• Base permissible FSI- It is the FSI permissible as per the provisions of the
Principal DCR, excluding the TDR that can be received.
TABLE 18.5: PLOT AREA AND ROAD WIDTH IN NAGPUR TOD CORRIDOR
Additional FSI over and above base permissible FSI of respective land use zones
as per principle DCR, may be permitted on payment of premium as may be
decided by the Govt. from time to time.
The minimum tenement density per hectare of the gross plot area is as given
below.
In case tenement density proposed is less than that stipulated, the premium to
be paid in that event the additional premium shall be paid as may be decided
by the Govt. from time to time and such premium shall be chargeable on the
total additional FSI to be availed beyond base permissible FSI.
At present, there is no TOD policy notified for Thane Metro. The TOD policy for
Mumbai Region (discussed in point A above) is also in draft stage. Recently for
Pune Metro and Mumbai Metro line 7, TOD policies have been notified in
similar lines with Nagpur Metro. Therefore TOD policy for Thane Metro has also
been taken in lines with Nagpur Metro. As per the policy, TOD corridor of
Thane Metro has been taken as 500 m on either sides of Metro corridor.
18.5 5 REAL
ESTATE ANALYSIS ALONG TOD CORRIDOR
Thane city has witnessed rapid demographic and real estate market growth in
last decade. Thane Municipal Corporation (TMC) is the Urban Local Body (ULB)
and governs 128 sq.km of area under it’s jurisdiction. Thane was an industrial
town during 1960-70 and the major industrial estate like Wagle, Kalwa, Kolshet
and Balkum were developed during this period. Large manufacturing and
industrial units in Thane gradually gave way to commercial development and
additionally, evolution of Thane as a residential hub stimulated development of
support social infrastructure. The city emerged as one of the preferred
locations for corporate entities. Moreover, proximity to Mumbai and
infrastructure developments resulting in rapid access to the real estate micro-
markets also enhanced the location attractiveness of the micro markets.
The real estate dynamics along Thane Metro Corridor has been analyzed by
segregating the corridor into 8 small clusters, which are further detailed out in
the subsequent sections. The cluster map is shown in Figure 18.2. The clusters
are segregated broadly based on the following factors:
• Geographical Extent
• Location Characteristics – Nature of economic activity, nature of
residing population
• Prevalent real estate scenario – Organized / Unorganized real estate
activity, prevalent pricing
A detailed analysis of these clusters has been carried out with respective to the
following:
Real Estate Market overview for residential, commercial and retail are presented in
The snapshot of real estate scenario across various clusters along the corridor is presented in Table 18.6.
TABLE 18.6: SNAPSHOT OF REAL ESTATE SCENARIO ACROSS VARIOUS CLUSTERS ALONG THE CORRIDOR
FUTURE OUTLOOK FOR REAL
STATIONS IN THE ESTATE GROWTH
CLUSTER LAND USE KEY DEMAND DRIVERS
CLUSTER
RESIDENT
OFFICE RETAIL
IAL
• Connectivity to Suburban Railway Network
Thane Station, Mixed, Residential,
1 • Accessibility and Connectivity to other modes of transport such LOW LOW MEDIUM
New Thane Retail
as city buses and state transport buses
Shivaji Chowk,
Mixed, Residential, • Proximity to National Highway 3
2 Rabodi, MEDIUM LOW MEDIUM
Institutional, Retail • Established Social Infrastructure
BalkumPada
Balkum Naka, Industrial, • Large Defunct Industrial Land Parcels
3 HIGH MEDIUM MEDIUM
Kolshet Residential • Upcoming residential township projects
• Emerging Residential Micro-market
Manorama Nagar,
• Large land parcels
4 Azad Nagar, Residential, Retail HIGH MEDIUM HIGH
• Established Social Infrastructure
Patlipada
• Proximity to Ghodbunder Road
Waterfront, Residential, • Emerging Residential micro-market
5 Waghbil, Vijay Commercial • Small scale retail outlets HIGH MEDIUM HIGH
Nagar, Dongripada • Commercial Development
Manpada, K.G Industrial • Established Social infrastructure
6 Natyagruh, Gandhi (Warehousing), • Large land parcels HIGH MEDIUM MEDIUM
Nagar, Neelkanth Residential, Retail • Proximity to Ghodbunder Road
Industrial,
Sivai Nagar, • Desirable location for Commercial and residential development
7 Residential, HIGH HIGH MEDIUM
Lokmanya Nagar • Established social infrastructure
Commercial, Retail
Commercial,
Wagle Circle, Raila • Established Commercial and MSME industrial micro-market
8 Industrial, MEDIUM HIGH HIGH
Devi • Proximity to LBS Marg
Residential
Vacant land parcels have been identified on best effort basis through primary site visit along
the corridor alignment and google imagery. Table 18.7 indicates the supply side dynamics for
vacant and defunct industrial plots along the influence zone of the metro corridor. The
permissible FSI area of each identified land parcel as per the base FSI has been determined.
The areas of the plots within 500 m from both sides of the corridor have been determined.
In addition to these, some land parcels which come under public utilities and green zones as
per the Development Plan have been presented in Table 18.8. These land parcels have not
been considered in the assessment of built up area.
TABLE 18.7: AREA AND FSI DETAILS OF IDENTIFIED LAND PARCELS ALONG TOD CORRIDOR
Plot Area Nearest proposed Land Use as Cluster Approx. Applicable RG Net Plot Permissible Permissible
No (sq.mt) Metro Station per DP Approach Road FSI as per Reservation Area FSI area FSI area
width (m) DCR (sq.m.) (sq.m.) (sq.ft.)
V1 14,797 Waghbil Residential 5 30 1 15% 12,577 12,577 135,384
V2 14,343 Waghbil Residential 5 30 1 15% 12,192 12,192 131,230
V6 5,934 Waterfront Residential 5 40 1 15% 5,044 5,044 54,293
V7 7,308 Patlipada Residential 4 20 1 15% 6,212 6,212 66,864
V8 19,983 Patlipada Residential 4 20 1 15% 16,986 16,986 182,832
V9 14,961 Patlipada Residential 4 20 1 15% 12,717 12,717 136,884
V10 3,099 Patlipada Residential 4 20 1 15% 2,634 2,634 28,354
V11 42,709 Patlipada Residential 4 20 1 15% 36,303 36,303 390,762
V12 7,245 Patlipada Residential 4 20 1 15% 6,158 6,158 66,287
V14 7,749 Azad Nagar Residential 4 42 1 15% 6,587 6,587 70,899
V15 15,763 Azad Nagar Residential 4 12 1 15% 13,399 13,399 144,222
V16 10,422 Azad Nagar Residential 4 21 1 15% 8,859 8,859 95,355
V17 14,626 Azad Nagar Residential 4 12 1 15% 12,432 12,432 133,819
V18 3,764 Azad Nagar Residential 4 21 1 15% 3,199 3,199 34,438
V19 3,283 Manorama Nagar Residential 4 21 1 15% 2,791 2,791 30,037
V20 8,323 Manorama Nagar Residential 4 18 1 15% 7,075 7,075 76,150
V21 24,671 Manorama Nagar Residential 4 18 1 15% 20,970 20,970 225,725
V22 9,002 Manorama Nagar Residential 4 9 1 15% 7,652 7,652 82,363
V23 12,449 Manorama Nagar Industrial 3 33 1 10% 11,204 11,204 120,601
V24 8,431 Manorama Nagar Industrial 3 33 1 10% 7,588 7,588 81,676
V25 3,686 Manorama Nagar Residential 4 33 1 15% 3,133 3,133 33,725
V26 130,649 Manorama Nagar Residential 3 24 1 15% 111,052 111,052 1,195,360
V27 78,745 Kolshet Industrial Area Residential 3 24 1 15% 66,933 66,933 720,470
V28 22,705 Kolshet Industrial Area Residential 3 18 1 15% 19,299 19,299 207,737
V30 44,496 BalkumPada Residential 6&7 20 1 15% 37,822 37,822 407,112
V31 179,124 Gandhi Nagar Industrial 6&7 32 1 15% 152,256 152,256 1,638,880
converted to
Residential
V33 12,254 Dr. K.G Natyagraha Residential 5 30 1 15% 10,416 10,416 112,117
TABLE 18.8: IDENTIFIED LAND PARCELS UNDER PUBLIC UTILITIES AND GREEN ZONE
Plot No Area (sq.mt) Nearest proposed Land Use as per DP Cluster Approx. Approach
Metro Station Road width (m)
V3 1,726 Waghbil Public Utilities 5 30
V4 15,429 Waghbil Public Utilities 5 30
V5 85,413 Waterfront Green Zone - G1 5 15
V13 13,037 Azad Nagar Park - RG 4 42
V29 34,351 Rabodi Public & Semi Public 2 12
V32 33,171 Waterfront Public Utilities 5 15
V34 25,825 Waterfront Public Utilities 5 36
All the identified land parcels come under residential and industrial landuse as per the
development plan. The clusterwise permissible FSI area details for the asset classes of
residential and industrial/commercial landuses have been presented in Table 18.9.
Industrial/
Commercial
Permissible FSI
(Can be developed 202,277 1,638,880 1,841,157
area (sq.ft.)
into Commercial
IT- ITEs)
The cluster wise identified land parcels have been shown in Figure 18.7 to 18.13.
18.7 7
DEMAND SIDE POTENTIAL
Demand estimation for residential segment has been worked out in four steps as
explained below:
• While the above segments are primary demand drivers for housing in Thane,
secondary demand drivers for housing comprise of speculative investors and
end-user generated as a result of nuclearization of families.
The demand for housing in Thane in terms of no. of units for different income
households is presented in Table 18.11.
As discussed earlier, the primary target segments for housing in Thane are those who
reside in Rented households (which comprise of end-users segment), and investors
who invest in homes for rental income. Eventually the occupiers of homes in both the
above segments are the rented households. Hence, the Table 18.12 calculates the
demand for housing from the rented households based in Thane. Proportion of
rented households in Thane is 26% (as per census 2011).
o The available vacant land parcels along the TOD corridor has a potential to
develop approx. 3,900 units. (~4.76 mn. Sq.ft.)
o The additional demand along the TOD corridor comes out to be ~17,250 units
= ~20.68 mn. Sq. ft. It can be developed through purchase of premium FSI
from the authority at the rate of 60% of the ready reckoner rates.
Demand estimation for commercial segment has been worked out in five steps as
explained below:
Demand for office Space in Thane has been assessed based on the past office space
absorption trends in Thane over a 9 year period from year 2009 to year 2017 (Table
18.13). The past 9 years considers various real estate cycles that a metropolitan
city would witness ranging from peak demand to slowdown in the market.
Further the demand projections are done for Mumbai market as a whole and thus
the share of demand of Thane in Mumbai Market over next 30 years timeframe. It
is estimated that Thane will have nominal share (7%) as seen historically (Thane-
Belapur Road being the larger share due to lower rental values and larger supply).
The office space absorption in Thane and TOD corridor for the next 30 years has
been projected in Table 18.14. The summary of estimated demand along TOD
corridor is presented in Table 18.15.
TABLE 18.14: OFFICE SPACE ABSORPTION IN THANE & TOD CORRIDOR (MN SQ. FT.)
Year 2018 2024 2029 2034 2039 2044 2048
Mumbai 2.48 2.8 3.09 3.41 3.76 4.15 4.5
Thane share @ 7% 0.14 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.29 0.31
Share of TOD Corridor
0.097 0.13 0.144 0.159 0.176 0.194 0.21
in Thane (67%)
The future potential demand along the TOD corridor is estimated to be 4.87 Mn. sq.
ft., whereas the vacant land parcels along the corridor indicate a potential supply of
commercial development to be 1.84 Mn. sq. ft.
Hence the additional demand can be catered to by purchase of additional FSI from
the authority. The commercial micro-market within TOD station clusters is
presented in Figure 18.14.
Out of the total demand projected in the Thane TOD corridor, below mentioned is
the percentage share distribution across two micro markets:
• Ghodbunder Road and Pokhran Road- new developments – 70% (Cluster 5, 6 &
7)
• Waghle Circle and Raila Devi- redevelopment of industrial to commercial - 30%
(Cluster 8)
Demand estimation for retail segment has been worked out in seven steps as
explained below:
Table 18.16 and 18.17 presents the estimation of demand for retail segment along
TOD corridor in Thane.
18.8 8
ESTIMATION OF REVENUE FROM VALUE CAPTURE FINANCE
The additional demand along the TOD corridor is spread across cluster 3, 4, 5, 6 and
7 with available vacant land parcels. For computing premium on additional FSI,
rates have been charged as 30% of ASR Land rates as follows:
* ASR Land Rates are land rates for the ‘Receiving Plot’, as mentioned in the Annual
Statement of Rates, prepared by the Inspector General of Registration & Controller
of Stamps, Maharashtra State for the year of utilization of additional FSI.
The Annual Statement of Rates (ASR) for different areas along TOD corridor are
given in Table 18.18.
For the purpose of Revenue Estimation from sale of additional FSI, we have divided
Ready Reckoner Rates in 4 Groups as follows:
• Group 1 – 0 – 10,000
• Group 2 – 20,000 – 40,000
• Group 3 – 40,000 - 50,000
• Group 4 – 50,000 – 60,000
Assuming the average Ready Reckoner Rate in Each Group and 2% escalation in
Rate every year (2018 – 2049) the Ready Reckoner Rates in Year 2024 are as
follows:
The revenue estimation from sale of additional FSI of residential and commercial is
presented in Table 18.19.
Based on the past growth trends of surcharge collection, the average growth rate
comes out to be negative. The figure of 2017-18 is abnormal thus it has not been
considered in the projection. Considering that the surcharge collection will increase
in coming years, it has been assumed that expected surcharge on property
transactions in Thane Municipal area may be expected to grow at a Y-o-Y growth
rate of 2%. In similar lines with Nagpur Metro, 1% additional surcharge on property
transactions may be collected as a revenue to SPV. The estimated revenue to SPV
from 1% additional surcharge on property transactions is presented in Table 18.21.
As per section 124B of Maharashtra Regional and Town Planning Act, 1966,
development charges are to be levied & collected by the nodal authority at rates
specified in column (4) of the second schedule.
As per point (c) of column 3 of the second Schedule, projects involving development
of land for residential or institutional use, also involving building or construction
operations shall imply development charge fee as follows:
• For the built up component – 2.0% of the rates of developed land mentioned
in the Stamp Duty Reckoner
The annual collection of development charge in Thane Municipal Area for the past
four years from 2014-15 to 2017-18 has been collected from Thane Municipal
Corporation (data also available on TMC website) (TABLE 18.22).
Based on the past growth trends of development collection, the average growth rate
comes out to be very high. Considering that the development charge collection will
increase at low pace in coming years, it has been assumed that expected
development charge in Thane Municipal area may be expected to grow at a Y-o-Y
growth rate of 2%.
As per the clause 2-1A of the section 124B of the MRTP act, for consideration of a
Vital Urban Transport Project, the development charges levied and collected under
the provision of the sub-section (2) shall be increased by one hundred percent. This
report considers the additional 100% only as the revenue to be accrued towards SPV.
The estimated revenue to SPV from 100% increase in development charge is
presented in Table 18.23.
18.9 9
ESTIMATION OF REVENUE FROM OTHER SOURCES
Figure 18.15 and 18.16 present the study of success stories from abroad which points to several innovative and systematic
approaches to advertising
FIGURE 18.15: CASE STUDIES OF NON FARE BOX REVENUE FROM ADVERTISEMENT WORLWIDE
• They outsourced the entire advertising planning and strategy to • Madrid Metro has entered into an agreement with Vodafone to rename
Viacom Outdoor for a period of 8.5 years which includes station one of its lines as “Line-2 Vodafone”
advertising and underground advertising.
• Station will be named Vodafone-Sol
• Investment by agency to the tune of 50 million pounds, will • 3 million Euros for a period of 3 years
include digital advertising, digital panels , digital cross-track
• Vodafone will be allowed to use its insignia on Madrid’s official metro
projections
map, platforms and trains.
FIGURE 18.16: CASE STUDIES OF NON FARE BOX REVENUE FROM ADVERTISEMENT WORLWIDE
Integrated multi- channel marketing and advertising (in and out- station advertising)
JR – East, Japan: Glasgow subway: Hong Kong MTR: Rome: Advertising Delhi Metro: IRCTC : Advertising
Advertising in Train Digital Boards Digital escalator behind Ticket/ Advertising on tracks, through apps, text
Channels Metro pass viaducts, columns messages
Delhi Metro has awarded exclusive long- term advertising rights for integrated multi- channel advertising for 42 metro stations to TDI International India
serving in the Out-Of-Home (OOH) sector
Café Coffee Day at Supermarket at IndusInd Bank Cyber City Station, Gurgaon:
Delhi Metro Stations Dubai Metro Station Delhi Metro has permitted train wraps on 10% of Bank pays Rapid Metro Gurgaon (RMGL) Rs. 5
Revenues from rentals & advertising total train sets; @ around Rs.25 lakh per month to Crores per year for naming rights, commercial
amounted to Rs. 280 crores in FY 14 for wrap 6-8 coaches of the metro depending on the & advertising space within station (5 year
Delhi Metro route contract started May 2014)
Metros earn a substantial part of their non fare box revenue from advertising.
Internal station space, external and internal train space and metro pillars are leased
out to media agencies for using the space for advertising. Static panels, cut-outs,
train wraps, smart card advertising, bill boards, posters, internal train wraps, metro
pillar cut-outs, OOH, in train and station audio and video advertising are some of
the main sources for revenue. Delhi Metro, Mumbai Metro, Kochi Metro, Kolkata
Metro, Gurgaon Metro, Hyderabad Metro, Chennai Metro, Bangalore metro all
have a substantial part of their non fare box revenue earned from advertisement.
Generally advertising revenue is observed to be in the range of 7-15% of fare box
revenue for most of the above metros depending on the city.
The year wise revenue details from advertisement and commercial spaces in
stations of Delhi Metro are as under:
From the tables, it can be seen that the average share of advertisement revenue of
Delhi Metro is 6% of fare box revenue and the average share of commercial space
lease revenue is 2% of fare box revenue. Considering the share of non fare box
revenue of Delhi Metro, the non fare box revenue share from advertisement for
Thane Metro may be considered at 5-6% in the initial years of operation and 8%
post stabilization of metro operations. Similarly the revenue share from leasing of
commercial space inside stations may be considered at 2% in the initial years of
operation and 3% post stabilization of metro operations.
The year wise revenue from advertisement and leasing of commercial space inside
stations for Thane Metro is presented in Table 18.26.
TABLE 18.26: REVENUE FROM ADVERTISEMENT & COMMERCIAL SPACE OF THANE METRO
Year Fare Box % Share of Revenue from % Share of Revenue from Leasing of
Revenue of Advt. Advertisement Commercial Commercial Space in
Thane Metro Revenue (INR Cr) Space Lease Stations (INR Cr)
(INR Cr) Revenue
2025 845 5 42.2 2 16.9
2026 931 5 46.5 2 18.6
2027 1026 6 61.6 2 20.5
2028 1127 6 67.6 2 22.5
2029 1235 6 74.1 2 24.7
2030 1358 8 108.6 3 40.7
2031 1493 8 119.5 3 44.8
2032 1642 8 131.4 3 49.3
2033 1812 8 144.9 3 54.4
2034 1990 8 159.2 3 59.7
2035 2259 8 180.7 3 67.8
2036 2415 8 193.2 3 72.5
2037 2586 8 206.9 3 77.6
2038 2767 8 221.3 3 83.0
2039 2964 8 237.1 3 88.9
2040 3165 8 253.2 3 95.0
2041 3389 8 271.1 3 101.7
2042 3627 8 290.2 3 108.8
2043 3881 8 310.5 3 116.4
2044 4151 8 332.0 3 124.5
2045 5110 8 408.8 3 153.3
2046 5544 8 443.5 3 166.3
2047 6026 8 482.1 3 180.8
2048 6547 8 523.8 3 196.4
2049 7101 8 568.1 3 213.0
5878.3 2198.1
years on mutually agreeable terms and conditions. The bidders quote the lump sum
rate/annum for the total scope offered at the station.
The case study of Delhi Metro for the semi-naming rights of stations is presented
below:
Particulars Unit
Revenue from semi naming rights 2 INR cr/station/year
Total no. of stations with semi naming rights 43 no. of stations
Total revenue 86 INR cr/year
The similar rates of semi-naming rights i.e. Rs. 2 Crore per station per year has been
considered for Thane Metro. Out of total 22 stations, it has been assumed that
lesser number of stations will be given for semi-naming rights in the initial years of
metro operation and all the stations will be given post stabilization of metro
operation. The year wise revenue from semi-naming rights of station for Thane
Metro is presented in Table 18.27.
The financial analysis has been carried out for the Thane metro corridor.
Accordingly, the capital costs and O&M costs for the corridor has been added
to arrive at the total capital and O&M costs for proposed Thane MRTS.
The Construction cost of the metro corridor at July, 2023 prices is estimated at
Rs. 6032.57 Crore. The total cost of project including land & R&R cost is
estimated at Rs. 8915.35 Crore. The capital cost components at July, 2023 are
given in Table 19.1.
Escalation rate has been assumed @ 5%. It has been calculated on the basis of
growth in Whole Sale Price index for last 12 years (Table 19.2).
With escalation factor of 5% p.a., Land cost has been escalated to estimate land
rates applicable at the time of transfer. The details of completion cost under
different scenarios are as per Table 19.3.
Amount
Completion Cost
Cost without taxes, Land & R&R 6,846
Cost with Central Taxes and without Land & R&R 7,554
Cost with all taxes and Land & R&R (without PPP 11,584
component & IDC)
The year wise requirement of funds under different scenarios has been given in
Table 19.5 (Without any Taxes), in Table 19.6 (With Central Taxes only) and
Table 19.7 (With Central and State Taxes). The cost of land is divided into two
initial years during which it is expected that the land acquisition work would be
over and related payments would be released.
TABLE 19.5: YEAR WISE FUND REQUIREMENTS WITHOUT TAXES (Rs. IN CRORE)
TABLE 19.6: YEAR WISE FUND REQUIREMENTS WITH CENTRAL TAXES WITHOUT
LAND & R&R (Rs. IN CRORE)
Central
Year Completion Cost Total Completion Cost
Taxes
2024-2025 618 64 682
2025-2026 1623 168 1791
2026-2027 2045 211 2256
2027-2028 1432 148 1580
2028-2029 1128 117 1245
TOTAL 6846 708 7554
TABLE 19.7: YEAR WISE FUND REQUIREMENTS WITH ALL TAXES (Rs. IN CRORE)
Completion Land & Central State Total Completion
Year
Cost R&R Cost Taxes Taxes Cost
2024-2025 618 974 64 56 1712
2025-2026 1623 1365 168 146 3302
2026-2027 2045 1075 211 184 3515
2027-2028 1432 148 129 1709
2028-2029 1128 117 101 1346
TOTAL 6846 3414 708 616 11584
Staff Cost
The O&M staff is assumed to be provided @ 35 persons per kilometer and the
annual cost this account is estimated considering average staff salary of Rs. 14.60
Lakhs per annum in the year 2029 considering pay-revision. The escalation factor
used for staff costs is 9% per annum to provide for growth in salaries. The
estimated staff cost is Rs. 143.84 Cr. for Thane Metro for the inception year i.e.
2027.
Maintenance Expenses
Maintenance expenses are taken @ Rs. 1.68 Crores/km in the year 2021.
Maintenance cost for Thane Metro would be Rs. 72.15 Crore in the inception year
i.e. 2029 considering escalation @ 5% p.a. for every year of operation.
Energy Charges
The energy consumption to meet the traction and non-traction power
requirement is based on traffic demand for different horizon years. The cost of
electricity is a significant part of O&M charges, constituting about 30% of total
annual working cost. The traction power tariff is taken @ Rs. 5.80 per kwh & Rs
270 per kva per month in the year 2018, which is escalated @ 5% every year of
operation. Annual energy consumption charges have been estimated as Rs.
121.67 crore in year 2029, Rs. 184.77 crore in 2035, Rs. 352.99 crore in 2045
and Rs. 481.58 crore in 2050 for Thane Metro.
Additional Investment
To cater to increased traffic demand, additional investment will have to be made
for purchase of additional coaches, installation of balance AFC, Lifts& Escalators.
The additional investment in the year 2035 works out to Rs. 368.61 Crores for
purchase of 30 additional coaches. An investment of Rs. 525.67Crores would be
required for purchase of 39 additional coaches in the year 2045 and Rs 401.80
crores for 27 additional coaches in the year 2050 for Thane Metro. These
additional investments have been worked out considering an escalation factor of
2% per annum for rolling stock.
Replacement Cost
The replacement costs are provided for meeting the cost on account of
replacement of equipments due to wear and tear. With the nature of equipment
proposed to be provided for the corridor, it is expected that about 25% of the
equipment comprising Electrical, Rolling stock and 50% of Signalling & Telecom
would require replacement/ rehabilitation after 20 years. The replacement cost
for Thane Metro works out to be Rs. 1945.99 Crore in the year 2045.The
replacement cost has been worked out considering an escalation factor of 5% per
annum. The Replacement Cost in terms be considered as Depreciation Cost. The
year wise total Operation and Maintenance cost for the corridor of Thane Metro
is indicated in Table 19.8.
The Revenue for Thane metro will mainly consists of fare box collection and
revenue from other non-fare box sources such as property development,
advertisement, parking, taxes etc. Estimation of revenue from fare box and non-
fare box source has been made.
➢ Fare Structure
DMRC revised its fare structure in 2017 with revision @ 7% per year as proposed
by DMRC Fare Fixation Committee 2016. DMRC fare in 2017-18 and Thane metro
fare for first year of operation in the year 2024-25 on the same basis is given in
(Table 19.11).
TABLE 19.11: FARE STRUCTURE - THANE METRO BASED ON REVISED DMRC FARE
MAHA Metro Fare
Fare slabs DMRC Fare in 2017-18
in 2029
0-2 10 19
2-5 20 40
5-12 30 59
12-21 40 78
21-32 50 98
>32 60 119
DMRC revised its fares in 2017 after a gap of 8 years. The increase is in fares is
almost 7% per annum. Considering the fact that DMRC has been operating MRTS
systems since 2002 and the current fares reflects the better picture of fares in
relation to operational cost. It is, therefore, suggested that MAHA metro may
consider adopting the revised fare structure of DMRC for Thane Metro. Table
19.12 the year wise fare structure for Thane Metro in horizon years.
TABLE 19.12: FARE STRUCTURE FOR THANE METRO BASED ON REVISED DMRC
FARES
YEAR 0-2 2-5 5-12 12-21 21-32 >32
2029 2030 19 40 59 78 98 119
2030 2031 20 43 63 83 105 127
2031 2032 21 46 67 89 112 136
2032 2033 22 49 72 95 120 146
2033 2034 24 52 77 102 128 156
2034 2035 26 56 82 109 137 167
2035 2036 28 60 88 117 147 179
2036 2037 30 64 94 125 157 192
2037 2038 32 68 101 134 168 205
RITES Ltd. Page 19-7
Detailed Project Report for Thane Metro Rail
Final DPR Chapter 19: Financial Analysis & Non Fare Box Revenue Assessment
YEAR 0-2 2-5 5-12 12-21 21-32 >32
2038 2039 34 73 108 143 180 219
2039 2040 36 78 116 153 193 234
2040 2041 39 83 124 164 207 250
2041 2042 42 89 133 175 221 268
2042 2043 45 95 142 187 236 287
2043 2044 48 102 152 200 253 307
2044 2045 51 109 163 214 271 328
2045 2046 55 117 174 229 290 351
2046 2047 59 125 186 245 310 376
2047 2048 63 134 199 262 332 402
2048 2049 67 143 213 280 355 430
2049 2050 72 153 228 300 380 460
2050 2051 77 164 244 321 407 492
2051 2052 82 175 261 343 435 526
2052 2053 88 187 279 367 465 563
2053 2054 94 200 299 393 498 602
The sources of non fare box revenue identified in the study are divided into
two heads:
1. Value Capture Finance (VCF) tools
2. Other sources like Advertisement etc.
a) The three sources as a part of VCF have been used for assessment of revenue
in Thane Metro in similar lines with Thane Metro:
• Levying premium on additional Floor Space Index (FSI)
• Levying 1% additional surcharge on property transactions
• 100% increase in Development Charge
The assessment of revenue from VCF tools has been detailed in Chapter 18.
b) The other sources of Non-fare box revenue may be considered for Thane
Metro as under:
i. Advertisements:
• Inside Station Advertisement: All section/Lines of Metro may be awarded for
advertisement purposes. Scope of the inside station advertisement may be display
static advertisement on fixed advertisement boards/panels as well as through
digital displays, putting up promotional canopies etc. Area of advertisement space
may be fixed based on type of station i.e. elevated orunderground station, size of
station, footfall of station etc.
• Outdoor Advertisement: Commercial Advertisement may be allowed by putting
Advertisement boards on Metro Civil Structure/Ancillary Buildings/Via
Duct/FOBs/Pillars. Scope of the Outdoor advertisement may be to put up static
advertisement display at the Metro Pillars/FOBs/Metro Viaduct/Ancillary
Building/Lift Lobby etc. Area of advertisement space may be decided based on
type, size of station and footfall of station etc. and as per policy of Urban Local
Body.
• Advertisement on Trains: The Metro company may be allowed Commercial
Advertisement on Metro Rail Trains; inside on prefabricated advertisement spaces
and outside by wrapping of trains. Bidder may wrap 10% of available cars subject
to maximum of 20% trains available in the line as well as may do advertisement
on pre-designated spaces inside the Metro Trains.
• Co-Branding: Co-Branding by Suffixing/Prefixing of Brand Name with the Metro
Station name may be allowed for selected metro stations. Co-branding rights
may be awarded to the eligible/competent parties through tendering process. The
Scope under this type of advertisement may be to Suffix the Brand namewith
the Metro Station name whereas for Stations. Colouring of the station in brand
colour as well as inside and outside Advertisement rights for the station may also
be permitted. The contract may be awarded generally for tenure of 10 years which
may be further extendable by 5 years on mutually agreeable terms and conditions.
The bidders quote the lump sum rate/annum for the total scope offered at the
station.
ii. Shops:
• Built-up Shops: Built up shops on the selected Metro Stations may be available
on license basis. These types of Shops may have an inbuilt structure and located
within the Metro Stations. The Shops awarded to the eligible/competent parties
through tendering process. The shops which fail to attract any bid through
tendering process may be made available through Walk-in-basis Scheme (First
come first serve basis) wherein the bidders may take the shops at reserve price.
• Kiosks: - Leasing of small bare spaces to operate small kiosks for commuters
facilitations may be allowed on the metro stations.
• Water Vending Kiosk: - Small bare spaces may be allotted to install Water
Vending Kiosks as commuter facilitation.
• ATMs - Bare spaces may be leased to Banks to install and operate their ATMs/e-
lobby at Metro Stations as commuter facility.
The assessment of revenue from other non fare box sources has been detailed in
Chapter 18.
Year wise revenue from all the sources of non fare box revenue under the heads of
premium on additional FSI, Cess on stamp duty, development charge,
Advertisement, Leasing of commercial space in stations and semi-naming rights of
stations is shown In TABLE 19-13.
The non fare box revenue from VCF tools will go to Urban Transport Fund from
where it will be distributed to different agencies including SPV implementing Thane
MRTS project. As per the prevalent rules and regulations in the state, following
revenue share will be given to MRTS SPV
The total annual revenue through the fare box and non fare box sources for the study
corridor is given in Table 19.14.
TABLE 19.14: TOTAL REVENUE COLLECTION (RS. IN CRORE) - DMRC REVISED FARES
The FIRR for the project with capital costs including all taxes and revenue from fare box
and non-fare box sources works out to be 15.06% with DMRC revised fares and is
presented in Table 19.16. As with DMRC revised fares, the project has better financial
viability, it is suggested that MAHA metro may adopt fare structure based on revised fares
of DMRC.
The FIRR of the project is sensitive to revenues, and capital costs. The sensitivity of the
project FIRR for DMRC revised fares Scenario with respect to above factors is given in Table
19.15.
It can be seen that the project FIRR is more sensitive to ridership variations than to
variations in costs.
TABLE 19.16: THANE MRTS FIRR BASED ON DMRC REVISED FARES (Rs. IN CRORE)
Project Completion Costs Project Revenues Project O&M Costs
1 % Additional Operational
Total Project Revenue Premium on
Year Completion Land All Fare Box Surcharge on Development Gross O&M Additional/ Surplus
Completion from Adv & Additional Total
Cost Cost taxes Revenue Property Charge Revenue Cost Replacement
Cost PD FSI
Transactions Cost
2024-2025 636 975 120 1730 0.00 0.00 0 -1730
2025-2026 1666 1365 314 3345 0.00 0.00 0 -3345
2026-2027 2097 1075 396 3567 0.00 0.00 0 -3567
2027-2028 1466 277 1743 0.00 0.00 -1743
2028-2029 1153 218 1371 0 0 -1371
2029-2030 1171 133 89 151 187 427 1730 338 0 1393
2030-2031 1252 190 91 154 190 435 1878 363 0 1515
2031-2032 1353 218 93 157 194 444 2015 390 0 1677
2032-2033 1455 243 87 160 198 445 2143 419 0 1780
2033-2034 1571 264 89 163 202 454 2289 450 0 1900
2034-2035 1690 287 77 166 206 449 2426 484 0 2007
2035-2036 2206 321 78 170 210 458 2985 523 0 2534
2036-2037 2372 341 80 173 214 467 3180 561 0 2696
2037-2038 2550 364 82 176 219 477 3390 602 369 2499
2038-2039 2745 387 83 180 223 486 3619 647 0 3058
2039-2040 2954 413 74 184 227 485 3852 694 0 3250
2040-2041 3163 439 75 187 232 494 4096 746 0 3450
2041-2042 3407 469 77 191 237 505 4381 801 0 3687
2042-2043 3652 500 78 195 241 514 4666 861 0 3921
2043-2044 3930 533 80 199 246 525 4988 925 0 4187
2044-2045 4203 568 82 203 251 536 5306 994 0 4446
2045-2046 5114 679 83 207 256 546 6339 1082 0 5415
2046-2047 5500 733 85 211 261 557 6789 1167 0 5795
2047-2048 5906 792 87 215 266 568 7266 1259 2472 3712
2048-2049 6312 855 88 219 272 579 7747 1359 0 6579
2049-2050 6774 923 90 224 277 591 8289 1456 0 7029
2050-2051 7273 997 92 228 283 603 8873 1561 0 7514
2051-2052 7825 1078 94 233 289 616 9518 1675 0 8062
2052-2053 8358 1003 96 238 294 627 9989 1797 402 8025
2053-2054 8957 1038 97 243 299 639 10635 1928 0 8960
TOTAL 2308
93335
7018 3414 1324 11756 101696 13766 2127 4826 5975 12928 128390 1 3243
IRR 0.1506
% 15.06
The financing option for metro implementation depends upon selection of the
dedicated agency created to implement the project. As per Metro Rail Policy '2017,
the prominent models are:
• Equity Sharing Model- Special Purpose Vehicle (SPV) fully under Government
Control
• Public Private Partnership (PPP)
• Grant by the Central Government
Under this model, a Special Purpose Vehicle (SPV) is set up as a joint venture between
Central Government and State Government for the implementation of the project and
for its subsequent Operation & Maintenance. Under this arrangement Government of
India and State Government make equal equity contribution and run SPV as a
commercial enterprise. As per the prevalent practice, Central Government contribute
20% of the project cost as their equity contribution. An equal amount can be
contributed by State Government aggregating the total equity to 40%. Remaining 60%
is arranged as soft loan from funding agencies. Delhi Metro Rail Corporation,
Bangalore Metro Rail Corporation, Chennai Metro Rail Corporation & Kolkata Metro
Rail Corporation are some of the examples of success of such a SPV. Under
implementation Thane metro has also been planned on Equity Sharing Model only.
As per Metro Rail Policy 2017, it is essential to explore private participation either for
complete provisioning of metro rail or for some unbundled components of operations
and maintenance costs of metro rail.
However, the success of PPP will depend critically on designing PPP structures that
make an appropriate allocation of risks, responsibilities, rewards and penalties, and
create the incentives for value creation. Indeed, this risk allocation is the defining
feature of the PPP strategy. The golden principle is that risks should be allocated to
the entity best equipped to manage each risk. The expectation is that such an
allocation of risks will not only produce the best possible program and project
outcomes but also optimize costs. This should lead to good quality outcomes at
optimum prices.
Under this option Central Government would fund 10% of the project completion cost
excluding private investment Land, R&R and state taxes. Remaining costs are to be
borne by state with Private sector participation. These models have been explored for
implementation of Thane Metro Rail.
Metro systems being planned in the cities of India have majorly adopted equity sharing
model. Some of the cities have gone for private sector participation also. Exhibit 19.1
to Exhibit 19.4 give the examples of PPP in construction and operationof MRT system.
Some of the metro companies have involved private sector in O&M also. Exhibit 19.5
to Exhibit19.7 gives the examples of PPP in some of the O&M
DMRC has implemented a High Speed Airport Link from New Delhi Railway Station to
IGI Airport and further extension to Sector-21, Dwarka covering a distance of
22.7 KM with private sector participation. The project with an estimated cost of Rs.
3869 Crore has been implemented under a unique model of PPP where in the DMRC
has undertaken the civil works with the funds being contributed by GoI, GNCTD, Delhi
International Airport Limited and DDA (54%) and the cost of systems and Rolling
Stock (46%) is being met by the private operator who will operate thesystem for 30
years, after which the system will revert back to DMRC. The approved funding pattern
of the line is depicted inFigure 19.2. There have been some issues with the
concessionaire and DMRC is now operating the system.
FIGURE 19.2 APPROVED FUNDING PATTERN OF DELHI AIRPORT LINE
Hyderabad Metro is the first PPP Metro Rail Project that has been sanctioned by
Government of India. GoAP has undertaken the Hyderabad Metro Rail Project under
Viability Gap Funding (VGF) scheme of GoI. The MRTS network include three high
density traffic corridor with total length of about 71 km. The Project is being executed
by L&T on design, build, and finance, operate and transfer (DBFOT) basis. GoAP will
spend another 1,980 Crore towards land acquisition, R&R package, shifting of utilities
and GoI will support the project with grant of 1,458 Crore as VGF.Figure 19.3gives the
funding plan of Hyderabad metro.
FIGURE 19.3 FUNDING PATTERN OF HYDERABAD METRO
Gurgaon's Rapid Metro project is India’s first fully privately financed metro. With
the project cost of Rs 1100 Crore, it has a network of 5.1 km connecting Cyber City,
NH-8 &Sikanderpur Station (DMRC) in Phase I. The planned route for Rapid Metro
acts as a feeder to the MRC’sJahangirpuri-Central Secretariat-HUDA City Centre
(Yellow Line). A special purpose vehicle (SPV), Rapid Metro Rail Gurgaon Limited
(RMGL) was formed to construct, operate and maintain the metro.
In contrast to the SPV model adopted for construction of metro rail system in the
city of Delhi, Bangalore, Chennai & Kolkata, the Maharashtra government has opted
Build Own, Operate & Transfer (BOOT) model in the city of Mumbai.
So far, 2 lines covering a distance of 44 KMs (Line 1 of 11.07 KMs from Versova –
Andheri - Ghatkopar with a total cost of Rs. 2356 Crore and Line 2 of 32 KMs from
Charkop – Bandra – Mankurd with an estimated cost of Rs. 8250 Crore) have been
awarded to private operator for construction and operation by giving Viability Gap
Funding by GoI& Maharashtra State Government to the extent of Rs. 650 Crore
and Rs. 1532 Crore for Line 1 & Line 2 respectively.
Mumbai Metro One Private Limited is a Joint Venture Company formed by Reliance
Energy Limited, a Reliance ADA Group Company, Veolia Transport, France and
Mumbai Metropolitan Region Development Authority (MMRDA) incorporated
under the Companies Act, 1956 to implement this project. Figure 19.4 gives the
funding pattern of Mumbai Metro Line 1. Line 1 is now operational. There are some
issues with the concessionaire and the implementation mechanism for Line 2 is being
revisited.
FIGURE 19.4 FUNDING PATTERN OF MUMBAI METRO LINE 1
The construction will be done in accordance with the façade designs and specifications
approved by BMRCL. The period of concession and permission grantedto Embassy
Group will be for 30 years starting from the date of commencement of commercial
operations and could be extended further on mutual terms. The agreement mandates
that the group will maintain Kadubeesanahalli Metro station, including housekeeping
and maintenance, along with all the equipment, according to
specifications laid down by the corporation.
The partnership also means the group will be entitled to utilize the pre-determined
spaces for advertisements. Embassy can also use the leasable retail space measuring
approximately 3,000 sq. ft at the Metro station. Embassy will also have the advantage
of leveraging the linear zone of 250 metres around the Kadubeesanahalli Metro
LMRC has tied up with M/s HDFC Bank for Fare Collection System and Provision of
Allied Banking Application for Phase I (21 stations of North South Corridor of the
project). The Bank was offered two options for partnership
Option 1 – Annual royalty payable by bidder to LMRC (including provisions of TVMs
and RCTMs)
Option 2 – Annual royalty payable by bidder to LMRC (excluding provisions of TVMs
and RCTMs)
The Royalty Shall increase by 20% on completion of every 3 years on a compounding
basis.
M/s HDFC Bank opted for Option 2 i.e. Annual Royalty payable by Bidder to LMRC
(excluding provisions of TVMs and RCTMs). HDFC Bank pays Rs. 1000 as Annual
Royalty under option 2 to LMRC. While opting for option 2, following cost is being
incurred by HDFC Bank in discharging the obligation.
Annual Manpower Cost (including dress) – Rs. 101.17 Lakh
Annual Cash Management Charges – Rs. 53.4 Lakh
Annual Maintenance Charges – Rs. 3.00 Lakh
Total - Rs. 157.54 Lakh
The above cost will be increased by approx. 9% annually considering the inflation
and other cost.
Kochi Metro Rail Limited (KMRL) has signed a public-private partnership (PPP) pact
with Axis Bank for the automated fare collection (AFC) system. Under the agreement,
investment for the entire funding required for the AFC system will be undertaken by
Axis Bank, which will also maintain it for 10 years. The bank will pay
a royalty of Rs 209 Crore over the next 10 years for the right to be KMRL's partner
in this endeavor. In return, Axis Bank will get the right to issue co-branded cards,
which will function as a smart card as well as a ticket, to the users of the metro. In
addition to this, 0.2 per cent of Axis Bank's gross revenue, from the utilization of
this card outside KMRL's ecosystem in various mercantile outlets and internet
transactions, will also accrue to KMRL over the next 10 years.
The AFC system is a critical core component of any metro system. It includes complex
hardware and software installed at entry points of metro stations as well as buses
and boats. It uses radio frequency identification devices (RFID) to collect fares from
the users. In such a system, the metro ticket can be in the form of a co- branded card
or an NFC-enabled smart phone or a 'patch' on a mobile device or any other surface
with NFC stickers or QR code, or even as a paper-coupon. The smart card can be linked
with any bank account of the user, in any bank.
KMRL is planning a 'click and collect' system whereby the commuter will be able to
order goods and services using this card, which can be delivered at all metro stations.
It is also planning to start a drive for including a variety of local and national goods
and services that can be accessed using the KMRL-Axis Bank co- branded card. In
addition to the co-branded card, the bank will also develop a mobile app, which can
be used for ticketing as well as e-commerce. This initiative is unique in that it is for
the first time that 'open-loop' smart cards are being
Under this model, a Special Purpose Vehicle (SPV) will be set up as a joint venture
between Central Government and Government of Maharashtra for the
implementation of the project and for its subsequent Operation & Maintenance. As
per the prevalent practice, Central Government contribute 20% of the project cost
excluding land and state taxes as its equity contribution. An equal amount will be
contributed by State Government aggregating the total equity to 40%. In addition to
equity, Govt of Maharashtra will also fund the cost of land and state taxes. During
Stake holder consultations, it was agreed that local bodies in the city would contribute
towards funding of the metro in the city by giving land for the project free of cost.
Remaining amount shall be arranged as soft loan from funding agencies.
Soft loan (ODA Loan) from three funding agencies namely ADB and KFW has been
considered. Table 19.17 gives the loan conditions of these agencies.
In case of KFW and ADB, the loan interest rate has fixed and floating components,
Euribor rate is floating component in the interest rate. A positive Euribor rate gets
added to the interest rate to determine final loan interest rate whereas negative
Euribor has no effect on fixed rate of interest.
The funding pattern developed under this model is placed in Table 19.18, and Table
19.19.
TABLE 19.18: FUNDING PATTERN UNDER EQUITY SHARING MODEL (PROJECT COST
WITH CENTRAL TAXES) – CONSIDERING KFW LOAN
Amount
Particulars % Share
(Rs in Cr)
Equity by GoI 1151.13 15.30%
Equity by Govt. of Maharashtra 1151.13 15.30%
SD for CT by Govt. of Maharashtra 354.11 4.70%
SD for CT by GoI 354.11 4.70%
Soft Loan from bilateral/multilateral funding agencies 4515.72 60.00%
Total Cost excluding Land, R&R and PPP 7526.20 100.00%
Contribution by Local Bodies as Grant 200.00
SD for land and R&R by Govt. of Maharashtra 3414.20
State Taxes towards Completion Cost 615.64 -
IDC by GoM 312.71
Total Cost including Land, R&R, State Taxes and IDC 12068.76 -
PPP Component 131.34
Total Completion Cost 12200.10
SD: Subordinate Debt, CT: Central Taxes, IDC: Interest During Construction
TABLE 19.19: FUNDING PATTERN UNDER EQUITY SHARING MODEL (PROJECT COST
WITH CENTRAL TAXES) - CONSIDERING ADB LOAN
Amount
Particulars % Share
(Rs in Cr)
Equity by GoI 1151.13 15.30%
Equity by Govt. of Maharashtra 1151.13 15.30%
SD for CT by Govt. of Maharashtra 354.11 4.70%
SD for CT by GoI 354.11 4.70%
Soft Loan from bilateral/multilateral funding agencies 4515.72 60.00%
Total Cost excluding Land, R&R and PPP 7526.20 100.00%
Contribution by Local Bodies as Grant 200.00
SD for land and R&R by Govt. of Maharashtra 3414.20
State Taxes towards Completion Cost 615.64 -
IDC by GoM 573.31
Total Cost including Land, R&R, State Taxes and IDC 12329.35
PPP Component 131.34
Total Completion Cost 12460.69 -
SD: Subordinate Debt, CT: Central Taxes, IDC: Interest During Construction
In this model, the private firm may be responsible for designing, building, operating and
maintaining of the entire project. Government of Maharashtra will bear the cost
towards land including R&R and state taxes irrespective of the model of PPP. The metro
rail being a social sector project not many private parties are available to bid for such a
project. Besides quite expectedly the private operator may demand assuredrate of
return in the range of 16% to 18% or a comfort of guaranteed ridership.
The operation period by a private entity is considered as 30 years, Debt: Equity ratio for
all financing by private entity is considered as 70:30, with long term cost of debt as 12%
p.a. The Private Partner will develop the infrastructure with its own funds and funds
raised from lenders at its risk (that is, it will provide all or the majority of the financing).
Private Partner is also responsible for operating (supply and running of rolling stock) and
managing the infrastructure life cycle (assuming life-cycle cost risks) for a specified
number of years. To carry out these tasks, the Private Partner, will usually create an SPV.
The bid parameter in such projects is either Premium (as percentage of revenues) if
the funds coming from users are sufficient to cover O&M expenses and long-term
maintenance with a surplus that can then be used as a source to repay the financing of
the construction of the asset, and where no Bidder is offering a Premium, bidding
RITES Ltd. Page 19-22
Detailed Project Report for Thane Metro Rail
Final DPR Chapter 19: Financial Analysis & Non Fare Box Revenue Assessment
parameter is the Grant required (as per VGF scheme of Government of India which is
at present is maximum of 20% of the project cost).The Grant/ Premium is computed
for a target pre-tax equity IRR of private entity as 18%. Based on above, the funding
pattern without additional income from PD is provided in Table 19.21.
19.5.7 Grant by the Central Government – Supply of System and O&M by Private
Participation
Under this model, Government of Maharashtra will bear the cost towards land including
R&R and state taxes. Central Government shall provide a grant of 10% and post-
construction of civil assets by State Government, the Private Partner installs the system
(signaling and electrical assets), procures rolling stock and operates and maintains all
these assets. The State Government collects all the revenue and pays the Private Partner
a monthly/ annual payment for operations and maintenance of the system. The
remuneration given could comprise of a fixed fee and a variable component, which
would depend on the quality of service provided and the fixed feeis computed for a
target pre-tax equity IRR of private entity as 18% which will be financed through the
revenue generated in the project. For our analysis, a fixed fee escalated at long-term
WPI i.e. 4% p.a. is considered. Based on above, the funding pattern is provided in Table
19.22.
The total fund contribution of GoI & Govt of Maharashtra under various alternatives
is tabulated in Table 19.23.
It can be seen from the table that the contribution of Governments under SPV model
is same as that of VGF model. However, under the VGF model, the entire revenues for
the Concession Period are accruing to the Private Partner with no return on
Government’s contribution. Accordingly, it is proposed that Thane Metro project may
be implemented on SPV Model with soft loans from bilateral-multilateral agencies.
The economic appraisal has been carried out within the broad framework of
Social Cost – Benefit Analysis Technique. It is based on the incremental costs and
benefits and involves comparison of project costs and benefits in economic
terms under the “with” and “without” project scenario. In the analysis, the cost
and benefit streams arising under the above project scenarios have been
estimated in terms of market prices and economic values have been computed
by converting the former using appropriate shadow prices.
This has been done to iron out distortions due to externalities and anomalies
arising in real world pricing systems. The annual streams of project costs and
benefit have been compared over the analysis period of 30 years to estimate the
net cost / benefit and to calculate the economic viability of the project in terms
of EIRR & ENPV.
Project horizon comprises of the construction and operation period of the rail
based transit project. The annual streams of project costs and benefit have been
compared over the analysis period of 30 years to estimate the net cost / benefit
and to calculate the economic viability of the project in terms of EIRR. The key
assumptions used in the evaluation are listed in Table 20.1.
The ‘Without Project Scenario’ is essentially the present condition but it includes
existing and committed transport infrastructure proposals that will be
constructed in the near future. The ‘Without Project Scenario’ includes the
existing road network and improvements that are likely to be implemented
within the next few years, except for the mass transit system corridors being
considered in this study.
The Without Project Scenario provides a baseline for comparing travel benefits
in both ‘with and without project scenarios’ for Metro System. Accordingly,
transport demand analysis for metro system in both scenarios has been carried
out. The mode-wise passenger trips for the horizon years have been worked out
and shown in Table 20.2.
The introduction of mass rapid transit system in the Study Area will help in
reducing vehicular traffic on the road thereby contributing to relieving traffic
congestion along proposed corridors, reduction in accidents and larger
environmental savings.
TABLE 20-2: ESTIMATED DEMAND & MODAL SHARE IN “WITH” AND “WITHOUT
SCENARIO”
Daily Trips without Mass Transport Daily Trips with All Mass Transport
Mode
System System
2029 2035 2045 2029 2035 2045
Train 14.50 19.13 22.24 11.35 15.01 17.53
Bus 4.45 5.54 6.43 3.49 4.35 5.07
Car 2.31 3.28 3.87 1.81 2.58 3.05
Two
2.36 3.28 3.87 1.85 2.58 3.05
Wheeler
Auto 2.41 3.39 4.00 1.89 2.66 3.15
Taxi 0.48 0.67 0.78 0.37 0.53 0.62
MRTS 0.00 0.00 0.00 5.77 7.61 8.72
TOTAL 26.51 35.30 41.19 26.51 35.30 41.19
Source: Thane CMP 2018
The economic costs of the capital works and annual operation and maintenance
costs have been calculated from the financial cost estimates by excluding:
The economic costs (Table 20.3) have been derived from financial costs using
following shadow price factor for each component to take care of the distortions
brought by above factors.
TABLE 20-3: FACTORS USED FOR CONVERTING PROJECT COSTS TO ECONOMIC COSTS
S. No Item Factor
1 Capital Cost 0.83
2 Operations & Maintenance Cost 0.87
Table 20.4 and Table 20.5 gives the capital and O&M costs of the MRTS in
financial and economic terms at July'23 price levels respectively.
TABLE 20-5: ECONOMIC COSTS OF METRO- CAPITAL AND O&M (RS IN CRORE)
Cost Component Metro
Construction Cost Including land and R&R 7638
O&M Costs
2029 294
2035 455
2045 941
The Quantification of some of the social benefits has not been attempted
because universally acceptable norms do not exist to facilitate such an exercise.
However, it has been considered appropriate to highlight the same, as given
below:
Inputs used for Economic analysis have been collected from primary and
secondary data sources. Vehicle Operating cost (VOC) and Value of Travel Time
(VOT) are the two important parameters of Economic Analysis.
Other operational parameters required to assess the savings in VOC and VOT,
accidents, pollution for the system in year 2045 is presented in Table 20.9.
Other benefits that will accrue to the society include reduction in emission,
savings due to reduction in accidents. The input for the benefit estimation from
these parameters includes the emission factors by vehicle category as given by
CPCB (Table 20.10).
The methodology adopted to quantify benefits that will accrue to the society
owing to implementation of the metro project include:
• Travel time savings- travel time savings will accrue on two accounts:
o Travel time savings for passenger trips that are shifted to MRTS from
other modes due to higher speed of MRTS project as compared to
‘without’ project scenario.
• Savings in Vehicle Operating Cost- Shifting of passenger trips from road to MRTS
will result in lesser vehicles on roads resulting in saving in VOC. Savings in VOC
will also accrue on two accounts:
o VOC savings of mode wise vehicle trips which have shifted from road to
MRTS.
o The VOC savings are calculated by multiplying the unit VOC cost with
the number of vehicle trips and with the average lead distance for the
particular vehicle category. VOC savings = VOC [Rs. /km] x Average Lead
[km] x no. of vehicle trips
o The VOC savings are calculated for the vehicle types and then added. The
difference of cost in “with” and “without” project is taken to estimate
savings in Vehicle Operating Cost.
o Based on trends of last 3-year data of vehicles and relationship with fatal
and damage accidents data, the reduction in no of accidents is estimated
for reduced no of vehicles on roads due to modal shift of passengers.
reduced number of fatal and damage accidents are then multiplied by
the cost of accident to arrive at savings due to metro.
With input from above tables, the accrued economic benefits for Thane metro
in the horizon year 2051-2052 has been summarized in Table 20.12.
It is clear from the Table that benefits are mainly come from saving of Travel
Time by MRTS (81%), and VOC savings (18%), and benefit from emission
reduction, accident reduction and road maintenance cost (together 1%).
EIRR for 30 years for deriving the values of economic indicators (EIRR, ENPV),
cost and benefit stream for the system has been constructed in terms of money
value. The toolkit on finance and financial analysis 2013 by MOHUA, suggests
that ENPV to be calculated on social cost of capital or government security rate.
Accordingly, ENPV for the system have been calculated on both the rates. Metro
Rail Policy, 2017 prescribes 14% as acceptable EIRR rate for metro project, same
has been considered as the social cost of capital. The government security rate
in July, 2023 is 8.00%. Accordingly, ENPV for the system has been calculated
based on these rates. The summary of the ENPV and EIRR is presented in Table
20.13. The cost and benefit streams for metro system is presented in Table
20.15.
The project has EIRR more than 14%, indicating that the benefits to the society
are more than the social cost of capital of 14%. It also meets the acceptable norm
of MoHUA. Thus the project is economically viable and should be implemented.
The sensitivity analysis has been carried out to see the impact of change in
critical parameters in the range of 5% to 15% on EIRR and is presented in Table
20.14.
Savings in
Capital Cost Travel Time Accident Pollution Reduced
Addition cost Vehicle
without land, Savings (VOT Reduction Reduction Road Total Savings Net Benefits
Year O & M - 87% +Replacement Total Cost Operating
R&R and IDC - Savings)- Benefits - Benefits- Infrastructure /Benefits (Rs. in Crore)
Cost- 83% Cost (VOC)-
83% 100% 90% 100% Costs -87%
90%
24-25
1,436 1,436 (1,436)
25-26
2,776 2,776 (2,776)
26-27
2,961 2,961 (2,961)
27-28
1,447 1,447 (1,447)
28-29
1,138 - 1,138 (1,138)
29-30
294 294 (1,003) 988 7.8 32 7.2 32 (262)
30-31
316 316 (1,017) 1,053 8.3 32 7.7 84 (232)
31-32
339 - 339 (1,032) 1,122 8.9 32 8.1 140 (200)
32-33
365 - 365 6,147 1,067 8.6 29 8.5 7,260 6,896
33-34
392 - 392 6,228 1,135 8.8 30 (259.4) 7,142 6,750
34-35
421 - 421 6,425 1,207 9.1 30 (5.2) 7,667 7,246
35-36
455 - 455 6,510 1,285 9.3 31 (5.4) 7,829 7,374
36-37
488 - 488 6,595 1,367 9.5 31 (5.7) 7,997 7,509
37-38
524 306 830 6,682 1,454 9.8 32 (5.9) 8,171 7,341
38-39
562 - 562 6,769 1,547 10.1 32 (6.3) 8,352 7,790
39-40
604 - 604 6,858 1,646 10.4 32 (6.6) 8,540 7,936
40-41
649 - 649 6,948 1,751 10.7 33 (7.0) 8,736 8,087
41-42
697 - 697 7,039 1,863 11.0 33 (7.3) 8,939 8,243
42-43
749 - 749 8,518 1,566 9.8 27 113.8 10,234 9,485
43-44
805 - 805 8,617 1,663 10.4 27 3.2 10,321 9,516
44-45
865 - 865 8,717 1,767 11.1 27 3.4 10,525 9,660
45-46
941 - 941 9,023 1,877 11.8 28 3.5 10,943 10,002
46-47
1,015 - 1,015 9,128 1,994 12.6 28 3.7 11,166 10,151
47-48
1,096 2,052 3,147 9,234 2,119 13.5 28 3.9 11,398 8,250
48-49
1,182 - 1,182 9,341 2,251 14.4 28 4.1 11,638 10,456
49-50
1,267 - 1,267 9,449 2,391 15.3 29 4.3 11,888 10,621
50-51
1,358 - 1,358 9,559 2,540 16.4 29 4.5 12,149 10,790
51-52
1,457 - 1,457 9,670 2,698 17.5 30 4.8 12,420 10,963
52-53
1,563 334 1,897 12,659 2,832 18.8 30 (193.2) 15,346 13,449
53-54
1,678 - 1,678 12,805 3,008 20.1 30 (13.1) 15,850 14,173
RITES Ltd. Page 20-12
Detailed Project Report for Thane Metro Rail
F Savings in
Capital Cost Travel Time Accident Pollution Reduced
Addition cost Vehicle
without land, Savings (VOT Reduction Reduction Road Total Savings Net Benefits
Year O & M - 87% +Replacement Total Cost Operating
R&R and IDC - Savings)- Benefits - Benefits- Infrastructure /Benefits (Rs. in Crore)
Cost- 83% Cost (VOC)-
83% 100% 90% 100% Costs -87%
90%
9,758 20,080 2,691 32,529 1,79,868 44,191 294 749 (334) 2,24,768 1,92,239
EIRR 23.80%
The appointment of Interim and General Consultants may be initiated for project
management including preparation of tender documents – as soon as DPR is
approved by Government of India. The possible dates of important milestones are
given in Table 21.1.
The commercial operation on Thane Metro corridor may start from January 2029.
The PPP model to be adopted and implementation structure shall be decided at the
time of implementation.
The legislation for construction of Nagpur and Pune Metro may also provide legal
cover for construction of Thane Metro. Implementation of proposed Thane Metro can
be done under “The Metro Railways (Amendment) Act 2009”.
During the implementation of the project several problems with regard toacquisition
of land, diversion of utilities, shifting of structures falling on the project alignment,
rehabilitation of project affected persons, etc. are likely to arise. For
The National Urban Transport Policy 2006 has recommended setting up of Unified
Metropolitan Transport Authorities (UMTA’s) in million plus cities. The policy
document stipulates following on UMTA.
“The current structure of governance for the transport sector is not equipped to deal
with the problems of urban transport. These structures were put in place well before
the problems of urban transport began to surface in India and hence do not provide
for the right coordination mechanisms to deal with urban transport. The central
government will, therefore, recommend the setting up of Unified Metropolitan
Transport Authorities (UMTA’s) in all million cities to facilitate more coordinated
planning and implementation of urban transport programs & projects and integrated
management of urban transport systems. Such Metropolitan Transport Authorities
would need statutory backing in order to be meaningful.”
The metro rail policy - 2017 makes it mandatory for the cities which are planning to
have MRTS to address their mass transport requirements to have city level UMTA.
For integrated approach in planning and management of urban transport in the city,
State Government shall constitute Unified Metropolitan Transport Authority (UMTA)
as a statutory body. This Authority would implement various proposals as per CMP for
the city, organize investments in urban transport infrastructure, establish effective
coordination among various urban transport agencies, manage the Urban Transport
Fund (UTF) etc. UMTA will have to play active role in the implementationof Thane
Metro being a city government authority.
Apart from a High Power Committee under the chairmanship of Chief Secretary,
Maharashtra, a 'Steering Committee' may be set up under the chairmanship of
Commissioner of Thane Municipal Corporation. Other members of this Committee
may be District Collector, Municipal Commissioner, and other heads of civic bodies
who will be connected in one way or the other with the implementation of the project.
During the implementation of the project several problems with regard toacquisition
of land, diversion of utilities, shifting of structures falling on the project alignment,
rehabilitation of project affected persons, etc. are likely to arise. The steering
committee will work for expeditious resolution of these problems at local level. This
Committee may meet regularly to sort out all problems brought before it by Maha
Metro.
On acceptance of the Detailed Project Report, following actions may be initiated for
implementing of Thane Metro project:
हषट
भ
: एआ-3324/प..156/-7,
ल, ई 400 032.
: 07 ऑ, 2024.
प :-
07) .5.03.2019 ू ल भच .एआ-
ण आल आह. हू प त आ “इक अ ॉ ल"आ
प ण आल अ प प च .22.03.2019 च
च ृहा ह ल ह ब, 2019 ध पध
ल “Report on Benchmarking for cost Estimation of Metro Rail Projects” भाल
प ट प उभठ आ थ, च
हल त च अ ृहा ह ल
प ल ू ऊ पच ूळ ू .13,095 ाच
प अहलध आरथ ा अल ण आल . 10412.61
ृषठ 10 ै 1
ः एआ-3324/प..156/-7,
अद प अहल प 11.08.2021 च
प .04 , 2024 च .12200.10
प च त आडह ठ अ ळ ट प अल
ण प ल आह. च च शभू प
आ आह. , भा भ
ल .8 , 2019 च ध
ण च ह. ढलप ल आह: -
ठ अ ळ ट प ल च शभ
ू
पच त आड ज
ललप ण आह :-
1) 1) ठ अ ळ ट 29 .. ल, 20 उन थ 2 भ थ
अल . 12200.10 ( ल प) प ू च
ट प हषट ट ल ॉो ल. (हट) अल ण
ण आह .
2) ठ अ ळ ट पठ .12200.10 प ू च,
च ष-3 ध ू प त हभ आड ण
आह.
3) पठ ज भ, ठ हल पठ अ,
भू, ू ह ल म व एू
. 5078.04 हटल उल ण ठ हलल
ण आह.
4) च च 50% ाठ . 354.11 आ ज
ल ाठ . 615.64 अ एू . 969.75 इ ज
ू व य हय महू हटल उल ण
ण आह.
5) पठ ज ण ऱ व य ाच अ ,
ल इ. द अ ख , त भ, प (-1)
पृष 10 ै 2
ः एआ-3324/प..156/-7,
वथ ल, हट चध य हय (subsidiary Loan
Agreement) ण .
6) पठ ू . 1151.13 भ . 354.11
व य णठ हट
ण ण आह .
7) प /ह अथ इ त थ ऱ
ाच ल व हट हल.
ळ ह अ भ ह हट घ.
8) पच ू प ाध ढ, ल ल ल,
पच वध ल, आध ल आ , प
उभच ह ध ढ ळ ल, अ ळ ढ झ
अ ढ थ प, / थ चल
(आध ल व) उल ऊ अ
ओ, एएआ इ अ धू ा हऱ आरथ सू
भण प ण आह .
9) प ह भा .2, भ .15 , 2024 अ
जल ट पच ठ थ उच (High Power Committee)
च आण ण आह .
10) पच ा ह ढ झ, ढ ू भ/
ण हट ठ हलल े ण आह.
11) ट ल म ट ालच
थच ळ णठ भ
ळ हटल उल ण ण आह
भ े ण आह.
12) पच ठ प अहलध ण आल ट
ालच आ अल ठ हल इ
/ थ पल हटल ह
ण े ण आह.
13) पच ा भू, ह ल लळ ढ
ह ह ण ठ हल हट े ण
आह.
पृष 10 ै 3
ः एआ-3324/प..156/-7,
14) रध हऱ ू लल
थ च ठ हल ण
अथ प पग ण ए पठ
पग ठ ृहा हय भ, प-
1700/आ-31/ल-2, 12.12.2000 अ लू लल
पह लू ण अथ पल पगच ठ
ज ठ ठ हल/हट उल ह ल
ठ भ .. -2017/प..23/..26, 13.06.2018
ल ूप अ ए ल ण प
ण आह.
15) ट ल पच ा अ ढ ह ह ऊ
प उभ ह ण , हट ठ हलल
ण आह.
16) ठ अ ळ ट पच रध , ी त
हषट ट ल ॉो ल. ल ह ण आल ठ
प (SPA) ण : ण आह .
प हट .
17) प अ , प ळ प अहल
ण आल ृह , ठ ध ाक ण
आल रच लल प झल अभ (learning from earlier
operational routes) हट .
18) हषट प अ, 1966 च अ ठ अ ळ ट
प अभ (ओ) लू ण : ण आह .
प हट .
19) ठ अ ळ ट पभाल भच .8 , 2019
च ल अ 1 5 थल ष-2 3 ळ उ
हल.
03. ह भ अौ भ .391/1444 11/09/2024
त भ अौ भ . 475/व-3 24/09/2024 अ प अभप
.ळ .30/09/2024 च ैठ ल
ण आह.
पृष 10 ै 4
ः एआ-3324/प..156/-7,
CHAUDHARI
e9e69852845f0a, postalCode=400032, st=Maharashtra,
serialNumber=E1FEEA176A1E6A273C574BB6F1A1EDB58BF87424118B
CCD6EE07340581733B70, cn=VIJAY KARBHARI CHAUDHARI
Date: 2024.10.07 18:02:56 +05'30'
( ौ)
ह , हषट
प,
पृष 10 ै 5
ः एआ-3324/प..156/-7,
पृष 10 ै 6
ः एआ-3324/प..156/-7,
ट र एू 22 ट ै भू अू उ ह
उन हल. ह व, ृध ण अ.
ि हल. र ठ, ल , ळ ौ, ल
, ई , लठ रल, , ॉ. थ ृह,
, , , ळ, ॉ फ, ल, आझ ॉ,
, ल औद , ळ ,ळ , , ौ, ठ
अ थ प आह .
(ई) :-
ठ ळ ट प ौ ल थल एू 49.50 ह ल
आ प आह. ल थ 18 ह ध
ण ल. ध ॅ ल लईठ 41 र अल.
**
VIJAY KARBHARI
Digitally signed by VIJAY KARBHARI CHAUDHARI
DN: c=IN, o=GOVERNMENT OF MAHARASHTRA, ou=URBAN DEVELOPMENT
DEPARTMENT,
2.5.4.20=d242787d25852443527f4a3927a849feec29ce26368b8badbee9e69852845f
CHAUDHARI
0a, postalCode=400032, st=Maharashtra,
serialNumber=E1FEEA176A1E6A273C574BB6F1A1EDB58BF87424118BCCD6EE07340
581733B70, cn=VIJAY KARBHARI CHAUDHARI
Date: 2024.10.07 18:03:17 +05'30'
( ौ)
ह , हषट
पृष 10 ै 7
ः एआ-3324/प..156/-7,
ष 2
ठ ह ळ ट प भल
VIJAY KARBHARI
Digitally signed by VIJAY KARBHARI CHAUDHARI
DN: c=IN, o=GOVERNMENT OF MAHARASHTRA, ou=URBAN DEVELOPMENT
DEPARTMENT,
2.5.4.20=d242787d25852443527f4a3927a849feec29ce26368b8badbee9e69852845f0a
CHAUDHARI
, postalCode=400032, st=Maharashtra,
serialNumber=E1FEEA176A1E6A273C574BB6F1A1EDB58BF87424118BCCD6EE073405
81733B70, cn=VIJAY KARBHARI CHAUDHARI
Date: 2024.10.07 18:03:35 +05'30'
( ौ)
ह , हषट
पृष 10 ै 8
ः एआ-3324/प..156/-7,
ष -3
ठ ह ळ ट पल आरथ हभ आ
: * ज भ, भू, ह ज
य आ ल म व ठ हल
आह.
VIJAY KARBHARI
Digitally signed by VIJAY KARBHARI CHAUDHARI
DN: c=IN, o=GOVERNMENT OF MAHARASHTRA, ou=URBAN
DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT,
2.5.4.20=d242787d25852443527f4a3927a849feec29ce26368b8badbee
CHAUDHARI
9e69852845f0a, postalCode=400032, st=Maharashtra,
serialNumber=E1FEEA176A1E6A273C574BB6F1A1EDB58BF87424118B
CCD6EE07340581733B70, cn=VIJAY KARBHARI CHAUDHARI
Date: 2024.10.07 18:03:53 +05'30'
( ौ)
ह , हषट
पृष 10 ै 9
ः एआ-3324/प..156/-7,
ष -4
ठ ह ळ ट प ण ल उभण इ स:-
ठ ह ळ ट ा प इ उभण
ललप आह:-
अ. ट रच ह ू 500 . अि ऱ , अू आ
अ ई े (ए.ए.आ.) ण ू ल
अू ल प ूल अ ढ
ई े ूल ल अूच ै 50% ट
प .
. हषट प अ, 1966 च ू आण
ण ऱ ह 100% ि ढ आण दल
ू ठ हल ूल हऱ ू उ ह
ट प .
. हू हू प ण ऱ ह लत
1 अभ लण ू 2015 अ .37 21.08.2015 अ
हषट हल अ ल 149 ध ण आल आह. ठ
हल ूल हऱ ू उ ह पठ
.
. ट च कज व प ह उन प पठ
.
सू प ह ह ज च ए "र
ह ध" ठ ण क अू ट पठ ल
पठ ण ाच ठ अू
अ ू उभ ण प आह .
VIJAY KARBHARI
Digitally signed by VIJAY KARBHARI CHAUDHARI
DN: c=IN, o=GOVERNMENT OF MAHARASHTRA, ou=URBAN DEVELOPMENT
DEPARTMENT,
2.5.4.20=d242787d25852443527f4a3927a849feec29ce26368b8badbee9e69852
CHAUDHARI
845f0a, postalCode=400032, st=Maharashtra,
serialNumber=E1FEEA176A1E6A273C574BB6F1A1EDB58BF87424118BCCD6EE0
7340581733B70, cn=VIJAY KARBHARI CHAUDHARI
Date: 2024.10.07 18:04:11 +05'30'
( ौ)
ह , हषट
पृष 10 ै 10